Blackboard Academic Suite™ Administrator Manual

Blackboard Academic Suite™ Administrator Manual

Blackboard Academic Suite
Administrator Manual
Release 6.1
Blackboard Learning System
Blackboard Portal System
Blackboard Learning System - Basic Edition
Date Published: March 3, 2004
Date of Last Revision:
Copyright © 2004 by Blackboard Inc. All rights reserved.
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Blackboard, the Blackboard logo, Blackboard e-Education Suite, Blackboard Learning System,
Blackboard Learning System ML, Blackboard Portal System, Blackboard Transaction System,
Blackboard Building Blocks, and Bringing Education Online are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Blackboard Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Intel and Pentium are
registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Sun, Solaris, UltraSPARC, and Java
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and/or
other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries. Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and/or other
countries. Apache is a trademark of The Apache Software Foundation in the United States and/or
other countries. Macromedia, Authorware and Shockwave are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Real Player and Real
Audio Movie are trademarks of RealNetworks in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe and
Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries. Macintosh and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. WordPerfect is a registered trademark of
Corel Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Crystal Reports is a trademark of
Crystal Decisions in the United States and/or other countries. WebEQ is a trademark of Design
Science, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. JSpell is a trademark of The Solution Café in
the United States and/or other countries. Other product and company names mentioned herein may
be the trademarks of their respective owners. Patents pending.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. All rights reserved. Made and printed in the USA.
No part of the contents of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means
without the written permission of the publisher, Blackboard Inc.
Worldwide Headquarters
Blackboard Inc.
1899 L Street, NW, 5th Floor
Washington, DC 20036-3861 USA
800-424-9299 toll free US & Canada
+1-202-463-4860 telephone
+1-202-463-4863 facsimile
www.blackboard.com
International Headquarters
Blackboard International B.V.
Keizersgracht 106
1015 CS Amsterdam
The Netherlands
+31 20 5206884 (NL) telephone
+31 20 5206885 (NL) facsimile
global.blackboard.com
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 2
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents.......................................................................................................... 3
About the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Manual ............................................. 9
System Control Panel .................................................................................................. 11
Blackboard Learning System – Basic ............................................................................. 13
Blackboard Learning System ........................................................................................ 15
Blackboard Portal System ............................................................................................ 16
Blackboard Content System ......................................................................................... 17
Part 1—Courses ..................................................................................................................... 18
Chapter 1—Updating Course Properties ................................................................................. 19
List/Modify Courses ..................................................................................................... 21
Properties: Course ...................................................................................................... 23
Add Users to Course.................................................................................................... 25
List/Modify Users in Course .......................................................................................... 27
Modify User Properties in Course................................................................................... 29
Change Password for User ........................................................................................... 31
Remove Users from Course .......................................................................................... 32
Course Properties ....................................................................................................... 34
Course Options ........................................................................................................... 36
Course Availability ...................................................................................................... 38
Guest Access.............................................................................................................. 40
Course Duration ......................................................................................................... 41
Enrollment Options ..................................................................................................... 43
Enrollment Fees.......................................................................................................... 45
Categorize Courses ..................................................................................................... 46
Course Access Statistics .............................................................................................. 47
Course Utilities ........................................................................................................... 49
Course Recycler .......................................................................................................... 50
Export Course ............................................................................................................ 52
Course Images ........................................................................................................... 54
Course Design ............................................................................................................ 55
Course Banner............................................................................................................ 57
Course Quotas Override............................................................................................... 58
Chapter 2—Creating Courses and Enrolling Users ................................................................... 60
Create Course ............................................................................................................ 61
Batch Create Courses .................................................................................................. 63
Batch Enroll Users....................................................................................................... 65
Chapter 3—Course Utilities .................................................................................................. 67
Remove Course .......................................................................................................... 69
Copy Course............................................................................................................... 71
Copy Course Materials into a New Course ...................................................................... 72
Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course................................................................ 75
Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) ............................................................................ 79
Import Course ............................................................................................................ 81
Export Course ............................................................................................................ 84
Recovering a package from a browser timeout................................................................ 87
Archive Course ........................................................................................................... 88
Restore Course ........................................................................................................... 90
Batch Import/Export/Archive/Restore Course ................................................................. 92
Batch Copy ................................................................................................................ 94
Adding File Types for Use with Course Content Items ...................................................... 96
Chapter 4—Course Configuration Options .............................................................................. 98
Course Settings .........................................................................................................100
Set Default Course Properties......................................................................................102
Set Default Course Design ..........................................................................................104
Set Default Course Menu ............................................................................................106
Add New Area—Content Area ......................................................................................108
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 3
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add New Area—Tool Area ...........................................................................................110
Add New Area—Link Area............................................................................................112
Course Tools .............................................................................................................114
Enable/Disable Course Creation ...................................................................................116
Course Role Rename ..................................................................................................118
Course Disk Quotas....................................................................................................119
Quick Edit Options .....................................................................................................120
Images and Icons ......................................................................................................121
Set Course Images.....................................................................................................122
Select Icon Themes....................................................................................................124
Chapter 5—Course Catalog .................................................................................................125
Catalog.....................................................................................................................126
Categorize Courses ....................................................................................................127
Categorize Courses—Link Categories to a Course ...........................................................129
Manage Course Catalog ..............................................................................................130
Create/Modify Category ..............................................................................................132
Course Catalog Options ..............................................................................................134
Chapter 6—Organizations ...................................................................................................135
Organization Management ..........................................................................................136
Discussion Boards ......................................................................................................137
Add or Modify Discussion Board ...................................................................................138
Part 2—Users .......................................................................................................................139
Chapter 1—Update Users ...................................................................................................141
List/Modify Users .......................................................................................................142
Properties: User.........................................................................................................144
Change Password.......................................................................................................146
View User-Course Information: User ............................................................................147
Modify User’s Role in Course .......................................................................................148
Chapter 2—Create Users ....................................................................................................150
Create User...............................................................................................................151
Batch Create Users ....................................................................................................154
Chapter 3—Remove Users ..................................................................................................156
Remove Users from the System...................................................................................157
Batch Remove Users from the System ..........................................................................159
Chapter 4—Observers ........................................................................................................161
Observer Management ...............................................................................................162
List/Modify Observers .................................................................................................163
Add User to Observer .................................................................................................165
Part 3—Portal Areas ..............................................................................................................167
Chapter 1—Manage Tabs....................................................................................................169
Manage Tabs .............................................................................................................172
Add Module Tab .........................................................................................................174
Add Tool Tab .............................................................................................................175
Add Link Tab .............................................................................................................176
Tab Properties ...........................................................................................................177
Modify Tab ................................................................................................................179
Left Side Tool Panel Properties.....................................................................................181
Manage Links (Off-Campus Learning) Content ...............................................................183
Add/Modify an Off-Campus Content Link.......................................................................185
Manage Sponsorship Content ......................................................................................187
Default Content .........................................................................................................189
Default Layout...........................................................................................................191
Preview By Portal Role................................................................................................193
Services ...................................................................................................................194
Add/Modify Services Folder .........................................................................................196
Add Services Link ......................................................................................................198
Chapter 2—Manage Modules ...............................................................................................200
Manage Modules ........................................................................................................201
Create a New Module .................................................................................................203
Create Module/Edit Module..........................................................................................204
Login Module.............................................................................................................206
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 4
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Module Contents: Login Module ...................................................................................208
Module Contents: Channel Module ...............................................................................209
Module Contents: HTML Module ...................................................................................210
Module Contents: URL Module .....................................................................................211
Module Contents: Multi-Section Module ........................................................................213
Add/Modify Section to a Multi-Section Module................................................................214
Module Contents: Opinion Poll Module ..........................................................................216
Module Contents: Multiple Choice Module......................................................................217
Module Content: Image Module ...................................................................................219
Module Contents: External Link Module ........................................................................220
Add/Modify Link to an External Link Module ..................................................................221
Export Module ...........................................................................................................222
Chapter 3—Manage Channels..............................................................................................224
Manage Channels.......................................................................................................225
Add/Modify Channel ...................................................................................................226
Chapter 4—Manage Tool Panel ............................................................................................227
Manage Tool Panel .....................................................................................................228
Add/Modify Tool.........................................................................................................229
Add/Edit Tool Panel External Link.................................................................................230
Chapter 5—System Settings ...............................................................................................231
Settings....................................................................................................................232
Customize Top Frame.................................................................................................234
Sponsorship or Hotlinks ..............................................................................................236
Manage Hot Links ......................................................................................................237
Add/Modify Hot Link Tool ............................................................................................238
Add/Edit External Link ................................................................................................239
Primary Site Sponsor..................................................................................................240
Customize Module Theme ...........................................................................................242
Set Frame Size ..........................................................................................................243
Edit Portal Roles ........................................................................................................244
Part 4—Building Blocks Management .......................................................................................245
Chapter 1—System Extensions............................................................................................246
Installing and Uninstalling System Extensions ...............................................................247
Manage System Extensions .........................................................................................249
Examine System Extension .........................................................................................251
Download System Extensions ......................................................................................252
Install System Extension Page .....................................................................................253
Chapter 2—Reports ...........................................................................................................254
System Reports .........................................................................................................255
Standard System Reports ...........................................................................................256
View Report ..............................................................................................................258
Advanced System Reporting........................................................................................260
Advanced System Reporting: Sample Templates............................................................263
Auto-Reporting Options ..............................................................................................264
Send System Statistics to Blackboard ...........................................................................265
Chapter 3—System Information ..........................................................................................266
System Config Info ....................................................................................................267
System Information ...................................................................................................268
Registration Information .............................................................................................269
Chapter 4—Logs................................................................................................................270
Logs.........................................................................................................................271
Send System Logs .....................................................................................................272
Download Individual System Logs ................................................................................274
Manage Log Rotation..................................................................................................275
Log Descriptions ........................................................................................................277
Cartridge Import Status..............................................................................................278
Copy Course Status....................................................................................................279
Part 5—System Tools ............................................................................................................281
Chapter 1—System-wide Announcements and Events ............................................................283
Announcements .........................................................................................................284
Add/Modify Announcement..........................................................................................285
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 5
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Institution Calendar ...................................................................................................287
Add/Modify Calendar Event .........................................................................................289
Calendar Quick Jump..................................................................................................291
Chapter 2—Email ..............................................................................................................292
Send Email................................................................................................................293
Email Users...............................................................................................................294
Chapter 3—Text Box Editor and Spell Check .........................................................................295
Manage Text Box Editor ..............................................................................................296
About Spell Check ......................................................................................................298
Manage Spell Check ...................................................................................................299
Download Word List ...................................................................................................300
Upload Word List .......................................................................................................301
Part 6—Security and Integration .............................................................................................302
Chapter 1—Security...........................................................................................................303
Integration Password..................................................................................................303
SSL Choice................................................................................................................304
Authentication Config .................................................................................................306
Manage Context Encryption Keys .................................................................................307
Download the Context Encryption Key ..........................................................................310
Create a Context Encryption Key .................................................................................311
Deciphering Encrypted Context....................................................................................312
Integration Password..................................................................................................314
Chapter 2— Customize the Login and Gateway Pages ............................................................315
Login Page Customization ...........................................................................................316
Gateway Page Customization.......................................................................................318
System Settings ........................................................................................................320
Gateway Options .......................................................................................................322
Chapter 3—User Record Properties and Privileges..................................................................324
Portal Roles...............................................................................................................325
Administrative User Roles ...........................................................................................326
Course Roles .............................................................................................................329
Admin User Accounts Created at Install ........................................................................332
Customize User Profile................................................................................................333
User Privileges...........................................................................................................335
Modify Privilege .........................................................................................................336
Part 7—Assistance.................................................................................................................338
Designate Local Support Contact .................................................................................339
Accessibility Tips........................................................................................................340
Part 8—Blackboard Content System ........................................................................................342
Chapter 1 – Manage Content ..............................................................................................343
Content System.........................................................................................................345
Copy Directory or Folder .............................................................................................347
Move Directory or Folder.............................................................................................348
Email Entries .............................................................................................................349
Workflow Activities.....................................................................................................351
Modify folder .............................................................................................................353
Properties .................................................................................................................354
Manage Permissions ...................................................................................................356
Add Permissions for a User or a Group of Users .............................................................358
Add Permissions for a Course User List .........................................................................360
Add Permissions for a Portal User List...........................................................................362
Add Permissions for the Public .....................................................................................364
Add Permissions for All System Accounts ......................................................................366
Modify Permissions.....................................................................................................368
Comments ................................................................................................................370
Set Private/Shared Comments.....................................................................................371
Manage Comments ....................................................................................................372
Configure WebDAV.....................................................................................................373
Chapter 2 – Manage Portfolios ............................................................................................375
Manage Portfolios ......................................................................................................376
User Portfolios ...........................................................................................................377
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 6
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Modify Portfolio..........................................................................................................378
Share Portfolio...........................................................................................................381
Send to User .............................................................................................................383
Send to Course or Organization ...................................................................................385
Send to External Users ...............................................................................................386
Portfolio Comments....................................................................................................388
Chapter 3 – Portfolio Templates ..........................................................................................389
Portfolio Templates ....................................................................................................390
Add Portfolio Template ...............................................................................................391
Chapter 4 – Custom Metadata.............................................................................................392
Custom Metadata.......................................................................................................393
Add Metadata Field ....................................................................................................394
Custom Metadata Properties........................................................................................395
Chapter 5 – Display Options ...............................................................................................396
Content List Display Options........................................................................................397
Menu Display Options .................................................................................................399
Manage Shortcut View ................................................................................................401
Shortcut Properties ....................................................................................................402
Manage Folder View ...................................................................................................403
Menu Display Properties .............................................................................................404
Chapter 6 – Content System Settings ..................................................................................406
Default Folder Creation...............................................................................................407
Manage System Creation of Folders: /courses and /organizations ....................................408
Manage System Creation of Folders: /users...................................................................410
Enable/Disable Features and Tools ...............................................................................412
Privacy Settings.........................................................................................................414
Manage eReserves .....................................................................................................415
Chapter 7 – Technical Settings............................................................................................417
Log Settings..............................................................................................................419
Manage Performance Settings .....................................................................................421
Manage Document Stores ...........................................................................................422
Manage Document Store.............................................................................................423
JDBC Settings............................................................................................................425
Storage Location........................................................................................................426
Temporary Storage Location .......................................................................................427
Deletion Audit Trail Report ..........................................................................................428
Audit Trail Settings ....................................................................................................429
Global Schema Settings ..............................................................................................430
Bandwidth Properties .................................................................................................431
Bandwidth Restrictions ...............................................................................................432
Bandwidth Restrictions: /directory name.......................................................................433
Bandwidth Settings ....................................................................................................434
Authentication Options ...............................................................................................435
Full Text Settings.......................................................................................................436
System Information ...................................................................................................438
Appendix – Updates Since Publication......................................................................................439
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 7
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
About the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Manual
Overview
Welcome to the Blackboard Academic Suite! The Blackboard Learning System
(Release 6.1), Blackboard Portal System (Release 6.1), and Blackboard Learning
System - Basic Edition (Release 6.1) offer a robust set of tools, functions, and
features for learning. Besides the features that are included as part of the platform,
there are numerous additional tools that can be added to the Blackboard Learning
System as Blackboard System Extensions.
The Blackboard Academic Suite Administrator Manual details the tools and functions
accessible through the Blackboard Academic Suite’s System Control Panel. Other
Blackboard Academic Suite manuals detail the education features that Instructors,
Students, and a wide variety of other users access through Blackboard Academic
Suite. The advanced integration and data management features available with the
Blackboard Learning System are documented in the Blackboard Learning System
Advanced Integration and the Blackboard Learning System Data Management Manual.
The flexibility of the Blackboard Academic Suite means that not all the tools and
functions that are available are documented in the Blackboard Academic Suite
Administrator Manual. Blackboard System Extensions allow the addition of a variety of
materials, tools, and functions to the Blackboard Academic Suite. Individual System
Extensions are not documented in this manual. For assistance with a System
Extension, contact the vendor. Finally, some tools and functions may appear
differently in the Blackboard Academic Suite than the examples in this manual because
Administrators and Instructors can customize the name and appearance of many
aspects of the Blackboard Academic Suite.
The Blackboard Academic Suite Administrator Manual details the features and
functions available with the Blackboard Learning System, Blackboard Portal System,
and Blackboard Learning System - Basic Edition. For most users, it is only important to
know what Blackboard products are in use when determining if a particular function is
available with that product.
Manual Organization
The Blackboard Academic Suite Administrator Manual begins by introducing the
Blackboard Academic Suite. The rest of the manual is dedicated to the features
available through the System Control Panel. Where appropriate, additional information
on command line tools or administrative features available through the file system are
covered.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 9
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manual Conventions
To make this manual easier to use a number of conventions appear throughout. These
conventions are detailed in the table below.
Symbol
[r]
Bold type
Courier font
Steps
Italics
Description
Required field.
A button or field name.
Text that users should type.
Tasks users should perform.
Italicized text is used for titles as well as to identify a
variable. For example, The title Modify Module page is
actually Modify followed by the exact name of the module
that is to be modified.
Using this manual
This manual is best read as a reference, rather than as a book read cover to cover. If
the manual is viewed online, the embedded links enable the user to navigate quickly
through topics. For readers that prefer to print out and read a paper copy of the
manual, refer to the table of contents to locate topics that are referenced in the text.
Manual Updates
Please note that the Blackboard Academic Suite Administrator Manual is updated
periodically. Check the Date Last Update at the beginning of the manual to ensure that
it is the most recent copy. Any updates are listed in the Appendix.
The HTML version is available by clicking Online Admin Manual from the System
Control Panel and at http://www.blackboard.com/products/services/support. Also, the
Behind the Blackboard extranet includes the most current versions of the user
manuals in PDF format for those who would like to print a hard copy.
Please contact Blackboard Support to report any issues with this manual.
Which Blackboard product is installed?
To find out which Blackboard product you are using follow these steps:
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Click System Config Info from the System Options section of the
System Control Panel.
On the System Config Info page, click System Information.
The System Information page will appear and display what Blackboard
products are in use.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 10
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
System Control Panel
Overview
The System Control Panel is an area only available to users with the proper
administrative privileges. The System Control Panel contains all the features and tools
available through the user interface for administering the system.
Note: The Blackboard Academic Suite requires that cookies be enabled within the Web
browser.
Different features for different licenses
Not all of the features on the System Control Panel will be available to all users. For
example, users running Blackboard Learning System and Blackboard Learning
System—Basic Edition cannot create custom common areas or modules to extend the
portal. Those features are only available with the Blackboard Portal System.
Also, Blackboard Learning System—Basic Edition users cannot change the Integration
Password because they are not licensed to use the advanced integration and data
management tools. Those features are only available with the Blackboard Learning
System.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 11
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Features that are not licensed may appear as gray text within the application and the
links will not work. Of course, users should always check with the System
Administrator—it is possible with some licenses to specifically control access to
features through the User Privileges page.
Virtual installations
Blackboard Learning System and Blackboard Portal System can be licensed to support
several installations on the same hardware. Each of these installations is considered a
“Virtual Installation,” including the first or base installation. For more information on
installing and managing Virtual Installations please see the Setup Guide appropriate
for the operating system.
The System Control Panel includes an additional section accessible only by the
root_admin user for managing Virtual Installations. This section of the panel is
documented in the Setup Guides as well.
Administrators as Students
One important consideration for those with Administrative access that are also enrolled
as Students: a separate user account must be used for the Student role. An
Administrator acting as a Student will create problems in the system.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 12
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Blackboard Learning System – Basic
Overview
Basic features
The Blackboard Learning System – Basic Edition includes the course management
features. It does not include the advanced portal or the integration and security
features available with other licenses.
A quick look at the System Control Panel shows the major features available with
Blackboard Learning System – Basic Edition. Those features that are available appear
as live links and those that are not are grayed out.
Some of the live features are limited in their functions. For example, there is limited
control over portal tabs and modules. Blackboard Learning System – Basic users can
manage the content in existing tabs and modules but may not create new ones.
However, it is only possible to create new tabs and modules with a fully licensed
Blackboard Portal System.
Using this manual as a Basic user
Basic users will find that several of the features described in this manual are not
included in the feature set available to them. Please keep in mind that this document
reviews all of the possible features when licensing the Blackboard Academic Suite. If
unsure about the availability of a specific feature, check the system to see if it is
available.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 13
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Other than the System Administrator, most administrative users only have access to
specific sections of the System Control Panel. For example, an Account Administrator
can access the User administration features but cannot create a course. Please check
with the System Administrator if it seems that a feature should be available but is not.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 14
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Blackboard Learning System
Overview
Basic features
The Blackboard Learning System includes the course management features as well as
advanced integration and security features not available with the Basic edition. The
Blackboard Learning System does not include the advanced portal features available
with the Blackboard Portal System.
A quick look at the System Control Panel shows the major features available with
Blackboard Learning System. Those features that are available appear as live links and
those that are not are grayed out.
Some of the live features are limited in their functions. For example, there is limited
control over portal tabs and modules. Blackboard Learning System users can manage
the content in existing tabs and modules but may not create new ones. However, it is
only possible to create new tabs and modules with a fully licensed Blackboard Portal
System.
Using this manual as a Blackboard Learning System user
Blackboard Learning System users will find that some of the portal features described
in this manual are not included in the feature set available to them. Please keep in
mind that this document reviews all of the possible features when licensing the
Blackboard Learning System and the Blackboard Portal System. If unsure about the
availability of a specific feature, check the system to see if it is available.
Other than the System Administrator, most administrative users only have access to
specific sections of the System Control Panel. For example, an Account Administrator
can access the User administration features but cannot create a course. Please check
with the System Administrator if it seems that a feature should be available but is not.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 15
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Blackboard Portal System
Overview
The Blackboard Portal System includes the advanced portal features not available with
the Blackboard Learning System or the Blackboard Learning System – Basic edition.
The Blackboard Portal System is a separate product from the Blackboard Learning
System. Currently, it is not possible to license the Blackboard Portal System without
also licensing the Blackboard Learning System.
Portal features
A quick look at the System Control Panel shows the major features available with
Blackboard Portal System. Those features that are associated with the Portal appear in
the Organizations and Portal Areas of the System Control Panel.
Using this manual as a Blackboard Portal System user
Because the Blackboard Portal System is licensed with the Blackboard Learning
System, almost all of the features documented in this manual are available to Portal
users. The only exception is that Virtual Installations must be licensed before using
those features specific to Virtual Installations.
Other than the System Administrator, most administrative users only have access to
specific sections of the System Control Panel. For example, an Account Administrator
can access the User administration features but cannot create a course. Please check
with the System Administrator if it seems that a feature should be available but is not.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 16
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Blackboard Content System
Overview
The Blackboard Content System is a file repository with several sophisticated features
for working with content. It is fully integrated with the Blackboard Learning System
and the Blackboard Portal System—making use of a similar interface as well as
creating repositories for Blackboard Learning System courses and users.
Blackboard Content System Enabled
One of the new features in Release 6.1 of the Blackboard Learning System is the
ability to integrate the Blackboard Content System. Once added, the Blackboard
Content System works seamlessly with the other systems that comprise the
Blackboard Academic Suite.
Please contact your Blackboard Account Manager for more information about the
availability of the Blackboard Content System.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 17
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Part 1—Courses
Overview
In this part
The Courses section appears at the top left of the System Control Panel. It includes
the tools and features available to Administrators for creating and overseeing
individual courses as well as setting parameters for all courses.
Part 1—Courses includes the following chapters.
Chapter
Updating Course Properties
Creating Courses and Enrolling Users
Course Utilities
Course Configuration Options
Course Catalog
Organizations
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This chapter reviews the options for
administering a course.
This chapter reviews the tools for
creating courses and enrolling users.
This chapter reviews the tools for
reusing courses and making incremental
backups.
This chapter reviews the settings that
can be applied to all courses.
This chapter reviews management of the
Course Catalog.
This chapter reviews the differences
between managing courses and
managing organizations.
Page 18
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 1—Updating Course Properties
Overview
Administrators can change the settings, enrollments, and availability of an individual
course. All of the features available to an Administrator to manage an individual
course are described in this chapter.
In this chapter
Chapter 1—Updating Course Properties includes the following topics.
Topic
List/Modify Courses
Properties: Course
Add Users to Course
List/Modify Users in Course
Modify User Properties in Course
Change Password for User
Remove Users from Course
Course Properties
Course Options
Course Availability
Guest Access
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the List/Modify Courses
page. Select a course from this page to
modify the course properties.
This topic covers the Properties: Course
page. This page includes all the options
Administrators have for managing
course settings.
This topic covers the Add Users to
Course page. Administrators can enroll
users in the course or assign staff to the
course from this page.
This topic covers the List/Modify Users in
Course page. This page lists all the
users participating in the course. From
this page an Administrator can make
changes to the user account including
the user’s role in the course.
This topic covers the Modify User
Properties in Course page. The
Administrator can make changes to a
user account from this page.
This topic covers the Change Password
for User page. From this page an
Administrator can change a user’s
password.
This topic covers the Remove Users
from Course page. Use this page to
unenroll users from a course.
This topic covers the Course Properties
page. From this page an Administrator
can change the name and description of
a course.
This topic covers the Course Options
page. The Course Options page is a
menu page that includes links to several
features for configuring a course.
This topic covers the Course Availability
page. An Administrator can set whether
or not a course is available to users
from this page.
This topic covers the Guest Access page.
An Administrator can set whether or not
users with a Administrative User Role of
Guest can access this course.
Page 19
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Course Duration
Enrollment Options
Enrollment Fees
Categorize Courses
Course Access Statistics
Course Utilities
Course Recycler
Export Course
Course Images
Course Design
Course Banner
Course Quotas Override
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Administrator Manual
This topic covers the Course Duration
page. An Administrator can define the
when the course is available.
This topic covers the Enrollment Options
page. From this page an Administrator
can set how users are enrolled in the
course.
This topic covers the Enrollment Fees
page. Administrators can display the
cost of a course but cannot use this
page to collect money or verify
payment.
This topic covers the Categorize Courses
page. Administrators assign courses to
categories in the catalog.
This Topic covers the Course Access
Statistics page. Administrators can view
how the course is being used.
This topic covers the Course Utilities
page. This is a menu page with links to
features that are useful for reusing
content.
This topic covers the Course Recycler
page. Recycling a course removes
enrollments and other areas so that the
same course may be taught to a new
group of students.
This topic covers the Export Course
page. Exporting a course creates a
package of the course content that can
be used again at a later time.
This topic covers the Course Images
page. The Course Images page is a
menu page with links to features to alter
the appearance of the course.
This topic covers the Course Design
page. Administrators can change the
appearance of the Course Menu from
this page.
This topic covers the Course Banner
page. Administrators can add an image
to the top of the course from this page.
This topic covers the Course Quotas
Override page. Administrators can set a
disk space limit for the course from this
page.
Page 20
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
List/Modify Courses
Overview
Administrators can view sorted lists of courses and select a course to modify from the
List/Modify Courses page. The search tabs at the top of the page are used to create a
list of courses based on the defined parameters. After creating a list of courses, click
on the course link to enter courses or the click Properties to modify the settings.
Course records that are set to Unavailable are preceded by a circle symbol with a slash
through it. Also, the record will appear in gray text. To make a record available, click
Properties to modify the user record and change the availability setting.
With Blackboard Learning System Course records may also be disabled in the
database. Disabled Course records are preceded by a circle symbol with an ‘x’ through
it. Like unavailable records, disabled records will appear in gray text. For more
information on the properties of disabled records, please see the Blackboard Learning
System Advanced Integration and Data Management Manual.
Find the List/Modify Courses page
Click List/Modify Courses from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 21
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Search for Courses
The List/Modify Courses page contains a search function at the top of the page.
Administrators can search using different variables selected from the search tabs. The
following search tabs are available on the page:
Properties

Search: The search parameters on this tab can be used separately or in
tandem to further narrow the list generated. To use this tab: Click the Course
ID, Instructor, or Title/Description option. Enter a value in the field. Then
click the All Courses, Month, or Day option to define the list based on when
the courses where created. The search function will create a list of courses
with that value created in the time selected.

A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a
Course ID. A list of all courses with an ID that begins with that character will
appear.

List All: Click List All to view all the courses on the system.
Click Properties to access the Properties: Course page for that course. The
Properties: Course page allows the Administrator to customize the settings for a
course.
Note: Changes to the course settings for courses available to users should be done
with care. Disabling or changing a setting can significantly alter a course—in some
cases, resulting in the loss of some content.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 22
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Properties: Course
Overview
Find this page
The Properties: Course page grants access to many of the same course Web site
management functions and tools available from the Course Control Panel. From this
page, the Administrator customizes and configures the settings for a specific course
Web site; however, the Administrator cannot directly modify the content of a course
Web site through this page.
Follow these steps to find the Properties: Course page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Available functions
The following functions are available from the Properties: Course page:
To . . .
enroll users in the
course
view the users in
the course and
update a user
profile or course
role
delete users from
the course
click . . .
Add Users to This Course. The Add Users to Course page
will appear. From this page Administrators can enroll
students or assign faculty to the course.
List/Modify Users in This Course. The List/Modify Users
in Course page will appear. From this page Administrators
can view a list of users participating in the course and make
changes to users’ accounts.
Remove Users from This Course. The Remove Users
From Course page will appear. From this page
Administrators can delete a user from the course. This will
only remove the user from the course it will not delete the
user from the system.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 23
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
change the name,
description, and
other basic
information about
the course
change the
availability,
duration, or
access privileges
for the course
change the Course
Catalog Categories
associated with
the course
view stats for the
course
Administrator Manual
Course Properties. The Course Properties page will
appear. From this page Administrators can change the
name and description of the course. It is not possible to
change the Course ID.
Course Options. The Course Options page will appear. This
page includes several features for changing the
characteristics of the course.
Course Categories. The Categorize Courses page will
appear. From this page Administrators can create a link
between a course and a category in the course catalog.
Course Statistics. The Course Access Statistics. From this
page Administrators can generate reports that show which
users are accessing what areas of the course and with what
frequency.
recycle or archive
Course Utilities. The Course Utilities page will appear.
the course
From this page Administrators can prepare the course to be
taught to another group of students by removing certain
areas of the course or create and download a .ZIP package
of the contents of the course for use at a later time.
change the
Course Images. The Course Images page will appear. This
appearance of the page includes features for changing the banner image and
course
the appearance of the Course Menu.
define a disk
Course Quotas Override. The Course Quotas Override
space quota that
page will appear. From this page Administrators can set a
only applies to this limit on the size of the course.
course
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 24
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Users to Course
Overview
Administrators enroll users in a course from the Add Users to Course page. Users are
added as Students and their access to the course is dependent on the availability of
the course. To add an Instructor or a User with a course role other than Student, add
the user from this page and then change their user role through the List/Modify Users
in This Course page.
Note:
If enrolling a large number of users or enrolling users into numerous courses, consider
using the Batch Enroll Users tool.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Users to Course page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page, click Add Users to This Course.
Search for users
The Add Users to Course page has a search function at the top of the page. The
following search tabs are available:

Search: Click Last Name, User Name, or Email and enter a value. A list of
users with that last name, user name, or Email will appear.

A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a last
name. A list of all users with a last name that begins with that character will
appear.

List All: Click List All to view all users.
Only those users that are not already participating in the Course will appear in the
search results.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 25
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Add users
Administrator Manual
Click the check box next to each user to be added. Click Submit to add the selected
users to the course.
Note: If the search result returns more than 30 users, the users will be listed on
multiple pages. Once a user is selected for enrollment, navigating to another page in
the list will deselect that user for enrollment. For this reason it is much easier to use
the Batch Enroll function when enrolling more than a few users.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 26
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
List/Modify Users in Course
Overview
Administrators view users that participate in a course and update user information
from the List/Modify Users in Course page. User profiles and roles for specific courses
are updated by clicking Properties that appears next to user information.
Administrators can also change a user password by clicking Password. In addition,
the Administrator can send an email to a user by clicking on the user’s email address
in the Email column.
User records or User Enrollment records that are set to Unavailable are preceded by a
circle symbol with a slash through it. Also, the record will appear in gray text with the
exception of the email address, which may still be clicked to send a message to the
user. To make a record available, click Properties to modify the record and change
the availability setting.
With Blackboard Learning System User records and User Enrollment records may also
be disabled in the database. Disabled users records are preceded by a circle symbol
with an ‘x’ through it. Like unavailable records, disabled records will appear in gray
text with the exception of the email address. For more information on the properties of
disabled records, please see the Blackboard Learning System Advanced Integration
and Data Management Manual.
Icons to denote a state of unavailable or disabled will appear next to the User Name if
applicable to the User record. If applicable to the User Enrollment record, the icon will
appear next to the User Role.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the List/Modify Users in Course page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click List/Modify Users in Course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 27
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Search for users
The List/Modify Users In Course page contains a search function at the top of the
page. The following search tabs are available on the List/Modify Users page:

Search: Click Last Name, User Name, or Email and enter a value. A list of
users with that last name, user name, or Email will appear.

A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a last
name. A list of all users with a last name that begins with that character will
appear.

Advanced: Enter text in the Containing field to search for users that have that
text in their name or User Name. If desired, select the check box and enter a
number to search only for users that have been active in the system for that
number of days prior.

List All: Click List All to view all users.
Available functions
To use the functions available on the List/Modify Users in Course page, follow the table
below.
To . . .
send an email to a
user
edit a user profile
change the password
for a user
click . . .
on the user’s email address to open the default email
program with the user’s email address already
populated in the appropriate field.
Properties to open the Modify User Properties in
Course page.
Password to open the Change Password for User page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 28
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Modify User Properties in Course
Overview
Administrators update a user’s profile information including the user’s Course Role
from the Modify User Properties in Course page. The page opens with some fields
already populated with user data when the user was created and added to the course.
Note: Changes to the user profile made on this page will take effect system-wide with
the exception of changing the Course Role. Changing the Course Role will only apply to
this course.
Find this page
Fields
Follow the steps below to open the Modify User Properties in Course page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click List/Modify Users in Course.
Step 5
Generate a list of users using the search tabs.
Step 6
Click Properties for a user.
The table below details the entry fields on the Modify User Properties in Course page.
Field
Description
Personal Information
First Name: [r]
Edit the user’s first name.
Middle Name:
Edit the user’s middle name.
Last Name: [r]
Edit the user’s last name.
Email: [r]
Edit the user’s email address.
Student ID:
Edit the user’s Student ID as defined by the institution.
Account Information
User Name:
Display only.
Other Information
Gender:
Edit the user’s gender.
Birthdate:
Select the user’s birthdate from the lists by clicking on the
drop-down arrow or click the calendar icon to select a date.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 29
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Education Level:
Company:
Job Title:
Department:
Street 1:
Street 2:
City:
State/Province:
ZIP/Postal
Code:
Country:
Web Site:
Administrator Manual
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
the user’s education level.
the user’s company.
the user’s job title.
the user’s department.
the user’s address.
any additional address information.
the user’s city.
the user’s state or province.
the user’s ZIP code or postal code.
Edit the user’s country.
Edit the URL of the user’s personal Web site. When entering
a URL, be sure to enter the URL completely, for example,
http://www.blackboard.com and not www.blackboard.com
or blackboard.com.
Home Phone:
Edit the home phone number of the user. The phone
number will display exactly as entered.
Work Phone:
Edit the work phone number of the user. The phone number
will display exactly as entered.
Work Fax:
Edit the fax number of the user. The fax number will display
exactly as entered.
Mobile Phone:
Edit the mobile phone of the user. The phone number will
display exactly as entered.
Role and Availability
User Role:
Select one of the following user Course Roles:

Course Builder: User is able to add content to the
course through the Content Areas functions and the
Course Tools functions on the Course Control Panel.

Grader: User is able to access all areas under
Assessments.

Guest: User has access to content not locked by the
Instructor.

Instructor: User is able to control all aspects of the
course through the Course Control Panel.

Student: User is able to access all available course
content and will be graded on assessments.
Teacher’s Assistant: User is able to control most
aspects of the course through the Course Control
Panel. Teaching Assistants may not change the role
of a user in the course and they may not modify the
password of the instructor.
Select Yes or No from the drop-down list. If Yes is
selected, the user will have access to the course Web site. If
No is selected, the user will not be able to access the
course until this field is changed to Yes.

Available (this
course only)
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 30
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Change Password for User
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Administrators can update a user password from the Change Password for User page.
A change made to the password must be communicated to the user or the user will
not be able to access the system.
Follow the steps below to open the Change Password for User page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click List/Modify Users in Course.
Step 5
Generate a list of users using the search tabs.
Step 6
Click Password for a user.
The table below details the fields on the Change Password for User page.
Field
Description
Change Password
Password
Enter a new password for the user.
Verify Password Enter the new password again to ensure that there were no
errors.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 31
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Remove Users from Course
Overview
Find this page
Administrators remove users from a course from the Remove Users from Course page.
Removed users can only be restored to the course by enrolling them again. To restore
a removed user, enroll the user in the course from the Add Users to Course page.
Follow these steps to open the Remove Users From Course page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
Click Remove Users from this Course on the Properties: Course
page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 32
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Search for users
The Remove Users from Course page contains a search function at the top of the
page. The following search tabs are available on the Remove Users from Course page:

Search: Click Last Name, User Name, or Email and enter a value. A list of
users with that last name, user name, or Email will appear.

A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a last
name. A list of all users with a last name that begins with that character will
appear.

Advanced: Enter text in the Containing field to search for users that have that
text in their name or User Name. If desired, select the check box and enter a
number to search only for users that have not been active in the course for
that number of days prior.

List All: Click List All to view all users.
Removing users
Click the check box for each user to be removed, type ‘Yes’ in the entry field at the
bottom of the page, and click Submit. The selected users will be removed from the
course.
Note: This feature will only remove users’ enrollment from a course. It will not
remove users from the system.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 33
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Properties
Overview
Administrators change the following course attributed from the Course Properties
page.



name
description
Resource Center classification of a course
This is a detailed page accessed through the Properties: Course page that allows
Administrators to configure individual course Web sites.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Course Properties page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
Click Course Properties on the Properties: Course page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 34
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Course Properties page.
Field
Description
Course Title/Description
Course Name:
Edit the name of the course.
Description:
Edit the description of the course. The description will
appear in the catalog listing with the course name and
course ID. A summary and enrollment instructions are
typical items that appear in course descriptions.
Course Classification
Subject Area:
Select a subject area and discipline from the lists by
clicking on the drop-down arrows. The Subject Area and
Discipline associate the course with research information
available from the Blackboard Resource Center. This is a
deprecated feature from Blackboard 5 and has been
Discipline:
removed from the Create Course functions. A default
value is listed when each course is created. The default
value for Subject Area and Discipline may only be
changed on the Course Properties page. These fields
should not be used as metadata to describe the course
and can be safely ignored by most users.
Note: The Course ID does not appear on the Course Properties page as a field that
can be modified. Changing the Course ID of a course will render all content in the
course inaccessible. If a Course ID must be changed, use the Course Copy feature or
Export and Import Course features to move the course content to a new course with
the desired Course ID. After verifying that all necessary information has transferred to
the new course, archive and then remove the old course from the system to avoid
confusion with the new course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 35
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Options
Overview
Find this page
Administrators’ access features to customize several characteristics of the course
through the Course Options page. The Course Options page is simply a menu of
features. User impact should be considered whenever any of the settings configured
through this page are modified.
Follow the steps below to open the Course Options page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
Click Course Options on the Properties: Course page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 36
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Available functions
The following functions are accessible through the Course Options page:
To . . .
change the
availability of a
course
allow or prevent
Guests from
accessing the
course.
click . . .
Course Availability. The Course Availability page will
appear.
set time
limitations on the
course
configure how
users are able to
enroll in the
course
display any fees
associated with
the course
Course Duration. The Course Duration page will appear.
Guest Access. The Guest Access page will appear. The
Instructor can control what areas of the course are visible to
Guests.
Enrollment Options. The Enrollment options page will
appear.
Enrollment Fees. The Enrollment Fees page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 37
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Availability
Overview
Find this page
Administrators make a course available to users from the Course Availability page. If a
course is not made available to Students at the time of creation, it can be made
available by the Administrator from this page or by the Instructor from the Course
Control Panel.
Follow the steps below to open the Course Availability page.
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Click Properties for a course.
Click Course Options on the Properties: Course page.
Click Course Availability from the Course Options page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 38
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Set Course Availability
Click Yes to make the course immediately available. If the course is not made
available, the Administrator or the assigned Instructor will have to make the course
available at a later date through this page. If the course is set to unavailable, access is
determined by course role:

Students: Courses set to Unavailable will not appear at all in the Student’s My
Courses module on the My Institution tab, or in the Student’s Course List on
the Courses common area. Students may not access a course Web site that is
set to unavailable.

Instructors: Courses set to Unavailable will appear in the Courses you are
teaching section of the My Courses module and in the Course List on the
Courses tab. The course will be indicated as Unavailable, but will still be
accessible by the Instructor.

Course Builders and Teaching Assistants: Courses set to Unavailable will
appear in the Courses in which you are participating section of the My Courses
module and in the Course List on the Courses common area. The course will
be indicated as Unavailable. The course is still accessible by course builders
and teaching assistants.

Graders: Courses set to Unavailable will appear in the Courses in which you
are participating section of the My Courses module and in the Course List on
the Courses common area. The course will be indicated as Unavailable and is
not accessible by graders.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 39
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Guest Access
Overview
Find this page
Administrators can make a course available to Guests when a course is created or
from the Guest Access page. If a course is not made available to Guests at the time of
creation it can be made available to Guests by the Administrator from this page or by
the Instructor from the Course Control Panel.
Follow the steps below to open the Guest Access page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
Click Course Options on the Properties: Course page.
Step 5
Click Guest Access from the Course Options page.
Set guest access
Click Yes or No to determine course availability to Guests.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 40
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Duration
Overview
Find this page
Administrators set the length of the course from the Course Duration page. The course
can be:

constantly available

available from a start to an end date

available for a number of days from enrollment
Follow these steps to open the Course Duration page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
Click Course Options on the Properties: Course page.
Step 5
Click Course Duration from the Course Options page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 41
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields available on the Course Duration page.
Field
Set Course Duration
Continuous
Select Dates
Start Date:
Ending Date:
Days (from the date
of enrollment)
Description
Click this option to make the course constantly available
to users.
Click this option to make the course available from a
start date to an end date, selected below.
Click the check box and select a start date from the lists
by clicking the drop-down arrows and highlighting date
values or by clicking the icon and selecting a date from
the calendar interface. If a start date is not specified the
course will be accessible once it is made available.
Click the check box and select an end date from the lists
by clicking the drop-down arrows and highlighting date
values or by clicking the icon and selecting a date from
the calendar interface. If an end date is not specified the
course will be always be accessible after the start date
(and as long as it is set to available).
Click this option and enter a number in the field. The
course will be available for that number of days from the
enrollment date. This function is useful to place a time
limit on a self-paced course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 42
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Enrollment Options
Overview
Find this page
Administrators set the enrollment process for a course from the Enrollment Options
page. Instructors and Administrators can lead enrollment by processing enrollments
through the Course Control Panel or the System Control Panel. Enrollment can also be
limited to a time period and to Students that receive approval and are granted an
access code.
Follow these steps to open the Enrollment Options page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
Click Course Options on the Properties: Course page.
Step 5
Click Enrollment Options from the Course Options page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 43
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Enrollment Options page.
Field
Description
Select Enrollment Options
Instructor/Admin:
Click this option to make course enrollment the
responsibility of the Instructor and Administrator. Click
the check box to create a link for Students to email an
enrollment request to the Instructor.
Self Enrollment:
Click this option to allow Students to enroll in a course as
determined by the limits defined below.
Start Date:
Click the check box and select an enrollment start date
from the list by clicking the drop-down arrow and
highlighting a value or by clicking the icon and selecting
a date from the calendar interface.
End Date:
Click the check box and select an enrollment end date
from the list by clicking the drop-down arrow and
selecting a value or by clicking the icon and selecting a
date from the calendar interface.
Require Access
Click the check box and enter an Access Code that will be
Code to Enroll:
distributed to approved Students. Students will need this
Access Code to enroll in the course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 44
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Enrollment Fees
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Enrollment fees sets a price for the course and lists the price along with the course.
Users enrolling in a course can view the cost of a course but must contact the
institution to arrange payment.
Follow these steps to open the Enrollment Fees page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
Click Course Options on the Properties: Course page.
Step 5
Click Enrollment Fees from the Course Options page.
The Table below details the entry fields available on the Enrollment Fees page.
Select Enrollment Options
Do not Charge
Charge
Click this option and the cost of the Course will not
appear to users within Blackboard Learning System.
Click this option and enter an amount in US dollars to
charge Students for enrolling in this course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 45
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Categorize Courses
Overview
Find this page
Fields
From the Categorize Courses page, Administrators attach and remove categories from
the course. Use the Course Catalog functions on the System Control Panel to set up
the course catalog and configure categories. Once a category has been linked to a
course, the course will appear under that category in the Course Catalog.
Follow these steps to open the Categorize Courses page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click Course Categories.
The table below details the entry fields on the Categorize Courses page.
Field
Course Categories
Add Category:
Currently
Categorized in:
Description
Select a category to add from the drop-down list. Click
Add to attach the category selected to the course.
Displays the categories attached to this course. Click
Remove to detach a category from a course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 46
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Access Statistics
Overview
Administrators view usage information about a course from the Course Access
Statistics page. For reports on system usage Administrators can use the System
Reports feature available from the System Control Panel.
The Enable Event Tracking option must be set to Yes on the Auto-Reporting Options
page before Statistics will be recorded.
Note: The data set for any report is limited to 100,000 hits.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Access Statistics page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click Course Statistics.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 47
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Course Access Statistics page.
Field
Select Report Filter
Select Report:
Time Period:
Users:
Options
Do You Wish to
Refresh the
Dataset:
What Information
do you Want to
Display:
Description
Select a section of the course Web site from the dropdown list. The report generated will detail the usage of
the selected section.
Choose the Between the Following Dates option to
view data for a time period. If choosing Between the
Following Dates, select the dates by clicking the dropdown arrows and highlighting values or by clicking the
icon and selecting a date from the calendar interface.
Click All Users or Selected Users. If choosing Selected
Users, highlight the users to include in the report. To
select multiple users, hold down CONTROL when clicking
on each user name.
Click Yes to gather the most recent data for the report.
Click No to use data from the date and time listed.
Click the check boxes to include particular data in the
report.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 48
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Utilities
Overview
Find this page
Course Utilities allow Administrators to recycle and export a course. These utilities
allow the Administrator to manage disk space by saving courses that can be imported
back into the system when needed. Recycling a course removes grades and other
selected areas and allows a course to be taught again to another group of Students.
Follow these steps to open the Course Utilities page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click Course Utilities.
Available functions
The following functions are accessible from the Course Utilities page.
To . . .
click . . .
remove parts of a Recycle Course. The Recycle Course page will appear.
course so it can be
taught to a new
set of students
download a
Export Course. The Export Course page will appear.
package of course
content for use at
a later time
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 49
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Recycler
Overview
The Recycle Course page is a useful tool for Administrators to use when a course ends
and will be taught again to another group of Students. The Recycle Course page allows
Administrators to select information to be deleted from a course.
Example: Click in the box next to Gradebook and all the names of Students and their
grades will be deleted from the course Web site. The Instructor will have a clean
Gradebook to start the new semester.
The Course Recycler will remove all users with a role of Student from the course.
Teaching Assistants, Graders, and Course Builders will not be removed.
Recycle Course page
Follow these steps to open the Recycle Course page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click Course Utilities.
Step 5
Click Recycle Course from the Course Utilities page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 50
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Entry fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Recycle Course page.
Field
Description
Select Content Materials to Remove
Content Area:
Select the check box for each Content Area that will be
recycled. The content in each area will be removed but
the Content Area will remain a part of the Course.
Select Other Course Materials to Remove
Announcements
Select Announcements to delete all course
Announcements from the course Web site.
Discussion Board
Select the Discussion Board check box to delete the
Discussion Forums from the course Web site.
Dropbox
Select the Dropbox check box to delete any items in
the Instructor’s Dropbox.
Gradebook items
Select the Gradebook check box to delete the
gradebook items and assessments for the course.
Groups
Select the Groups check box to delete the groups that
had been formed.
Statistics
Select the Statistics check box to delete the
information such as how many Students accessed the
course.
Tests, Surveys, &
Select this check box to delete the assessments that
Pools
had been given in the course Web site.
Users
Select the Users check box to delete the Students that
had been enrolled in the course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 51
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Export Course
Overview
The Export Course feature creates a package of the course content that can later be
imported into Blackboard and used to teach another course with the same content. It
is important to note that, unlike the Archive Course feature, Export Course packages
do not include any user interactions with the course—it only includes the content of
the course (except for Course Cartridges that are copy protected). Therefore, Export
Course is useful when course materials will be reused at a later time to teach a new
set of Students. Archive Course is useful to maintain a record of a course after it has
been taught.
Export packages are downloaded as compressed .ZIP files and can be imported into
Blackboard Learning System in the same format. Do not unzip an Export package,
remove files from the package, or try to import a file contained with the package,
otherwise the package will not be Imported correctly.
Export packages from older versions of Blackboard Learning System can be imported
into Blackboard Learning System (release 6.1), but Blackboard Learning System
(release 6.1) export files are not backward compatible with previous versions.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Export Course page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click Course Utilities.
Step 5
Click Export Course from the Course Utilities page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 52
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Export Course page.
Field
Course ID
Course ID:
Course Areas
Please select the
areas you would
like to export:
Description
This field is automatically populated.
Click the check box next to each area to be exported to
the .ZIP file. Any areas not selected will not be exported.
Exporting a Course
There is only one field on the Export Course page. Enter a valid Course ID in the
Course ID field. If the Course ID is not known, click Course List to look it up.
A receipt page will appear after entering a Course ID and clicking Submit. The
exported package must be downloaded from this page and saved to the local
computer. The exported package will not be stored in the Blackboard file system!
IMS specifications
The Blackboard packaging format follows the IMS Content Packaging Specification with
extensions to support content types specific to Blackboard Learning System.
Blackboard Learning System (Release 6.1) uses:




IMS
IMS
IMS
IMS
Content and Packaging Specification 1.1.2
Metadata Specification 1.2.1
Enterprise Specification 1.01
Question and Test Interoperability Specification 1.2
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 53
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Images
Overview
Find this page
Functions
Administrators set the appearance of a course Web site through the tools on the
Course Images page. The Administrator can access features to add a course banner
and change the button style from this page.
Follow these steps to open the Course Images page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click Course Images.
The following tools are available from the Course Images page.
To . . .
set the button
style for the
course
change the banner
image that
appears on the
course
click . . .
Course Design. The Course Design page will appear.
Course Banner. The Course Banner page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 54
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Design
Overview
Find this page
Fields
This page allows the Administrator to change the appearance of the navigation items
in the Course Menu.
Follow these steps to open the Course Design page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click Course Images.
Step 5
Click Course Design from the Course Images page.
The table below details the entry fields on the Course Design page.
Field
Description
Select Navigation Style
Select how to display the items in the Course Menu by
clicking the Buttons option or the Text option. The Style
Properties options will differ depending on the option
selected in this field.
Select Style Properties—Buttons
Button Type:
Select a button type by clicking on the drop-down arrow
and highlighting a button type. The button type is simply
the pattern that will appear in the button background.
Button Shape:
Click a button shape option.
Button Style:
Select a button style by clicking on the drop-down arrow
and highlighting a button style. The button style is made
up of colors and shapes. Click Gallery of Buttons to
preview button styles.
Select Style Properties—Text
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 55
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Select background
color for navigation
Select highlight
color for navigation
Administrator Manual
Click Pick and select a color from the palette. The color
chosen will appear as the background color for all items
in the Course Menu except for the active item.
Click Pick and select a color from the palette. The color
chosen will appear as the background color for an active
item in the Course Menu.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 56
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Banner
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Administrators can add a banner to the top of the Announcements area on the course
Web site. The banner will appear only in this course Web site and cannot be linked to a
URL.
Follow these steps to open the Course Banner page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click Course Images.
Step 5
Click Course Banner from the Course Images page.
The table below details the entry fields on the Course Banner page.
Field
Description
Select a Course Banner
Current banner:
Displays the banner that currently appears at the top of
the course.
New Banner:
Enter a file name or browse for an image file. This file will
appear on the course Web site.
Remove this banner Click this check box to remove the banner image from
the course Web site. No banner will appear at the top of
the course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 57
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Quotas Override
Overview
Administrators can change the disk quotas for a course from the Course Quotas
Override page. The quotas set on this page will apply to the course regardless of the
default quota settings for the system. To change or set quotas for all courses on the
system, use the Quota tool available from Course Settings on the System Control
Panel.
Course Quotas Override page
Follow these steps to open the Course Quotas Override page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Courses from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of courses using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Properties for a course.
Step 4
From the Properties: Course page click Course Quotas Override.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 58
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Course Quotas Override page.
Field
Description
Control Course Disk Quotas
Override default Click this check box to place restrictions on the size of the
Disk Quotas for
course Web site.
this course
Warn
Enter an amount of disk space, in Kilobytes, at which time
Instructors
the Instructor will receive a warning that the course Web
when course
site is approaching the disk space limit.
size exceeds
Maximum course Enter a disk space limit in Kilobytes.
disk Usage
Override default Click this check box and enter a size limit, in Kilobytes, for
for maximum
files uploaded to the course Web site.
size of a single
file upload to
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 59
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 2—Creating Courses and Enrolling Users
Overview
This chapter covers the features for creating a course and enrolling Students and
assigning staff.
In this chapter
Chapter 2—Creating Courses and Enrolling Users includes the following topics.
Topic
Create Course
Batch Create Courses
Batch Enroll Users
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Create Course page.
Administrators can create a course from this
page.
This topic covers the Batch Create Courses
page. Administrators can create many courses
at once by uploading a batch file.
This topic covers the Batch Enroll Users page.
Administrators can enroll many Students and
assign many staff into many different courses
by uploading a batch file.
Page 60
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Create Course
Overview
Administrators create course Web sites from the Create Course page. If an
Administrator disabled the Create Course function for Instructors or requires
Instructors to submit email requests for course creation, this is the only way new
courses can be created.
Note: Administrators can assign the Administrative User Role of Course Creator to
certain users. Users with these privileges can access the Create Course function on the
System Control Panel. This is helpful if Instructors are not allowed to create courses
and the Administrator cannot respond quickly to requests for new courses.
Find this page
Fields
Click Create Course from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
The table below details the entry fields on the Create Course page.
Field
Course Information
Course Name:
Course ID:
Description
Enter a name for the course.
Enter a Course ID. The Course ID should not have any
spaces or characters other than numbers and letters, dash
(-), underscore (_), and period (.). Do not use special
characters. Special characters include: %&#<>=+ as well
as spaces. When creating attributes a good rule to follow
is only use alphanumeric characters, underscores, dots,
and dashes.
The Course ID must be unique and remain static. It
cannot be modified.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 61
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Description:
Course Design
Select background
color for navigation:
Select highlight
color for navigation:
Course Options
Guest Access:
Available:
Select Course
Catalog Category:
Course Cartridge:
Instructor:
Administrator Manual
Enter a description of the course. The description will
appear in the listing with the course name and ID. A
summary and enrollment instructions should be included
in the description.
Click Pick to select a color
selected will appear as the
Menu.
Click Pick to select a color
selected will appear as the
from the palette. The color
background to the Course
from the palette. The color
text color in the Course Menu.
Click one of the options to determine course availability to
guests.
Click Yes or No to control the course availability. If the
course is not immediately available, the Administrator can
make the course available at a later date through the
Properties: Course page. Also, the Instructor can set the
course to available from the Course Control Panel.
Select a Course Catalog category for the course. The
course will be listed under the selected category.
Enter a valid Access Key to download course materials
from a Course Cartridge to the new course Web site.
Warning: Protected Course Cartridge content cannot be
exported or copied. You must reenter the publisher’s
access key to download the content again. Open Access
cartridges may be exported and copied.
Enter the name of the Instructor for this course. The
Instructor named will be able to customize the course
Web site through the Course Control Panel. Clicking New
Instructor will bring up the Create New User page after
clicking Submit at the bottom of the page.
Course availability
If the course is set to unavailable, access is determined by Course Role:

Students: Courses set to Unavailable will not appear at all in the Student’s My
Courses module on the My Institution tab, or in the Student’s Course List on
the Courses common area. Students may not access a course Web site that is
set to unavailable.

Instructors: Courses set to Unavailable will appear in the My Courses module
and in the Course List on the Courses common area. The course will be
indicated as Unavailable, but will still be accessible by the Instructor.

Course Builders and Teaching Assistants: Courses set to Unavailable will
appear in the My Courses module and in the Course List on the Courses
common area. The course will be indicated as Unavailable. The course is still
accessible by course builders and teaching assistants.

Graders: Courses set to Unavailable will appear in the My Courses module and
in the Course List on the Courses common area. The course will be indicated
as Unavailable and is not accessible by graders.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 62
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Batch Create Courses
Overview
Administrators add large numbers of courses from the Batch Create Courses page.
Using a batch file, courses are entered into the system quickly and without having to
go through the Create Course page to add each course.
Note: If using a batch file created for a previous version of Blackboard Learning
System, verify that the fields are in the correct order for the current version. If
necessary, rearrange the fields before processing the batch file.
Find this page
Fields
Click Batch Create Courses from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
The table below details the entry fields on the Batch Create Courses page.
Field
File Upload
File Location:
File Delimiter:
Default Button
Style:
Description
Enter the location of the batch course file. Or, click
Browse to open up the file directory then locate and
select the file. The field will populate with the path to the
selected file.
Select the file delimiter used in the batch course file. If
Automatic is selected, the batch file will be analyzed
and the delimiter determined based on the frequency of
that character in the file.
Select a default button style from the drop-down list.
This style will appear in all courses that do not have a
button style in their record.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 63
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Creating a batch file of new courses
Batch files are .delimited files holding large quantities of new courses to upload to the
system. Batch files cannot contain any course content other than one announcement.
Batch course files must contain a Course ID and Course Name, and may also contain a
Course Description, Button Style, and Initial Announcement, appearing in the following
format:
“Course_ID”,”Course name”,”Course Description”,”Button_Style”, ”announcement”,
“announcement title”
The following rules apply to batch course files:

Fields must be enclosed in double quotes.
Example: “Eng_201”

Each field must be separated with a delimiter. Commas, colons, or tabs may
be used, however, you may not use more than one as a delimiter in a batch
file.
Example: “Eng_201”,”English Literature”

Each record must be separated by a hard return.
Example: Eng_201”,”English Literature”
”ENG_202”,“Transcendentalist Works”

Each batch file should not exceed 500 records due to time out restrictions
associated with most browsers.
Using special characters
The following special characters should never be used in an attribute such as a User
Name, password, database user, Course ID, and so forth.
%&#<>=+
These characters are only safe to use when adding content into a text box, such as
adding the description for a course.
When creating attributes a good rule to follow is to only use alphanumeric characters,
underscores, dots, and dashes (do not use spaces!).
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 64
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Batch Enroll Users
Overview
Administrators enroll large numbers of users into courses from the Batch Create Users
page. Using a batch file, users are entered into courses quickly. A batch file for adding
users can add many users into many different courses. If a Course Role is not
assigned in the batch file the default value is Student.
If quotation marks appear in a field, it is necessary to use an escape character so the
process knows that the next character does not mark the end of the field. The escape
character is a backslash (\). For example, "\"NICKNAME\"".
Note: If using a batch file created for a previous version of Blackboard Learning
System, verify that the fields are in the correct order for the current version. If
necessary, reformat the file so that the fields are in the correct order before
processing the batch enroll.
Find this page
Fields
Click Batch Enroll Users from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
The table below details the entry fields on the Batch Enroll Users page.
Field
File Upload
File Location:
Delimiter Type of
Your File:
Description
Enter the location of the batch user file.
Select the delimiter option to be used on the batch user
file entered in the File Location field. If Automatic is
selected, the batch file will be analyzed and the delimiter
determined based on the frequency of that character in
the file.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 65
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Create batch file
Batch files are .txt files that hold large quantities of information to upload to the
system. Each batch utility contains specific instructions on creating the batch file. The
following batch file standards are universal.

Fields must be enclosed in double quotes.
Example: “John”

Each field must be separated with a delimiter. Commas, colons, or tabs may
be used, however, you may not use more than one as a delimiter in a batch
file.
Example: “John”,”Smith”

Each record must be separated by a hard return.
Example: “John”,”Smith”
“Larry”,”Smith”
Each batch file should not exceed 500 records due to time out restrictions associated
with most browsers.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 66
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 3—Course Utilities
Overview
This chapter reviews the features for deleting, moving, and backing up courses.
In this chapter
Chapter 3—Course Utilities includes the following topics.
Topic
Remove Course
Copy Course
Copy Course Materials into a
New Course
Copy Course Materials into an
Existing Course
Course Copy with Users (Exact
Copy)
Import Course
Export Course
Archive Course
Restore Course
Batch Import/Export/Archive/
Restore Course
Batch Copy Course
Adding File Types for Use with
Content Items
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Remove Course page that
Administrators use to remove a course.
This topic covers the Copy Course page used to
add content from one course to another.
This topic covers the Copy Course Materials
(but not users) into a New Course page. This
page is used to create a new course with
content from another course.
This topic covers the Copy Course Materials
(but not users) into an Existing Course page.
This page is used to add content from one
course into another.
This topic covers the Course Copy with Users
(Exact Copy) page. This page is used to create
a duplicate course including users and
enrollments.
This topic covers the Import Course page used
to add a package containing an exported
course from this page.
This topic covers the Export Course page used
to create a package of course content for use
at a later time.
This topic covers the Archive Course page used
to create an incremental backup of a specific
course.
This topic covers the Restore Course page used
to add a package of an archived course to the
system from this page.
This topic covers the command line tool for
batch import/export/archive/restore
operations.
This topic covers the command line tool for
batch copying courses.
This topic covers the recognized file types for
attachments to Content Items and how
Administrators can add additional recognized
file types.
Page 67
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
What is the difference between export, archive, copy, and recycle for a course?
The Blackboard Learning System includes several tools for reusing courses and course
content. The tools are:
Export/Import: Export takes course content and puts it in a package that can be
used in another course at a later date. One or more course areas can be included in
the package. This is an effective means of reusing a course or parts of a course to
teach another set of students next semester or for backing up content without keeping
Student interactions.
Copy: Course Copy adds content from one Course to another. This is useful when
teaching the same Course during the same term to different sets of Students. Course
Copy is the best way to share content across multiple sections of the same course.
Recycle: Recycling a Course removes User interactions with the Course while keeping
the content intact. This is useful when teaching the same Course to a new set of
Students.
Archive/Restore: The Archive Course function creates a record of the Course
including User interactions. It is most useful for recalling Student performance or
interactions at later time. The archive package is saved as a .ZIP file that can be
restored to the system at another time. In effect, Archive/Restore acts as a backup
tool at the individual course level (although it is not a replacement for a fully formed,
server-side backup and restore process!).
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 68
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Remove Course
Overview
Courses can be removed from Blackboard Learning System through the Remove
Course page. Courses that are removed cannot be restored to the Blackboard Learning
System unless the course was archived or exported prior to removing it.
Keep in mind that archiving a course will preserve not only course content but also
user enrollments and interactions with the course. For information on archiving a
course prior to removing it from Blackboard Learning System, see the Archive Course
topic. Exporting a course will only preserve the content in the course. For more
information, see the Export Course topic.
Find this page
Click Remove Course from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Search for courses
The Remove Course page contains a search function at the top of the page. The
following search tabs are available:

Search: The search parameters on this tab can be used separately or in
tandem to further narrow the list generated. Follow these steps to use this
tab:
Step 1 Select the Course ID, Instructor, or Title/Description option.
Step 2 In the text field, enter a Course ID, an Instructor name, or a string
that appears in the Title or Description of the course. If this field is
left blank, courses will be filtered only by the date created.
Step 3 Select the All Courses, Month, or Day option to define the list based
on when courses were created (If Month is selected, courses that are
returned will have been created in the previous 30 days. If Day is
selected, courses that are returned will have been created in the last
24 hours).
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 69
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Step 4 The search function will create a list of courses according to the search
criteria. Courses will appear in a table format with each course listed
in a separate row.
Functions

A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a
Course ID. A list of all courses with an ID that begins with that character will
appear.

List All: Click List All to view all the courses on the system. Returning all the
courses on the system may take a few moments.
The following table details the functions available from the Remove Course page.
To . . .
remove courses
view a course Web
site
access the
Properties: Course
page for a course
click . . .
the check boxes in the Remove column to select courses for
deletion. Type ‘Yes’ in the field at the bottom of the page to
verify and then click Submit to delete all selected courses
from the system.
the link in the Course ID column. The course Web site will
appear.
Properties for a course. From this page a number of
Settings can be managed.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 70
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Copy Course
Overview
Course materials can be copied in different ways to meet the needs of different
situations:




Find this page
Copy selected course materials (course materials include content, tools, and
enrollments) into a new course to create a new section of the same course.
Copy selected course materials into an existing course to share content across
several courses without having to recreate the content in each course.
Copy just enrollments (or enrollments and selected content and tools) to easily
move users from one sequential course to the next course.
Create an exact copy of a course, including enrollments and Student
interactions. This is useful when splitting a course into sections.
Click Copy Course from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Available functions
The following functions are accessible from the Copy Course page.
To . . .
Copy some or all of the
course materials into a
new course
Copy some or all of the
course materials into
an existing course
Make an exact copy of
the course including
enrollments
click . . .
Copy Course Materials into a New Course
Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course
Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy)
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 71
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Copy Course Materials into a New Course
Overview
Copying course materials into a new course creates a course on the system and
populates it with content from a course already on the system. The process includes
two steps. First, select the Course ID for an existing course and create a new Course
ID for the new course. The existing course contains content that will be used to
populate the new course. Second, select the materials in the existing course to copy to
the new course.
When the course is copied, the Course Menu specified in the source course will replace
the default Course Menu is in effect for new courses.
Find this page
Follow these steps to locate the Copy Course Materials into a New Course page.
Step 1
Step 2
Click Copy Course from the System Control Panel.
Click Copy Course Materials into a New Course from the Copy
Course page.
Select a source course and destination course
Enter a Course ID for the source course in the Source Course ID field or click
Browse to open a Search function in a separate window. Follow these steps to search
for a course:
Step 5
Select the Course ID, Instructor, or Title/Description option.
Step 6
In the text field, enter a Course ID, an Instructor name, or a string
that appears in the Title or Description of the course. If this field is left
blank, courses will be filtered only by the date created.
Step 7
Select the All Courses, Month, or Day option to define the list based on
when courses were created (If Month is selected, courses that are
returned will have been created in the previous 30 days. If Day is
selected, courses that are returned will have been created in the last
24 hours).
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 72
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Step 8
The search function will create a list of courses according to the search
criteria. Courses will appear in a table format with each course listed in
a separate row.
Step 9
Click Select in the same row as the desired course. The Search
window will close and the selected course will appear in the Source
Course ID field on the Copy Course Materials into a New Course page.
After entering a Course ID for the source course, enter a Course ID for the new course
that will be created and populated with content from the source. Please make sure
that the new Course ID matches the naming convention used at the institution. Also,
The Course ID should not have any spaces or characters other than numbers and
letters, dash (-), underscore (_), and period (.). The Course ID must be unique and
remain static. It cannot be modified.
Click Submit and a list of course materials to include in the copy will appear.
Select course materials
Select the check boxes for each content area and tool in the course that should be
copied into the new course. The table below details what happens to each selectable
option when the copy is performed.
Note: A Course Copy operation cannot be completed if the user does not select at
least one of the following areas: Content, Staff Information or Settings. If none of
these options is selected a warning will appear; the course may not be copied until this
issue is resolved.
Course Material
Content
Announcements
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
Calendar
Collaboration Sessions
Course Settings
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Behavior when copied
Copies course materials, including uploaded
files, Learning Units, links, and Course Cartridge
content (including content that is copy
protected). Users may also select to include
Course Information, Course documents,
Assignments and External Links. System
Extension content included in content areas is
copied.
All Announcements are copied to the new
course. If Assessment links appear in Content
Areas, then this option must be selected, or the
link to the Assessment will be broken.
All Assessments and Surveys, including
questions and options for deploying them are
copied. All Pools are copied to the new course.
All Calendar items are copied to the new course.
Collaboration Sessions that have been created
are copied. This includes the Session Name,
availability, and the Tool used during the
session.
Some Course Settings will be copied. See
Course Settings below for more information.
Page 73
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Discussion Board
Gradebook Items and
Settings
Staff Information
Administrator Manual
Discussion Board forums, including the initial
message in the Discussion Board, are copied to
the new course.
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such
as type, categories, and display options, are
copied to the new course.
All Staff Information is copied to the new
course.
Course Settings
When Course Settings is selected, certain settings are copied to the new course. These
include the following:

Course Name

Course Description

Course Entry Point

Course Design

Course Banner

Blackboard Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not
overwritten.

System Extension Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings
are not overwritten.

Content Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not
overwritten.
The following settings are not copied as part of this operation:

Course ID

Course Availability

Guest Access

Observer Access

Course Duration

Enrollment Options

Course Disk Quota
Select Enrollments
If Enrollment is selected, the list of users in the course will be copied.
User records in the course will not be copied. This includes the following:

Gradebook Records

Discussion Board messages (including Groups Discussion Board messages)

Archived Discussion Board messages (including Groups Discussion Board
messages)

Drop Box files

Assessment attempts

Assignment submissions

Course Statistics

Collaboration session logs

User Home pages

The Electric Blackboard® entries for each
User records are only copied if the Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) option is
selected.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 74
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course
Overview
Find this page
Copying course materials into an existing course adds the content from one course
into another course already on the system. The process includes two steps. First,
select the Course ID for an existing course and a Course ID for the destination course.
The existing course contains content that will be used to populate the destination
course. Second, select the materials in the existing course to copy to the destination
course.
Follow these steps to locate the Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course page.
Step 1
Click Copy Course from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course from the
Copy Course page.
Select a source course and destination course
Enter a Course ID for the source course in the Source Course ID field or click
Browse to open a Search function in a separate window. After entering a Course ID
for the Source Course, enter a Course ID for the destination course or click Browse to
open a Search function in a separate window.
Follow these steps to search for a course:
Step 1
Select the Course ID, Instructor, or Title/Description option.
Step 2
In the text field, enter a Course ID, an Instructor name, or a string
that appears in the Title or Description of the course. If this field is left
blank, courses will be filtered only by the date created.
Step 3
Select the All Courses, Month, or Day option to define the list based on
when courses were created (If Month is selected, courses that are
returned will have been created in the previous 30 days. If Day is
selected, courses that are returned will have been created in the last
24 hours).
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 75
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Step 4
Step 5
Administrator Manual
The search function will create a list of courses according to the search
criteria. Courses will appear in a table format with each course listed in
a separate row.
Click Select in the same row as the desired course. The Search
window will close and the selected course will appear in the
Destination Course ID field on the Copy Course Materials into an
Existing Course page.
Click Submit and a list of course materials to include in the copy will appear.
Select course materials
Select the check boxes for each content area and tool in the course that should be
copied into the existing course. The table below details what happens to each
selectable option when the copy is performed.
Note: A Course Copy operation cannot be completed if the user does not select at
least one of the following areas: Content, Staff Information or Settings. If none of
these options is selected a warning will appear; the course may not be copied until this
issue is resolved.
Course Material
Content
Announcements
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
Calendar
Collaboration Sessions
Course Settings
Discussion Board
Gradebook Items and
Settings
Group Settings
Staff Information
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Behavior when copied
Copies course materials, including uploaded
files, Learning Units, links, and Course Cartridge
content. Users may also select to include Course
Information, Course documents, Assignments
and External Links. System Extension content
included in content areas is copied.
All Announcements are copied to the new
course. If Assessment links appear in Content
Areas, then this option must be selected, or the
link to the Assessment will be broken.
All Assessments and Surveys, including
questions and options for deploying them are
copied. All Pools are copied to the new course.
All Calendar items are copied to the new course.
Collaboration Sessions that have been created
are copied. This includes the Session Name and
the Tool used during the session.
Some Course Settings will be copied. See
Course Settings below for more information.
Discussion Board forums, including the initial
message in the Discussion Board, are copied to
the new course.
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such
as type, categories, and display options, are
copied to the new course.
Group Settings includes the
name of the group, the tool settings, and names
of Discussion Board forums.
All Staff Information is copied to the new
course.
Page 76
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Settings
When Course Settings is selected, certain settings are copied to the existing course.
These include the following:

Course Entry Point

Course Design

Course Banner

Blackboard Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not
overwritten.

System Extension Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings
are not overwritten.

Content Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not
overwritten.
The following settings are not copied as part of this operation:

Course ID

Course Name

Course Description

Course Availability

Guest Access

Observer Access

Course Duration

Enrollment Options

Course Disk Quota
Select Enrollments
If Enrollment is selected, the list of users in the course will be copied.
User records in the course will not be copied. This includes the following:

Gradebook Records

Discussion Board messages (including Groups Discussion Board messages)

Archived Discussion Board messages (including Groups Discussion Board
messages)

Drop Box files

Assessment attempts

Assignment submissions

Course Statistics

Collaboration session logs

User Home pages

The Electric Blackboard® entries for each
User records are only copied if the Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) is selected.
Resolving Course Menu items
When copying content and tools from one course to an existing course, the Course
Menu must resolve itself in the destination course. The table below describes the how
Course Menu items are resolved.
If . . .
a Content Area in the source course
does not exist in the destination
course
the Content Area in the source course
and the Content Area in the
destination course have the same
name and are of the same type (for
example, External Links, Staff
Information, or content)
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
then . . .
the area will be added to the Course
Menu in the destination course.
the content from the source course will
be added, but will not replace, the
content in the area within the
destination course.
Page 77
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
the Content Area in the source course
and the Content Area in the
destination course have the same
name but are of different types
Links
Administrator Manual
the Content Area from the source course
will be added to the destination course
under a different name. The new name
will append an incremental numeral to
the name (for example, Course
Materials will become Course
Materials1).
Links to parts of a course that are not included in the copy will break when the links
appear in the destination course. For example, if there is a link to a Test in a content
area and Assessments are not copied, the link to the test will break.
Course Cartridge content
If the source course includes Course Cartridge content and the destination course does
not have a Cartridge ID, the cartridge content will be copied to the destination course
with the Cartridge ID assigned. This includes content that is copy protected.
If the destination course already has a Cartridge ID, neither the cartridge content nor
the Cartridge ID will be copied from the source course to the destination course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 78
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy)
Overview
Find this page
Copy Course with Users performs a complete copy of the course. This is the only Copy
option that copies user records, such as grades and Discussion Board messages, to the
new course. This option is useful if a course is split into multiple sections. The
Instructor may do an exact copy, then un-enroll specific students to create two
sections of the same course.
Follow these steps to locate the Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course page.
Step 1
Step 2
Click Copy Course from the System Control Panel.
Click Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) from the Copy Course
page.
Copy the course
Enter a Course ID for the source course in the Source Course ID field or click
Browse to open a Search function in a separate window. Follow these steps to search
for a course:
Step 1
Select the Course ID, Instructor, or Title/Description option.
Step 2
In the text field, enter a Course ID, an Instructor name, or a string
that appears in the Title or Description of the course. If this field is left
blank, courses will be filtered only by the date created.
Step 3
Select the All Courses, Month, or Day option to define the list based on
when courses were created (If Month is selected, courses that are
returned will have been created in the previous 30 days. If Day is
selected, courses that are returned will have been created in the last
24 hours).
Step 4
The search function will create a list of courses according to the search
criteria. Courses will appear in a table format with each course listed in
a separate row.
Step 5
Click Select in the same row as the desired course. The Search
window will close and the selected course will appear in the Source
Course ID field on the Copy Course Materials into a New Course page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 79
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
After entering a Course ID for the source course, enter a Course ID for the new course
that will be created and populated with content from the source.
Enter the Course ID for the new course in the Destination Course ID field. Please make
sure that the new Course ID matches the naming convention used at the institution.
Also, The Course ID should not have any spaces or characters other than numbers and
letters, dash (-), underscore (_), and period (.). The Course ID must be unique and
remain static. It cannot be modified.
Click Submit to make a copy of the course. The new course will contain all of the
same content and all of the same user enrollments and staff assignments as the
source course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 80
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Import Course
Overview
Import Course uploads an Export package of course content. Export packages, created
with the Export Course feature, are .ZIP files that contain course materials, but not
user data or interactions. Export packages are useful for storing content that may be
used to teach the same course to different Students at a later time. To create a
permanent record of a course, use the Archive Course and Restore Course features.
Never upload an Exported Course package that has been modified since it was created
and downloaded. Opening the .ZIP file and changing any of the files in the Exported
Course package will result in unstable and unpredictable behavior when the course is
imported.
Import Course page
Click Import Course from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Fields
The table below details the entry fields on the Import Course page.
Field
Course ID
Destination Course
ID:
Packaged Course:
Select Course
Materials:
Description
Enter the Course ID of the course to receive course
materials. If a course ID that does not exist on the
system is entered, a new course with this ID will be
created with the data and settings from the imported
course.
Enter the file location of the packaged course materials
or browse for the file location. Imported materials must
be .ZIP archive files of Blackboard Learning System
course materials. Use the Export Course feature to create
a package of course materials.
Select the option for each content area and tool in the
course that should be imported. The Select course
materials section below details these options.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 81
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Select course materials
The table below details what happens to each selectable option when the import is
performed.
Course Material
Content
Announcements
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
Calendar
Course Settings
Discussion Board
Gradebook Items and
Settings
Group Settings
Staff Information
Behavior when copied
Imports course materials, including the
following, from the package:

Uploaded files

Learning Units

Links

Course Information

Course Documents

Assignments

External Links

System Extension content
All Announcements are imported. If Assessment
links appear in Content Areas, then this option
must be selected, or the link to the Assessment
will be broken.
All Assessments and Surveys, including
questions and options for deploying them are
imported. All Pools are imported to the new
course.
All Calendar items are imported to the new
course.
Some Course Settings will be imported. See
Course Setting below for more information.
Discussion Board forums, including the initial
message in the Discussion Board, are imported.
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such
as type, categories, and display options, are
imported.
Group settings, such as availability of the
Discussion Board and the Group Virtual
Classroom.
All Staff Information is imported.
Course Settings
When Course Settings is selected, certain settings are imported to the course. These
include the following:

Course Name

Course Description

Course Entry Point

Course Design

Course Banner

Blackboard Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not
overwritten.

System Extension Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings
are not overwritten.

Content Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not
overwritten.
The following settings are not imported as part of this operation:

Course ID

Course Availability

Guest Access

Observer Access

Course Duration
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 82
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)


Administrator Manual
Enrollment Options
Course Disk Quota
Resolving the Course Menu items
When importing a package, the Course Menu must resolve itself in the destination
course. The table below describes the how Course Menu items are resolved.
If . . .
a Content Area in the package does
not exist in the destination course
the Content Area in the package and
the Content Area in the destination
course have the same name and are
of the same type (for example,
External Links, Staff Information, or
content)
the Content Area in the package and
the Content Area in the destination
course have the same name but are of
different types
Links
then . . .
the area will be added to the Course
Menu in the destination course.
the content from the package will be
added, but will not replace, the content
in the area within the destination
course.
the Content Area from the package will
be added to the destination course
under a different name. The new name
will append an incremental numeral to
the name (for example, Course
Materials will become Course
Materials1).
Links to parts of a course that are not included in the export package will break when
the links appear in the destination course. For example, if there is a link to a Test in a
content area and Assessments are not exported, the link to the Test will break.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 83
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Export Course
Overview
The Export Course feature creates a package of the course materials that can later be
imported into Blackboard Learning System and used to teach another course with the
same content. It is important to note that, unlike the Archive Course feature, Export
Course does not include any user interactions with the course—it only includes the
content and settings of the course (except for Course Cartridges that are copy
protected). Therefore, Export Course is useful when course materials will be reused at
a later time to teach a new set of Students. Archive Course is useful to maintain a
record of a course after it has been taught.
Export packages are downloaded as compressed .ZIP files with the file name:
ExportFile_Course_ID.ZIP. and can be Imported into the Blackboard Learning System
in the same format. Do not unzip an Export package, remove files from the package,
or try to Import selected files contained within the package. Any modifications to the
.ZIP file will result in unstable and unpredictable behavior when the course is
Imported.
Export packages from older versions of Blackboard Learning System can be imported
into Blackboard Learning System (Release 6.1), but Blackboard Learning System
(Release 6.1) export files are not backward compatible with previous versions of
Blackboard Learning System.
Find this page
Fields
Click Export Course from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
The table below details the entry fields on the Export Course page.
Field
Description
Select a Course
Source Course ID:
Enter the Course ID of the course that will be exported.
Select Course Materials
Select Course
Select the option for each content area and tool in the
Materials:
course that should be exported. The Select course
materials section below details these options.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 84
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Select course materials
The table below details what happens to each selectable option when the export is
performed.
Course Material
Content
Announcements
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
Calendar
Course Settings
Discussion Board
Gradebook Items and
Settings
Staff Information
Behavior when copied
Exports course materials, including uploaded
files, Learning Units, and links. Users may also
select to include Course Information, Course
documents, Assignments and External Links.
All Announcements are exported. If Assessment
links appear in Content Areas, then this option
must be selected, or the link to the Assessment
will be broken.
All Assessments and Surveys, including
questions and options for deploying them are
imported. All Pools are exported to the new
course.
All Calendar items are exported to the new
course.
Some Course Settings will be exported. See
Course Setting below for more information.
Discussion Board forums, including the initial
message in the Discussion Board, are exported.
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such
as type, categories, and display options, are
exported.
All Staff Information is exported.
Course Settings
When Course Settings is selected, certain settings are exported. These include the
following:

Course Name

Course Description

Course Entry Point

Course Design

Course Banner

Blackboard Tools

System Extension Tools

Content Tools
The following settings are not exported as part of this operation:

Course ID

Course Availability

Guest Access

Observer Access

Course Duration

Enrollment Options
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 85
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
IMS specifications
The Blackboard packaging format follows the IMS Content Packaging Specification with
extensions to support content types specific to Blackboard Learning System.
Blackboard Learning System, Release 6.1 uses:




IMS
IMS
IMS
IMS
Content and Packaging Specification 1.1.2
Metadata Specification 1.2.1
Enterprise Specification 1.01
Question and Test Interoperability Specification 1.2
Exporting a Course
A receipt page will appear after entering a Course ID and clicking Submit. The
exported package must be downloaded from this page and saved to the local
computer. Select Click here to download the generated package file to save the
file. The archived package will not be stored in the Blackboard file system! If the
package is not downloaded from this page it will be lost, and the user must go through
the export operation again.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 86
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Recovering a package from a browser timeout
Overview
The browser may time out due to inactivity, when an Archive or Export package is
being created. It is not necessary for the user to start the process all over again (a
particular hassle with low bandwidth connections), as the package may be recovered.
Steps to recover a package
To recover a completed Archive or Export package for a user, follow these steps:
Step 10
Step 11
Obtain the session key from the user. The session key appears in the
error message when the browser times out. The user is informed that
this key is required to retrieve the package.
Open the following directory:
UNIX:
/blackboard/docs/vi/bb_bb60/sessions/SESSION_ID/
Windows:
\blackboard\docs\vi\bb_bb60\sessions\SESSION_ID\
Where bb_bb60 is the virtual installation that the user was logged into
and SESSION_ID is the session key supplied by the user.
The package and the log are in the directory.
Step 12
Open the log to verify that the package was created successfully.
Step 13
Retrieve the package and give it to the user in an appropriate manner,
for example, place it on an FTP site for the user to download.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 87
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Archive Course
Overview
Archive Course creates a permanent record of a course including all the content and
user interactions. Unlike the Export Course feature, Archive Course is not useful when
trying to create a package of content to be used at a later time or with another course.
When an Archive package is restored, not only is the content of the course restored,
but all of the user information and user interactions are restored as well. The course is
fully restored to the state it was in when archived. Course Cartridge content, including
copy protected content, is archived during this operation, and may be restored.
Archived courses are saved as .ZIP files with the following file naming structure:
ArchiveFile_Course_ID.ZIP. Once the package has been downloaded, do not remove
files from the package or unzip the package and try to restore individual files within
the package. The course can only be restored if the package is intact. Modifying the
.ZIP file and then uploading the Archived Course package will result in unstable and
unpredictable behavior in the Restored Course.
Find this page
Click Archive Course from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Archiving a Course
There is only one field on the Archive Course page. Enter a valid Course ID in the
Source Course ID field. If the Course ID is not known, click Browse to look it up.
Follow these steps to search for a course:
Step 14
Select the Course ID, Instructor, or Title/Description option.
Step 15
In the text field, enter a Course ID, an Instructor name, or a string
that appears in the Title or Description of the course. If this field is left
blank, courses will be filtered only by the date created.
Step 16
Select the All Courses, Month, or Day option to define the list based on
when courses were created (If Month is selected, courses that are
returned will have been created in the previous 30 days. If Day is
selected, courses that are returned will have been created in the last
24 hours).
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 88
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Step 17
Step 18
Administrator Manual
The search function will create a list of courses according to the search
criteria. Courses will appear in a table format with each course listed in
a separate row.
Click Select in the same row as the desired course. The Search window
will close and the selected course will appear in the Source Course ID field
on the Copy Course Materials into a New Course page.
A receipt page will appear after entering a Course ID and clicking Submit. The
archived package must be downloaded from this page and saved to the local
computer. Select Click here to download the generated package file to save the
file. The archived package will not be stored in the Blackboard file system! If the
package is not downloaded from this page it will be lost, and the user must go through
the archive operation again.
IMS specifications
The Blackboard Learning System packaging format follows the IMS Content Packaging
Specification with extensions to support content types specific to Blackboard Learning
System. Blackboard Learning System (Release 6.1) uses:

IMS Content and Packaging Specification 1.1.2

IMS Metadata Specification 1.2.1

IMS Enterprise Specification 1.01

IMS Question and Test Interoperability Specification 1.2
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 89
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Restore Course
Overview
Restore Course handles the upload of archived packages into Blackboard. Use Restore
Course to return an archived course to the same state it was in at the time it was
archived. Course content (including all course cartridges), user data, and user
interactions are all included in the Archive package.
When a course is restored, the Settings and Course Menu specified in the Archive
package will replace the default Settings and Course Menu that are in effect for new
courses.
Archived packages are designed to provide a permanent record of a course. To save
course materials to teach another set of Students at a later time use the Export
Course and Import Course features.
Note: Do not upload an Archived Course package that has been modified since it was
created and downloaded. Opening the .ZIP file and changing any of the files in the
Archived Course package will result in unstable and unpredictable behavior when the
course is restored.
Find this page
Click Restore Course from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 90
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Restore Course page.
Field
Course ID
Destination Course
ID:
Packaged Course:
Description
Enter a new Course ID for the course to receive course
materials. A new course with this ID will be created with
the data and settings from the packaged course. It is not
possible to restore a course using a Course ID that is
already in use.
Please make sure that the new Course ID matches the
naming convention used at the institution. Also, The
Course ID should not have any spaces or characters
other than numbers and letters, dash (-), underscore (_),
and period (.). The Course ID must be unique and remain
static. It cannot be modified.
Enter the file location of the archive package or browse
for the file location. Restored materials must be .ZIP
archive files of Blackboard Learning System course
materials. To create packaged course materials, use the
Archive Course function.
Restoring User records
When performing a restore Blackboard Learning System checks to see if users are in
the system by comparing User Names and validating against email addresses. If the
User Name exists with the same email address there is no need to create the user in
the system.
If a User Name exists in the system with a different email address than the one
included in the archive package, then a new user will be created with a number
appended to the User Name.
Example: An archive package is uploaded with an account that has the User Name
bb_user. The Restore process looks for users with this User name in the system. If
bb_user exists in the system, the process then compares the email addresses. If the
email address matches, then a new user is not created. If the email addresses are
different, then the process creates a new user, bb_user1.
Note: As a security precaution, any users that are added to the system during a
restore are created without any Administrative User privileges, regardless of the user’s
Administrative User privileges at archive.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 91
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Batch Import/Export/Archive/Restore Course
Overview
The Blackboard Learning System includes a tool for handling the import/export and
archive/restore of a great number of Courses. The tool will process a batch file that
includes the Course ID and the name.
Creating a batch file
A batch file for use with the batch_ImportExport tool only has two values in each row,
the Course ID and the full path to the .ZIP package associated with that course. When
running an Export or Archive action the .ZIP package will be created using the
specified path and file name. When running an Import or Restore action the specified
path and file name, point to the .ZIP package associated with the destination Course
ID.
Below are examples of the contents of a batch file for use with batch_ImportExport
tool. Files should be saved as text (.txt) files.
Restore or Import:
HIST101,
HIST201,
HIST301,
HIST401,
HIST331,
C:\course_archives\Archive_File_HIST101.zip
C:\course_archives\Archive_File_HIST201.zip
C:\course_archives\Archive_File_HIST301.zip
C:\course_archives\Archive_File_HIST401.zip
C:\course_archives\Archive_File_HIST331.zip
Restore and Import batch files require the exact path, including the name of the
package.
Archive or Export:
HIST101,
HIST201,
HIST301,
HIST401,
C:\course_archives\
C:\course_archives\
C:\course_archives\
C:\course_archives\
Archive and Export batch files require only the path to the directory where each
package will be stored. Adding the package name will result in an error.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 92
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Running the tool
The Batch tool for running Import/Export and Archive/Restore functions must be run
from the command line. The tool must be run from the Web/app server. The command
syntax is shown below.
Microsoft® Windows®:
C:\Blackboard\apps\content-exchange\bin\batch_ImportExport.bat –f
<path_to_file> -l <delimiter> -t <operation> -n <virtual_hostname>
Note: Use cmd.exe to open a command line for running the tool. Running the tool
from command.com will result in errors.
UNIX:
/usr/local/blackboard/apps/content-exchange/bin/batch_ImportExport.sh –f
<path_to_file> -l <delimiter> -t <operation> -n <virtual_hostname>
Please note that the exact path to the Blackboard directory may be different
depending on where the Blackboard Learning System was installed.
Argument
<path_to_file>
<delimiter>
<operation>
<virtual_hostname>
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
Enter the full path to the batch file.
One of the following:

1 -- identifies comma (,) as the delimiter.

2 – identifies semicolon (;) as the
delimiter.

3 – identifies TAB as the delimiter.
One of the following:

Import

Export

Restore

Archive
The name of the virtual installation that the tool
will run against. If there are no Virtual
Installations, or if this argument is not given, the
tool will run against the default Virtual Installation.
Page 93
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Batch Copy
Overview
There are two methods available to perform a batch copy operation. The COPYINTO
Snapshot command can perform a batch copy through the Snapshot tool or a batch
copy can be done through a less robust but more expedient command line tool. This
topic details how to use the command line tool to perform a batch copy operation. For
instructions on using Snapshot to perform a batch copy operation please see the
Blackboard Learning System Advanced Integration and Data Management Manual.
By default, when a Batch Copy is performed an exact copy of the course is created. If
there is existing content in the destination course, this content will remain after the
copy. The Course Menu settings in the new course will depend upon the areas of the
course copied
Creating a batch file for the command line tool
The batch file follows exactly the same format as a Snapshot flat file. The first row
defines the attributes and the subsequent rows hold the data for each copy. The
delimiter used in the file must match the delimiter set in the snapshot.properties
file. Finally, the file must be a text file (.txt).
Example:
EXTERNAL_COURSE_KEY|TEMPLATE_COURSE_KEY
HIST101|TEMPLATE_COURSE_ID
HIST102|TEMPLATE_COURSE_ID
HIST103|TEMPLATE_COURSE_ID2
The EXTERNAL_COURSE_KEY is an attribute used for advanced data management. If a
course is created through the GUI, the EXTERNAL_COURSE_KEY is simply the Course
ID.
If the destination courses do not exist they must be created as part of the process or
the copy will fail. To create the destination courses the COURSE_ID and
COURSE_NAME attributes must be added to the batch file.
Example:
EXTERNAL_COURSE_KEY|COURSE_ID|COURSE_NAME|TEMPLATE_COURSE_KEY
HIST101|HIST101|Introduction to American History until
1865|TEMPLATE_COURSE_ID
HIST102|HIST102|Introduction to American History from
1865|TEMPLATE_COURSE_ID
HIST103|HIST103|Introduction to Central American
History|TEMPLATE_COURSE_ID2
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 94
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Running the command line tool
The Batch tool for running Copy functions must be run from the command line. The
tool must be run from the Web/app server. The command syntax is shown below.
Windows:
C:\Blackboard\tools\admin\BatchCourseCopy.cmd <path_to_file>
UNIX:
/usr/local/blackboard/tools/admin/BatchCourseCopy.sh <path_to_file>
Please note that the path to the Blackboard directory may be different based on where
the Blackboard Learning System was installed.
Where <path_to_file> is the full path to the batch file that will be processed. Note that
the delimiter used in the batch file must be the same delimiter in the
snapshot.properties file. The default value is a pipe (|). Also, the command will only
process a batch copy on the default Virtual Installation. To perform a batch copy on
another Virtual Installation the COPYINTO Snapshot command must be run.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 95
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Adding File Types for Use with Course Content Items
Overview
The Blackboard Learning System recognizes several file types that can be attached to
content items and opened in the page or directly in an associated application. It is
important to remember that any type of file can be uploaded to a content item and
made available to Students. If the file is not of a type recognized by the Blackboard
Learning System, users can always download the file and open it locally.
Administrators can make the Blackboard Learning System recognize additional file
types and associated applications by adding MIME extensions to an XML file in the file
system. This should only be done by an experienced System Administrator.
Add a MIME extension
To add a MIME extension that associates a file type with an application, edit the
following XML file. The XML file includes a few sample extensions that can be used as a
blueprint for creating additional MIME extensions.
Windows:
C:\blackboard\webapps\content\WEB-INF\web.xml
UNIX:
/usr/local/blackboard/webapps/content/WEB-INF/web.xml
Recognized content attachments
The Content Attachments section of the Add Content Item page (available to
Instructors through the Course Control Panel) includes options to create a link, display
a media file, or unpackage a file. If Display a media file within the page is chosen
the attached file must be a format recognizable by the Blackboard Learning System. If
it is not, the Blackboard Learning System will automatically create a link to the file.
If a link to the file is created users may open the file in the appropriate application by
clicking on the link assuming that the file type is recognized by the Blackboard
Learning System. For file types that are not recognized by the Blackboard Learning
System, users must first download the file and then open it.
The following file types are the file types recognized by the Blackboard Learning
System.
Extension
.aam
.aiff
.asf
.au
.avi
.doc
.ea
.ev, .ev2
.exe
.gif
.html, .htm
.image
.jpg, .jpeg
File Type
Multimedia
Audio
Multimedia
Audio
Video
Text
Audio
Video
Executable
Image
Web page
Image
Image
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Programs associates with the file type
Macromedia® Authorware® plug-in
Audio program
Microsoft® .NET™ Show
Real Audio Player™
Video player (not Macintosh® compatible)
Microsoft® Word® or other word processor
Java™ enabled Web browser
Java™ enabled Web browser
Graphics program or Web browser
HTML editor or Web browser
Graphics program or Web browser
Graphics program or Web browser
Page 96
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
.jif
.mpe
.mpg, .mpeg
.moov
.mov, .movie
.pdf
.ppt, .pps
Image
Audio/Video
Image
Movie
Video
Text
Slide show
.qt
.ra
.ram
.swa
.swv, .swf
.tiff
.txt
.wav
.wma
.wmf
.wmv
.wpd
.xls
Movie
Audio
Video
Audio
Multimedia
Image
Text
Audio
Audio
Graphic
Media/Audio
Text
Spreadsheet
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Graphics program or Web browser
Graphics program or Web browser
Movie or media player
Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®
Microsoft® PowerPoint® and PowerPoint
Player®
QuickTime®
Real Audio Player™
Real Audio Movie™
Macromedia® Shockwave® plug-in
Macromedia® Shockwave® plug-in
Graphics program or Web browser
Text or HTML editor, word processor
Audio program
Microsoft® Windows®
Microsoft® Windows®
WordPerfect® or other word processor
Microsoft® Excel®
Page 97
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 4—Course Configuration Options
Overview
This chapter reviews the features that determine the appearance and behavior of all
courses.
In this chapter
Chapter 4—Course Configuration Options includes the following topics.
Topic
Course Settings
Set Default Course Properties
Set Default Course Design
Set Default Course Menu
Add New Area—Content Area
Add New Area—Tool Area
Add New Area—Link Area
Course Tools
Enable/Disable Course Creation
Course Role Rename
Course Disk Quotas
Images and Icons
Set Course Images
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Settings page. This is a
menu page that includes links to several
features for configuring the default properties
and appearance of each course.
This topic covers the Set Default Course
Properties page. Administrators can define the
initial properties of each course from this page.
This topic covers the Set Default Course Design
page. Administrators can define the initial
appearance of the Course Menu from this page.
This topic covers the Set Default Course Menu
page. Administrators can define the content,
tools, and links that appear in each course’s
Course Menu from this page.
This topic covers the Add New Area—Content
Area page. Administrators can create a new
content area to appear in each course’s Course
Menu from this page.
This topic covers the Add New Area—Tool Area
page. Administrators can assign a tool to
appear in each course’s Course Menu from this
page.
This topic covers the Add New Area—Link Area
page. Administrators can create a new link to
appear in each course’s Course Menu from this
page.
This topic covers the Course Tools page.
Administrators can set the initial availability of
tools within all courses from this page.
This topic covers the Enable/Disable Course
Creation page. Administrators determine how
courses can be created from this page.
This topic covers the Course Role Rename
page. The names of the Course Roles can be
changed from this page.
This topic covers the Course Disk Quotas page.
Disk space limits can be placed on all courses
from this page.
This topic covers the Images and Icon page.
This menu page includes links to define the
initial appearance of all courses.
This topic covers the Set Course Images page.
Administrators add images to all courses from
this page.
Page 98
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Select Icon Theme
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Administrator Manual
This topic covers the Select Icon Theme page.
Administrators determine the appearance of
the icons in all courses by selecting an icon
them from this page.
Page 99
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Settings
Overview
Find this page
Functions
The Settings page contains a menu of functions used to define parameters for all the
courses on the system.
Click Settings from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
The functions in the list below are accessible from the Settings page.
To . . .
define the settings
that all courses start
with
set the appearance
of the Course Menu
at creation
set the content
areas, tools, and
links that initially
appear in the Course
Menu
set the availability of
tools
define how courses
are created
rename the Course
Roles
set a limit on the
size of each course
enable or disable the
ability edit content
from within a course
click . . .
Set Default Course Properties. The Set Default Course
Properties page will appear.
Set Default Course Design. The Set Default Course Design
page will appear.
Set Default Course Menu The Set Default Course Menu
page will appear.
Course Tools. The Course Tools page will appear.
Enable/Disable Course Creation. The Enable/Disable
Course Creation page will appear.
Course Role Rename. The Course Role Rename page will
appear.
Course Disk Quotas. The Course Disk Quotas page will
appear.
Quick Edit Options. The Quick Edit Options page will
appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 100
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Administrator Manual
Page 101
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Set Default Course Properties
Overview
Find this page
Fields
The options chosen on the Set Default Course Properties page control the initial
availability, enrollment, and course duration settings of new courses. While courses
are created with these options defined according to the defaults, the Instructor or the
Administrator can change these options at any time.
Follow these steps to open the Set Default Course Properties page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Set Default Course Properties from the Settings page.
The table below details the entry fields on the Set Default Course Properties page.
Field
Default Settings
Available by
default
Allow Guests by
default
Allow Observers
by Default
Description
Click Yes or No to select a default availability setting. If
Yes is selected, courses will be immediately available when
they are created.
Click Yes or No to select a default setting for allowing Guest
access to courses. If Yes is selected, Guests will be able to
access courses unless this setting is changed within a
course.
Click Yes or No to select whether or not Observers are
allowed in a course by default. This value is set to No when
the Blackboard Learning System is installed—to enable
Observer access, Instructors must turn it on in the course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 102
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Default
Enrollment
Settings
Administrator Manual
Select a default enrollment from the following options:

Instructor/Admin. By default, The Instructor and
the Administrator control enrollment. Click the
check box next to Allow interested Students to
email requests to Instructor. A link to email the
Instructor to request enrollment will appear next to
the course in the Course Catalog. This link will only
appear if the default enrollment is set to
Instructor/Admin.

Self-Enrollment. By default, Students are allowed
to enroll themselves in courses. An Enroll button
will appear next to the course in the Course Catalog.
To limit self-enrollment to a specified date range,
click the check boxes for a start date and an end
date. Then select the dates by clicking the dropdown arrows and highlighting values or by clicking
the icon and selecting a date from the calendar
interface. The date limitations will only apply if the
default enrollment is set to Self-Enrollment.
Default Duration
Settings
To require an access code by default, click the check
box and enter a code. Students must enter this
code to self-enroll in a course. An access code will
only be required if the default enrollment is set to
Self-Enrollment.
Select a default course duration from the following options:



© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Continuous. Courses, by default, do not have a
start date or an end date.
Select Dates. Courses, by default, have a duration
that matches the starting and ending dates. Select
the dates by clicking the drop-down arrows and
highlighting values or by clicking the icon and
selecting a date from the calendar interface. The
start date or the end date can be left open to place
a limit only on when courses must begin or end.
Days. Courses, by default, will be available for a
number of days from the date of creation. Enter the
number of days in the field.
Page 103
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Set Default Course Design
Overview
The options chosen on the Set Default Course Design page control the initial
appearance of the Course Menu in new courses. The Course Menu appears on the left
side of all courses. It provides links to course content, tools, and links.
While courses are created with these options defined according to the defaults the
Instructor or the Administrator can change these options at any time.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Set Default Course Design page.
Step 1
Step 2
Fields
Click Settings from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Click Set Default Course Design from the Settings page.
The table below details the entry fields on the Set Default Course Design page.
Field
Description
Select Navigation Style
Select how to display the items in the Course Menu by
clicking the Buttons option or the Text option. The Style
Properties options will differ depending on the option
selected in this field.
Select Style Properties—Buttons
Button Type:
Select a button type by clicking on the drop-down arrow
and highlighting a button type. The button type is simply
the pattern that will appear in the button background.
Button Shape:
Click a button shape option.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 104
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Button Style:
Select a button style by clicking on the drop-down arrow
and highlighting a button style. The button style is made
up of colors and shapes. Click Gallery of Buttons to
preview button styles.
Select Style Properties—Text
Select background
Click Pick and select a color from the palette. The color
color for navigation chosen will appear as the background color for all items
in the Course Menu except for the active item.
Select highlight
Click Pick and select a color from the palette. The color
color for navigation chosen will appear as the background color for an active
item in the Course Menu.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 105
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Set Default Course Menu
Overview
The options chosen on the Set Default Course Menu page control the initial course
areas that are available in new courses. Course Areas are parts of a course that hold
content, tools, or links. Course Areas will appear in new courses in the order that they
appear on the Set Default Course Menu page. Please note the names of Course Areas
will appear as shown as well. The italicized text that appears below the name of a
Course Area describes whether the area is a content item, link, or tool (and if so,
which tool).
While courses are created with these options defined according to the defaults the
Instructor or the Administrator can change these options at any time.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Set Default Course Menu page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Set Default Course Menu from the Settings page.
Functions
The table below details the entry fields on the Set Default Course Menu page.
To . . .
add a content area
to the list of
default areas
add a tool area
add an external
link
remove a Course
Area from the list
of default areas
click . . .
Add Content Area. The Add New Area—Content Area page
will appear. From this page, define a content area. The new
Course Area will appear at the bottom of the list of areas.
Add Tool Area. The Add New Area—Tool Area page will
appear.
Add External Link. The Add New Area—Link Area page will
appear.
Remove. The selected Course Area will be removed from
the list of areas.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 106
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
modify a Course
Area
change the order
of a Course Area
Administrator Manual
Modify. The Update Course Area Page will appear. For
information on how to use this page please see the Add New
Area page for the appropriate type of area.
From the drop-down lists in front of each Course Area,
select a number to position the areas in sequence. For
example, if the seventh Course Area should be the third,
select 3 from the drop-down list in front of the seventh
Course Area. The Course Area will now be in the third
position, and the area that was in the third position will now
be in the fourth, and so forth.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 107
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add New Area—Content Area
Overview
Content Areas are containers within a Course that are accessible from the Course
Menu. Instructors often use Content Areas to post:

documents

Assignments

Assessments

sequential Learning Units

other learning materials
Adding a new Content Area through this page creates a blank Content Area that will
appear in each new course. Note that the new Content Area is only a default. The
Instructor of each course can choose to modify or remove the Content Area within
each course. To modify the new area or to set its place within the Course Menu, use
the Set Default Course Menu feature.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Add New Area—Content Area page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Set Default Course Menu from the Settings page.
Step 3
Click Add Content Area in the Action Bar on the Set Default Course
Menu page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 108
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the fields on the Add New Area—Content Area page.
Field
Description
Set Area Properties
Area Type:
This field is display only.
Area Name:
Select a name for the area from the drop-down list or enter
a name in the text box.
Allow guest
Select this check box to permit users with a Course Role of
Access:
Guest in the course to view the new area.
Allow observer
Select this check box to permit users assigned to a course
access:
user as an Observer to view the new area.
Make available
Select this check box to make the new area available to
for Student/
users when a course is created. If the area is not available,
Participant
the Instructor must make the area available for users to
users
view the area.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 109
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add New Area—Tool Area
Overview
Tool Areas allow access to a tool directly through the Course Menu.
Adding a new Tool Area through this page creates an area that will access the selected
tool in each new course. Note that the new Tool Area is only a default. The Instructor
of each course can choose to modify or remove the Tool Area within each course. To
modify the new area or to set its place within the Course Menu, use the Set Default
Course Menu feature.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Add New Area—Tool Area page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Set Default Course Menu from the Settings page.
Step 3
Click Add Tool Area in the Action Bar on the Set Default Course Menu
page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 110
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the fields on the Add New Area—Tool Area page.
Field
Description
Set Area Properties
Area Type:
Select the tool accessible through the new area.
Area Name:
Enter a name in the text box for the Tool Area. If a name is
not entered, the name of the tool selected in Area Type will
be the name of the Tool Area.
Make available
Select this check box to make the new area available to
for Student/
users when a course is created. If the area is not available,
Participant
the Instructor must make the area available for users to
users
view the area.
Note: Guest and Observer permissions to access the tool are controlled through the
Course Tools feature.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 111
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add New Area—Link Area
Overview
Link areas create an access point to a URL in the Course Menu.
Adding a new Link Area through this page creates an Area that will access the defined
URL in each new course. Note that the new Link Area is only a default. The Instructor
of each course can choose to modify or remove the Link Area within each course. To
modify the new area or to set its place within the Course Menu, use the Set Default
Course Menu feature.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Add New Area—Link Area page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Set Default Course Menu from the Settings page.
Step 3
Click Add Link Area in the Action Bar on the Set Default Course Menu
page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 112
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the fields on the Add New Area—Link Area page.
Field
Description
Set Area Properties
Area Type:
This field is display only.
Area Name(r):
Enter a name for the link in the text box.
Target (r):
Enter the complete URL for the link. For example,
http://www.blackboard.com, not www.blackboard.com or
blackboard.com.
Launch in new
Select this check box to open the destination URL in a new
window
browser window.
Allow guest
Select this check box to permit users with a Course Role of
Access:
Guest in the course to view the new area.
Allow observer
Select this check box to permit users assigned to a course
access:
user as an Observer to view the new area.
Make available
Select this check box to make the new area available to
for Student/
users when a course is created. If the area is not available,
Participant
the Instructor must make the area available for users to
users
view the area.
Note: Guests and Observers have access to any link displayed in the Course Menu.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 113
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Tools
Overview
The options chosen on the Course Tools page control the initial tools that are available
in new courses. Blackboard Learning System has a robust set of tools and the
flexibility to add new tools to the platform. A filter at the top of the Course Tools page
sets the list of tools displayed to show Blackboard Learning System tools and tools
added through System Extensions.
While courses are created with these options defined according to the defaults, the
Instructor or the Administrator can change these options for each Course at any time.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Course Tools page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Course Tools from the Settings page.
Note: System Extension Tools cannot be added to Blackboard Learning System –
Basic Edition.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 114
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Functions
Administrator Manual
The table below details the functions available from the Course Tools page.
To . . .
change the list of
tools displayed
click . . .
The drop-down arrow in the Filter field and select a list of
tools. The options available are:

Blackboard Tools. The tool set provided by
Blackboard Learning System. This includes
communication tools, information sharing tools, and
calendar event and task tracking tools.

System Extension Tools. Tools that have been
integrated into the Blackboard Learning System
through a System Extension.

All Tools. Tools provided by the Blackboard
Learning System and tools that have been
integrated through a System Extension.
enable a tool by
Click the check box in the Enabled column for each tool
default
that should be available in each new course by default.
allow Guest access Click the check box in the Allow Guest column for each
to a tool by
tool that should be accessible by Guests in each new course
default
by default. Tools that cannot be accessed by Guests are
marked “n/a”.
allow Observer
Click the check box in the Allow Observer column for each
access to a tool by tool that should be accessible by Observers in each new
default
course by default. Tools that cannot be accessed by
Observers are marked “n/a”.
Disabling Announcements
If Announcements are disabled, any Announcements that Instructors have previously
created will be visible in their courses, but those Instructors will not be able to delete
these Announcements, because this tool will no longer be available.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 115
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Enable/Disable Course Creation
Overview
Through the Enable/Disable Course Creation page Administrators can make course
creation functions available to users, require users to request that a course be
created, or prevent users from creating courses. If users are allowed to create
courses, then a Create button will appear on the Courses common area.
Note: Blackboard recommends not allowing all users to create courses for security
reasons. If all users are allowed to create courses, Blackboard strongly recommends
prohibiting Instructors from modifying user information. Allowing all users to create
courses and allowing the course Instructor, which could be the person who created the
course, to modify user information is a serious security concern.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Enable /Disable Course Creation page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Enable/Disable Course Creation from the Settings page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 116
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Enable/Disable Course Creation page.
Field
Description
Set Course Creation Options
Do not Allow Users
Click this option to prevent users from creating courses.
to Create Courses:
Only users with privileges will be able to create courses.
Allow all User to
Click this option to make course creation functions
Create Courses:
available to all users. A button will appear on the
Courses area to create a course. Blackboard
recommends not allowing all users to create courses for
security reasons.
Allow Users to Send Click this option and enter a valid email address in the
an Email Request
field to allow users to request that the system
for Course Creation: Administrator create a course. A button will appear on
the Courses area for users to email a request.
Note: This page functions similar to the Enable/Disable Organization and Community
Discussion Board page. If enabling or disabling Organization and Discussion Board
Creation, the page will also include an option for enabling and disabling Discussion
Boards on the Community Common area. Organizations and the Community Common
area are only available with the Blackboard Portal System.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 117
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Role Rename
Overview
The names of the Course Roles that are used to define privileges within a Course can
be changed to suit the institution. It is important to note that even if the name of role
is changed the privileges for the role do not change. Changing the role “Grader” to
“Content Manager” will not change what users with that role can access.
To modify the privileges associated with each role use the User Privileges feature.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Course Rename page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Course Role Rename from the Settings page.
For each role name, the default name is listed below the name as it appears in the
system. To change the name of the role simply edit the name as it appears in the
Role Name: field.
To change all the names back to their default values click the Check here to revert
all fields to default names check box and then click Submit.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 118
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Disk Quotas
Overview
Administrators manage the size of course Web sites from the Course Disk Quotas
page. Quotas keep course and organization Web sites from exceeding acceptable disk
space limits and warn Instructors when a course Web site is approaching the limit.
Administrators can grant additional disk space to individual course Web sites through
the Course Quotas Overrides page. This page is accessible by listing courses and
viewing the properties for a specific course or organization.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Course Disk Quotas page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Course Disk Quotas from the Settings page.
The table below details the fields on the Course Disk Quotas page.
Field
Description
Control Course Disk Quotas
Enable Disk Quotas
Click this check box to place restrictions on the size of
course Web sites.
Warn Instructors
Enter an amount of disk space, in Kilobytes, at which
when course size
Instructors will receive a warning that the course Web
exceeds
site is approaching the disk space limit.
Maximum course
Enter a disk space limit in Kilobytes.
disk Usage
Limit the maximum
Enter a size limit, in Kilobytes, for files uploaded to
size of a single file
course Web sites.
upload to
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 119
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Quick Edit Options
Overview
Quick Edit allows Instructors to make changes to course content from within the
course view instead of navigating through the Course Control Panel to edit content.
Administrators may turn this option On or Off on the Quick Edit Options page. If the
feature is turned off, the Display View and Edit View links will not appear on content
pages, and this feature will be unavailable to Instructors.
Note: The Quick Edit feature is available to users with the roles of Instructor, TA,
Course Builder or System Administrator. Due to the size of the content editing pages,
this method of editing is not recommended for users who have 800x600 resolution.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Quick Edit Options page.
Step 19
Step 20
Functions
In the System Control Panel select Settings under Courses.
Select Quick Edit Options on the Settings page.
Select Yes or No to determine whether this feature will be available.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 120
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Images and Icons
Overview
Administrators manage the appearance of Blackboard Courses through the tools
provided on the Images and Icons page. Administrators can add images and colors to
fully customize the look of courses.
Adding institutional images and colors will brand an institution’s Blackboard Learning
System Courses with a look that is both appealing and familiar to users.
Find this page
Features
Click Images and Icons from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
The following features are available from the Images and Icons Menu page:
To . . .
add images to
courses
define the
appearance of
icons in courses
click . . .
Set Course Images. The Set Course Images page will
appear.
Select Icon Themes. The Select Icon Themes page will
appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 121
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Set Course Images
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Administrators select images to appear on the main page of all course Web sites from
the Set Course Images page. Two images appear next to each other on the bottom of
the main page and one image appears at the top of the Course Menu on the left side
of the main page.
Follow these steps to open the Set Course Images page.
Step 1
Click Images and Icons from the Courses section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Set Course Images from the Images and Icons page.
The table below details the fields on the Set Course Images page.
Field
Description
View/Select Course Images
Main Course Page/Primary Bottom Image
Current Image:
Displays the primary image that appears at the bottom
of the main page of all course Web sites.
Banner URL:
Enter a URL that links to the primary image. A user
clicking on the image will access this URL. When adding
a URL, do so as http://www.blackboard.com, not
www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com
Name of Link:
Name the link to the primary image.
Banner Image:
Enter the path of an image file or click Browse to find
an image file on the system. This image will become the
primary image that appears at the bottom of the main
page of all course Web sites. The file must be in .GIF or
.JPEG format.
Remove Image:
Click this check box to remove the primary image from
the bottom of the main page on all course Web sites.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 122
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Main Course Page/Secondary Bottom Image
Current Image:
Displays the secondary image that appears at the
bottom of the main page of all course Web sites.
Banner URL:
Enter a URL that links to the secondary image. A user
clicking on the image will access this URL. When adding
a URL, do so as http://www.blackboard.com, not
www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com
Name of Link:
Name the link to the secondary image.
Banner Image:
Enter the path of an image file or click Browse to find
an image file on the system. This image will become the
secondary image that appears at the bottom of the
main page of all course Web sites. The file must be in
.GIF or .JPEG format.
Remove Image:
Click this check box to remove the secondary image
from the bottom of the main page on all course Web
sites.
Course Page/Course Menu Image
Current Image:
Displays the image that appears at the top of the
Course Menu of all course Web sites.
Banner URL:
Enter a URL that links to the image. A user clicking on
the image will access this URL. When adding a URL, do
so as http://www.blackboard.com, not
www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com
Name of Link:
Name of the link to the image.
Banner Image:
Enter the path of an image file or click Browse to find
an image file on the system. This image will become the
image that appears at the top of the Course Menu of all
course Web sites. The file must be in .GIF or .JPEG
format.
Remove Image:
Click this check box to remove the image from the top
of the Course Menu on all course Web sites.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 123
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Select Icon Themes
Overview
Find this page
Function
Administrators select a theme for icons from the Select Icon Themes page. Selecting a
theme will add colorful icons to folders, documents, and other items within Blackboard
Learning System. Icons make it easy for users to navigate through Blackboard
Learning System and quickly find important information.
Follow these steps to open the Select Icon Themes page.
Step 1
Click Images and Icons from the Courses section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Select Icon Themes from the Images and Icons page.
Click on a sample to view all icons in that theme. Select a theme from the list by
clicking on the drop-down arrow. Click Submit to apply that theme across Blackboard
Learning System. Changing the icon theme changes the appearance of the icons
throughout the system. New courses will also use the selected icon theme.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 124
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 5—Course Catalog
Overview
This chapter reviews the features that control the course catalog.
In this chapter
Chapter 5—Course Catalog contains the following topics.
Catalog
Topic
Categorize Courses
Categorize Courses—Link
Categories to a Course
Manage Course Catalog
Create/Modify Category
Course Catalog Options
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Catalog page. This menu
page includes all the features necessary to
manage the course catalog.
This topic covers the Categorize Courses page.
This search page generates a list of courses to
which categories can then be attached.
This topic covers the Categorize Courses—Link
Categories to a Course page. Categories are
assigned to a course from this page.
This topic covers the Manage Course Catalog
page. This page lists the categories and
subcategories that make up the catalog and
provides options for creating, changing, and
removing categories.
This topic covers the Create/Modify Category
page. Administrators can create or edit a
category from these pages.
This topic covers the Course Catalog Options
page. Administrators can control if the catalog
appears to users or if an outside catalog will be
used.
Page 125
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Catalog
Overview
The Catalog is an organized listing of courses (or organizations). Each course is
grouped with like courses in categories defined by the institution. Courses can be
listed in more than one category to assist user searches.
The Catalog page is a menu of functions available for managing the Catalog. Course
Categories can be added, modified, and deleted, as well as linked or unlinked to
courses. The Catalog appears to users on the Courses common area and can be
configured to appear on the Gateway page. Another Catalog for organizations appears
on the Community common area with Blackboard Portal System.
Find this page
Functions
Click Catalog from the Courses section of the System Control Panel.
The functions in the list below are accessible from the Course Catalog page.
To . . .
create a Category
Link between a
course and a
category
add or change a
category
define how users
access the Catalog
click . . .
Categorize Courses. The Categorize Courses page will
appear.
Manage Course Catalog. The Manage Course Catalog
page will appear.
Course Catalog Options. The Course Catalog Options
page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 126
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Categorize Courses
Overview
Find this page
Search
Administrators begin the process of linking categories to courses from this view of the
Categorize Courses page. Using the search function at the top of the page, a list of
courses is generated. Then, categories can be added to individual courses by clicking
Categorize.
Follow these steps to open the Categorize Courses page.
Step 1
Click Course Catalog from the Courses section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
From the Course Catalog page, click Categorize Courses.
The Categorize Courses page contains a search function at the top of the page. A list
of courses will appear following a successful search. The following search tabs are
available on the page:

Search: The search parameters on this tab can be used separately or in
tandem to further narrow the list generated. To use this tab: Click the Course
ID, Instructor, or Title/Description option. Enter a value in the field. Then
click the All Courses, Month, or Day option to define the list based on when
the courses where created. The search function will create a list of courses
with that value created in the time selected.

A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a
Course ID. A list of all courses with an ID that begins with that character will
appear.

List All: Click List All to view all the courses on the system.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 127
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Functions
Administrator Manual
The table below details the functions available from the Categorize Courses page after
a search has successfully generated a list of courses.
To . . .
link categories to
a course
view a course Web
site
click . . .
Categorize. A new page view will appear with a list of
categories to attach to the course.
the link in the Course ID column. The course Web site will
open.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 128
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Categorize Courses—Link Categories to a Course
Overview
Find this page
Fields
After clicking Categorize for a specific course on the Categorize Courses page, a new
page view will appear. From this view, categories are linked to a course. Category
links may also be removed from a course.
Follow these steps to open the Categorize Courses—Link Categories to a Course page.
Step 1
Click Course Catalog from the Courses section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
From the Course Catalog page, click Categorize Courses.
Step 3
Generate a list of courses using the search function on the Categorize
Courses page.
Step 4
Click Categorize for a course.
The table below details the entry fields on the Categorize Courses page.
Field
Course Catalog
Add Category:
Currently
Categorized In:
Description
Select a category to add by clicking the drop-down arrow
and highlighting a category. Click Add to link the
category selected to the course.
Displays the categories linked to this course. Click
Remove to remove a category link from a course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 129
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Course Catalog
Overview
Find this page
Administrators add, modify and remove categories to the Course Catalog from the
Manage Course Catalog page. Categories can be added within categories to create a
nested outline structure with main categories and several deeper levels of
subcategories. To update subcategories, click on a category for a page view that
includes subcategories under the heading category.
Follow these steps to open the Manage Course Catalog page.
Step 1
Click Course Catalog from the Courses section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
From the Course Catalog page, click Manage Course Catalog.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 130
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Functions
Administrator Manual
The table below details the functions available on the Manage Course Catalog page.
To . . .
click . . .
view and manage sub- the name of a category. If there are sub-categories, a
categories
new page view will appear.
add a category
Add Category to add a category or sub-category to the
course catalog. The category will be added at the
current level.
modify a category
Modify to make changes to a category. When changing
the name of a category, the sub-categories beneath it
remain the same.
remove a category
Remove to delete that category from the Course
Catalog. Any category links to courses will be removed.
navigate to previous
page views in the
category hierarchy
Example
Note: Also, any sub-categories and category links to
sub-categories will be removed.
the navigation links that appear beneath the Add
Category button. These links begin with Top, which will
return to the page view that lists the first level of
categories.
A category, History, has numerous sub-categories including American History, Ancient
History, and World History. Within the World History category, there are subcategories including African, Asian, and European History. To add a category on South
American history, click on the History category on the Manage Course Catalog page.
Then click on the World History category. A Manage Course Catalog page with the subcategories of World History will appear. Click Add Category to add the following
category:
History
World History
South American History
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 131
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Create/Modify Category
Overview
Course Categories are created and modified through a Manage Course Catalog page
view. Clicking Add or Modify for an existing category from a Manage Course Catalog
page will load the Create/Modify Category view.
Categories require a name to be displayed to users and a name unique to the
Blackboard Learning System database called a Mnemonic. The Mnemonic allows for
multiple categories with the same name to exist in the database. For example, the
sub-category Advanced Courses could appear multiple times in the Catalog under
different categories.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Manage Course Catalog page view.
Step 1
Click Course Catalog from the Courses section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
From the Course Catalog page, click Manage Course Catalog.
Step 3
Navigate to the level where the new category should exist or the
category to be modified exists.
Step 4
At the top of the Manage Course Catalog page, click Add Category or
click Modify for an existing category.
Step 5
The Manage Course Catalog page will appear with the Create/Modify
Category function loaded in the page view.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 132
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Create/Modify Category page view.
Field
Description
Create/Modify Category
Category Display
Enter the name of the category as it should be displayed.
Name:
Category Mnemonic:
Enter a mnemonic name for this category. The Category
Mnemonic acts as a unique identifier for categories. Do not
use special characters in this field. Special characters
include: %&#<>=+ as well as spaces. When creating
attributes a good rule to follow is only use alphanumeric
characters, underscores, dots, and dashes. This field is
required.
Once this field is set it cannot be modified.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 133
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Catalog Options
Overview
Administrators may select the default catalog or supply a link to an external course
catalog from the Course Catalog Options page.
The default catalog groups courses into folders and lists them along with buttons for
users to preview courses or login if they are enrolled in a course. An Administrator
may incorporate an different catalog via URL. Inserting an outside course catalog will
remove the Blackboard Learning System default catalog and users will not be able to
preview or login to courses from the catalog.
The Course Catalog appears in the Courses common area. It can also be configured to
appear on the Gateway Page.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Course Catalog Options page.
Step 1
Click Course Catalog from the Courses section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
From the Course Catalog page, click Course Catalog Options.
Click one of the options to select the catalog. The options are:



default catalog
an external course catalog. Enter the full URL to direct users to an external
catalog.
suppress the catalog. No catalog will be used on the system.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 134
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 6—Organizations
Overview
This chapter details how to manage organizations. Note that the tools to manage
organizations are the same that are used to manage courses. Any differences or added
features are explained in this chapter.
Note: Organizations are only available with the Blackboard Portal System.
In this chapter
Chapter 6—Organizations includes the following topics.
Topic
Organization Management
Discussion Boards
Add or Modify Discussion Board
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Organization Management
page. It details the similarities and differences
between administering courses and
administering organizations.
This topic covers the Discussion Boards page.
This page controls the discussion boards that
appear on the Communities common area.
This topic covers the Add and Modify
Discussion Board pages. Administrators use
these pages to create or change discussion
boards for the Communities common area.
Page 135
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Organization Management
Overview
Organization Web sites are structured and managed in the same way as Course Web
sites. While they function the same way, Organizations and Courses do not share the
same purpose. Organization Web sites hold content and tools for institutional
communities outside the scope of academic learning or training. Clubs, sports teams,
and service organizations are all examples of communities that benefit from their own
Organization Web site.
Organizations are accessible through the Community common area. This common area
includes a catalog of Organizations and listing of the Organizations a user participates
in—similar to the Courses Common area. In addition, the Community common area
includes institution-wide Discussion Boards.
Note: The Community Common area, Organizations, and the Organizations section of
the System Control Panel are only available with Blackboard Portal System.
Finding Help for Organization Management
Administrators looking for assistance with the tools and functions used to manage
Organization Web sites should consult the Courses section of this manual. The Courses
tools and functions work exactly the same as the Organization Management tools and
functions. In fact, to find a particular page, simply replace the word “Course” with the
word “Organization” in the navigation instructions!
The Organizations of the System Control Panel does include an additional feature for
managing the Discussion Boards that appear on the Community common area.
Discussion Board management is documented in the following topics.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 136
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Discussion Boards
Overview
Administrators manage the Discussion Boards that appear on the Community common
area from the Manage Discussion Board page. Community common area Discussion
Boards typically include boards for posting messages that may interest the entire
institution.
Blackboard recommends including a Discussion Board for online learning to serve as a
forum for Students and Instructors to discuss best practices.
Example: A higher education institution may include a ride Discussion Board to share
carpooling information, or housing Discussion Board to find out who is looking for a
roommate and who is looking for housing.
Find this page
Functions
Click Discussion Boards from the Organizations section of the System Control Panel.
To use the functions available on the Manage Discussion Boards page, follow the table
below.
To . . .
order Discussion
Boards
add a Discussion
Board
modify a Discussion
Board
remove a Discussion
Board
click . . .
a number from the drop-down list next to a Discussion
Board. The Discussion Boards will appear on the
Community common area in the order selected.
Add Discussion.
Modify for a Discussion Board.
Remove next to the Discussion Board to be removed.
This action is irreversible.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 137
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add or Modify Discussion Board
Overview
Find this page
Fields
The pages for adding and modifying a Discussion Board contain the same fields and
functions. The page for adding a Discussion Board opens with empty fields while the
page for modifying a Discussion Board opens with the fields populated with
information on a specific Discussion Board.
Follow these steps to open the Add Discussion page.
Step 1
Click Add Discussion or click Modify for a specific board from the
Manage Discussion Board page.
Step 2
The Add Discussion page or the Modify Discussion page will appear.
The table below details the entry fields for adding and modifying a Discussion Board.
Field
Board Information
Board Name:
Board Description:
Board Options
Select Icon:
Available:
Description
Enter the name of a new Discussion Board or edit the
name of an existing board.
Enter a description for a new Discussion Board or edit
the description of an existing board.
Select an icon for the Discussion Board from the dropdown list.
Click Yes to make the Discussion Board available. Click
No and the board will not appear on the Community
common area, however, it will appear on the Manage
Discussion Boards page. The Administrator can modify
the board to make it available at a later time.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 138
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Part 2—Users
Overview
In this part
This part of the manual reviews the features available from the Users section of the
System Control Panel. The features described in this section are used to create,
manage, and remove users.
Part 2—Users contains the following chapters.
Chapter
Update Users
Create Users
Remove Users
Observers
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This chapter details the features
update user accounts.
This chapter details the features
users.
This chapter details the features
remove users from the system.
This chapter details the features
Observers to users.
used to
used to create
used to
used to assign
Page 139
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 1—Update Users
Overview
This chapter describes the features used to update user accounts.
In this chapter
Chapter 1—Update Users includes the following topics.
Topic
List/Modify Users
Properties: User
Change Password for User
View User-Course Information
Modify User’s Role in Course
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the List/Modify Users page.
This search page creates a list of users which
can then be modified using several different
options.
This topic covers the Properties: User page.
From this page an Administrator can change
the attributes associated with the user account.
This topic covers the Change Password for User
page. Administrators can set a password for a
user account from this page.
This topic covers the View User-Course
Information page. This page lists all the
courses that a user participates in.
This topic covers the Modify User’s Role in
Course page. Administrators can set the
Course Role for a user in a particular course
from this page.
Page 141
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
List/Modify Users
Overview
Administrators can view and update user information from the List/Modify Users page.
User profiles, passwords, and Course Roles for specific courses are updated by clicking
the buttons that appear next to user information. In addition, the Administrator can
send an email to a user by clicking on the user’s email address in the Email column.
User records that are set to Unavailable are preceded by a circle symbol with a slash
through it. Also, the record will appear in gray text with the exception of the email
address, which may still be clicked to send a message to the user. To make a record
available, click Properties to modify the user record and change the availability
setting.
With Blackboard Learning System user records may also be disabled in the database.
Disabled users records are preceded by a circle symbol with an ‘x’ through it. Like
unavailable records, disabled records will appear in gray text with the exception of the
email address. For more information on the properties of disabled records, please see
the Blackboard Learning System Advanced Integration and Data Management Manual.
Find this page
Click List/Modify Users from the Users section of the System Control Panel.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 142
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Search for users
The List/Modify Users page contains a search function at the top of the page. The
following search tabs are available on the List/Modify Users page:
Functions

Search: Click Last Name, User Name, or Email and enter a value. A list of
users in the course with that last name, user name or email address will
appear.

A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a last
name. A list of all users with a last name that begins with that character will
appear.

Advanced: Enter text in the Containing field to search for users that have
that text in their name or User Name. If desired, select the check box and
enter a number to search only for users that have been active in the system
for that number of days prior.

List All: Click List All to view all users.
Follow the table below to use the functions available on the List/Modify Users page.
To . . .
send an email to a
user
edit a user profile
view the courses that
a user participates in
and set the user’s
Course Role
change a user’s
password
click . . .
on their email address to open the browser’s default
email program with the user’s email address already
populated in the appropriate field.
Properties to open the Properties: User page.
Courses for a user.
Password. The Change Password page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 143
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Properties: User
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Updates to a user’s profile information are made from the Properties: User page. The
page opens with some fields already populated with user data entered earlier.
Follow these steps to open the Properties: User page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Users from the Users section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Perform a search to generate a list of users.
Step 3
Click Properties for a user.
The table below details the entry fields on the Properties: User page.
Field
Description
Personal Information
First Name: [r]
Edit the user’s first name.
Middle Name:
Edit the user’s middle name.
Last Name: [r]
Edit the user’s last name.
Email: [r]
Edit the user’s email address.
Student ID:
Edit the user’s Student ID as defined by the institution.
Account Information
User Name:
Display only.
Other Information
Gender:
Edit the user’s gender.
Birthdate:
Select the user’s birthdate from the lists by clicking on the
drop-down arrow or click the calendar icon to select a date.
Education Level: Edit the user’s education level.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 144
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Company:
Job Title:
Department:
Street 1:
Street 2:
City:
State/Province:
ZIP/Postal
Code:
Country:
Web Site:
Administrator Manual
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
Edit
the user’s company.
the user’s job title.
the user’s department.
the user’s address.
any additional address information.
the user’s city.
the user’s state or province.
the user’s ZIP code or postal code.
Edit the user’s country.
Edit the URL of the user’s personal Web site. When entering
a URL, be sure to enter the URL completely, for example,
http://www.blackboard.com and not www.blackboard.com
or blackboard.com.
Home Phone:
Edit the home phone number of the user. The phone
number will display exactly as entered.
Work Phone:
Edit the work phone number of the user. The phone number
will display exactly as entered.
Work Fax:
Edit the fax number of the user. The fax number will display
exactly as entered.
Mobile Phone:
Edit the mobile phone of the user. The phone number will
display exactly as entered.
Role and Availability
Portal Role
Select a Portal Role from the drop down list. The Portal Role
controls what the user sees on the portal. Tabs and modules
can be constructed and configured to show to different
groups based on Portal Role (with Blackboard Portal
System).
Administrative
Select an Administrative User Role from the drop-down list.
User Role
The Administrative User Role controls the user’s access to
the features on the System Control Panel. The privileges
assigned to each role can be set using the User Privileges
feature.
Available
Select Yes or No from the drop-down list. If Yes is
selected, the user will have access to the system. If No is
selected, the user will not be able to access the system until
this field is changed to Yes.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 145
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Change Password
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Administrators can update a user password from the Change Password for User page.
A change made to the password must be communicated to the user or the user will
not be able to access the system.
Follow the steps below to open the Change Password for User page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Users from the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Generate a list of users using the search tabs.
Step 3
Click Password for a user.
The table below details the fields on the Change Password for User page.
Field
Change Password
Password [r]
Verify Password
[r]
Description
Enter a new password for the user.
Enter the new password again to ensure that there were no
errors.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 146
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
View User-Course Information: User
Overview
Find this page
Functions
Course roles are viewed and managed through the View User-Course Information
page. Users can be removed from a course or have their Course Role changed. In
addition, the links in the Course ID column will access the Web site for that course.
Follow the steps below to open the View User-Course Information: User page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Users from the Users section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Perform a search to generate a list of users.
Step 3
Click Courses for a user from the List/Modify Users page.
The table below details the available functions on the View User-Course Information:
User page.
To . . .
view a course that a
user is enrolled in
change a user’s role in
a course
remove a user from a
course
click . . .
the course hyperlink in the Course ID column.
Modify. The Modify User’s Role in Course page will
appear.
Remove. This cannot be undone. If a user is removed
from a course, all of the course data (including grades!)
associated with the user is also removed. If a user is
removed and then enrolled into the same course, their
course data will not reappear in the course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 147
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Modify User’s Role in Course
Overview
Find this page
Course role can be changed for a user from the Modify User’s Role in Course page.
Changing a user’s role may limit or add access to areas within a course Web site based
on the privileges assigned to each role.
Follow these steps to open the Modify User’s Role in Course page.
Step 1
Click List/Modify Users from the Users section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Perform a search to generate a list of users.
Step 3
Click Courses for a user from the List/Modify Users page.
Step 4
Click Modify for a course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 148
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the fields on the Modify User’s Role in Course page.
Field
Description
Role and Availability
User Role:
Select one of the following user Course roles:
Course Builder: User is able to access most areas of
the Course Control Panel but may not access
Student grades.

Grader: User is able to access all areas under
Assessments and some Course Tools.

Guest: Guests have access to course content not
locked by the Instructor.

Student: User is able to access all available course
content and will be graded on Assessments.

Instructor: User is able to control all aspects of the
course through the Course Control Panel.

Teacher’s Assistant: User is able to control most
aspects of the course through the Course Control
Panel. Teaching Assistants may not change the role
of a user in the course and they may not modify the
password of the instructor.
Select Yes or No from the drop-down list. If Yes is
selected, the user will have access to the course Web site. If
No is selected, the user will not be able to access the
course. This option can be modified after the user is created
to control access throughout the user’s involvement with
the course.

Available (this
course only)
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 149
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 2—Create Users
Overview
This chapter describes the different options Administrators have for creating user
account through the System Control Panel.
In this chapter
Chapter 2—Create Users includes the following topics.
Create Users
Topic
Batch Create Users
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Create Users page.
Administrators can create an account and
enter each attribute from this page.
This topic covers the Batch Create Users page.
Administrators can create many users and
assign attributes using a batch file.
Page 150
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Create User
Overview
The Administrator creates user records and defines roles to manage user access to
Blackboard Learning System functions from the Create Users page. Creating a User
Name and password allows a user to access Blackboard and use it to learn, teach, and
communicate.
Defining roles for users creates an organized and controlled learning environment.
There are three types of roles assigned to users:



Find this page
Fields
Portal Role: The Portal Role controls what the User sees when they login. The
Portal Tabs and their content can be configured to present a completely
different user experience to each of the Portal Roles.
Administrative User Role: Administrative User Roles define privileges to the
Administrator functions that are accessible from the System Control Panel.
Users assigned the role of Observer do not have access to the System Control
Panel.
Course Role: Course Roles are set when users are assigned to a Course. The
privileges only apply to that Course, allowing a User to participate as an
Instructor or Teacher’s Assistant in one Course and as a Student in another.
Follow these steps to open the Create User page.
Step 1
Click Create User from the Users section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
The Create User page will appear.
The table below details the entry fields on the Create User page.
Field
Description
Personal Information
First Name: [r]
Enter the new user’s first name. This field is required.
Middle Name:
Enter the new user’s middle name.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 151
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Last Name: [r]
Enter the new user’s last name. This field is required.
Email: [r]
Enter the new user’s email address. This field is required.
Student ID:
Enter the new user’s Student ID as defined by the institution.
Account Information
User Name: [r]
Enter a user name for the new user. This field is required.
Password: [r]
Enter a password for the user’s account. The password must
be at least one character and contain no spaces or special
characters. Special characters include: %&#<>=+ as well as
spaces. When creating attributes a good rule to follow is only
use alphanumeric characters, underscores, dots, and dashes.
Verify
Enter the user’s password again to ensure accuracy.
Password: [r]
Other Information
Gender:
Enter the new user’s gender.
Birthday:
Select the new user’s birthday from the drop-down lists.
Education
Enter the new user’s education level.
Level:
Company:
Enter the new user’s company.
Job Title:
Enter the new user’s job title.
Department:
Enter the new user’s department.
Street 1:
Enter the new user’s address.
Street 2:
Enter any additional address information.
City:
Enter the new user’s city.
State/Province: Enter the new user’s state or province.
ZIP/Postal
Enter the new user’s ZIP code or postal code.
Code:
Country:
Enter the new user’s country.
Web Site:
Enter the URL of the user’s personal Web site. When entering
a URL, be sure to enter the URL completely, for example,
http://www.blackboard.com and not www.blackboard.com or
blackboard.com.
Home Phone:
Enter the home phone number of the user. The phone
number will display exactly as entered.
Work Phone:
Enter the work phone number of the user. The phone
number will display exactly as entered.
Work Fax:
Enter the fax number of the user. The fax number will
display exactly as entered.
Mobile Phone:
Enter the mobile phone of the user. The phone number will
display exactly as entered.
Role and Availability
Portal Role:
Select a Portal Role from the list by clicking the drop-down
arrow and highlighting a role. The Portal Role is used to
determine what the user sees on the Portal.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 152
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrative
User Role:
Administrator Manual
Select an Administrative User Role from the list.
Administrative User Roles are defined as:

Course Administrator: Access to areas on the System
Control Panel that deal with managing courses.

Guest: Assigning a User Name a role of Guest allows
the institution to turn off the Preview button on the
Gateway page and control who can view the system
as a Guest. No access to the System Control Panel.

None: No access to the System Control Panel.

Observer: No access to the System Control Panel.
Only users with this Administrative User Role will be
able to serve as Observers.

Portal Administrator: Access to areas of the System
Control Panel that deal with managing the portal, the
look-and-feel of the system as a whole.

Support: Limited access to the System Control Panel.

System Admin: Access to all functions available on
the System Control Panel.

System Support: Access to all functions on the
System Control Panel. May not modify individual
courses.
User Administrator: Access to areas of the System
Control Panel that deal with managing users.
Select Yes or No to allow the user to log in to Blackboard
Learning System. If No is selected, the user will appear
within the system but will not be able to log in.

Available
Using special characters
The following special characters should never be used in an attribute such as a User
Name, password, database user, Course ID, and so forth.
%&#<>=+
These characters are only safe to use when adding content into a text box, such as
adding the description for a course.
When creating attributes a good rule to follow is to only use alphanumeric characters,
underscores, dots, and dashes (do not use spaces!).
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 153
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Batch Create Users
Overview
Large numbers of users can be added to the system from the Batch Create Users
page. Using a batch file, users are entered into the system quickly and without having
to go through the Create User page to add each user.
Note: If using a batch file created for a previous version of Blackboard Learning
System, verify that the fields are in the correct order for the current version. If
necessary, reformat the file so that the fields are in the correct order before
processing the batch create.
Find this page
Fields
Click Batch Create Users from the Users section of the System Control Panel.
The table below details the entry fields on the Batch Create Users page.
Field
File Upload
File Location:
Delimiter Type of
Your File:
Description
Enter the location of the batch user file. Or, click Browse
to open up the file directory, then locate and select the
file. The field will populate with the selected file.
Select the delimiter option to be used on the batch user
file entered in the File Location field. If Automatic is
selected, the batch file will be analyzed and the delimiter
determined based on the frequency of that character in
the file.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 154
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Example
Administrator Manual
Batch files are .txt files that hold large quantities of information to upload to the
system. Each batch utility contains specific instructions on creating the batch file. The
following batch file standards are universal.

Fields must be enclosed in double quotes.
Example: “John”

Each field must be separated with a delimiter. Commas, colons, or tabs may
be used, however, you may not use more than one as a delimiter in a batch
file.
Example: “John”,”Smith”

Each record must be separated by a hard return.
Example: “John”,”Smith”
“Larry”,”Smith”
Each batch file should not exceed 500 records due to time out restrictions associated
with most browsers.
Using special characters
The following special characters should never be used in an attribute such as a User
Name, password, database user, Course ID, and so forth.
%&#<>=+
These characters are only safe to use when adding content into a text box, such as
adding the description for a course.
When creating attributes a good rule to follow is to only use alphanumeric characters,
underscores, dots, and dashes (do not use spaces!).
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 155
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 3—Remove Users
Overview
This chapter describes the features on the System Control Panel that are used to
remove users from the system.
In this chapter
Chapter 3—Remove Users includes the following topics.
Topic
Description
Remove Users from the System This topic covers the Remove Users from the
System page. Administrators can generate a
list of users and select users for deletion from
this page.
Batch Remove Users from the
This topic covers the Batch Remove Users from
System
the System page. Using a batch file
Administrators can remove many users from
the system.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 156
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Remove Users from the System
Overview
Find this page
Administrators remove users from the system from the Remove Users from the
System page. Removed users cannot be restored to the system. To replace a removed
user, create a new profile for the user and enroll the user in the appropriate Courses
and Organizations. A removed user that is recreated will not retain any of the settings
or data associated with the old user record.
Click Remove Users from the System from the Users section of the System Control
Panel.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 157
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Search for users
The Remove Users from the System page contains a search function at the top of the
page. The following search tabs are available on the Remove Users from the System
page:

Search: Click Last Name, User Name, or Email and enter a value. A list of
users in the course with that last name, user name or email address will
appear.

A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a last
name. A list of all users with a last name that begins with that character will
appear.

Advanced: Enter text in the Containing field to search for users that have
that text in their name or User Name. If desired, select Active within the
past . . . and enter a number to search only for users that have NOT been
active in the system for that number of days prior. The search can also be
limited based on number of courses by selecting Enrolled in . . . , selecting a
control from the drop-down list (more than or exactly) and then entering a
value in the field.

List All: Click List All to view all users in the system.
Removing users
Click the check box for each user to be removed. Type ‘Yes’ in the entry field at the
bottom of the page and click Submit. The selected users will be removed from the
system.
Note: Removing users will also remove any course or organization data associated
with the user (including grades!). If a user is created again, course and organization
data will not reappear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 158
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Batch Remove Users from the System
Overview
Large numbers of users can be removed from the system through the Batch Remove
Users from the System page. Using a batch file, users are quickly removed from the
system. Removed user records cannot be restored they must be recreated. A removed
user that is recreated will not retain any of the settings or data associated with the old
user record.
Note: If using a batch file created for a previous version of Blackboard Learning
System, verify that the fields are in the correct order for the current version.
Batch Remove Users page
Click Batch Remove Users from the System from the Users section of the System
Control Panel.
Batch Remove Users fields
The table below details the entry fields on the Batch Remove Users from the System
page.
Field
File Upload
File Location:
Delimiter Type of
Your File:
Description
Enter the location of the batch user file. Or, click Browse
to open up the file directory, then locate and select the
file. The field will populate with the path to the selected
file.
Select the delimiter option to be used on the batch user
file entered in the File Location field. If Automatic is
selected, the batch file will be analyzed and the delimiter
determined based on the frequency of that character in
the file.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 159
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Example
Administrator Manual
Batch files are .txt files that hold large quantities of information to upload to the
system. Each batch utility contains specific instructions on creating the batch file. The
following batch file standards are universal.

Fields must be enclosed in double quotes.
Example: “John”

Each field must be separated with a delimiter. Commas, colons, or tabs may
be used, however, you may not use more than one as a delimiter in a batch
file.
Example: “John”,”Smith”

Each record must be separated by a hard return.
Example: “John”,”Smith”
“Larry”,”Smith”
Each batch file should not exceed 500 records due to time out restrictions associated
with most browsers.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 160
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 4—Observers
Overview
This chapter details the features used to manage Observers.
In this chapter
Chapter 4—Observers includes the following topics.
Topic
Observer Management
List/Modify Observers
Add User to Observer
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Observer Management
page. This menu page links to the List/Modify
Observers page.
This topic covers the List/Modify Observers
page. Observers in the system can be shown
on this page with a link to associate that
Observer with a user.
This topic covers the Add User to Observer
page. Adding a user to an Observer allows the
Observer to view the same content as the user.
Page 161
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Observer Management
Overview
Find this page
Functions
Observers are user roles that are attached to other users. Observers can view the
same content as a user but cannot modify or interact with content intended for the
observed user. The Observer role can be used to let parents of a Student or an
academic advisor monitor progress. Each Observer can only be assigned to one user
but that Observer can view each of the users courses. The Instructor for each course
can limit what Observers can see.
Click Observer Management from the Users section of the System Control Panel.
List/Modify Observers is the only function available from the Observer Management
page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 162
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
List/Modify Observers
Overview
Observers in the system can be viewed and linked or unlinked from a user from the
List/Modify Observers page. When an Observer is linked to a user, they may see the
same views and access the same content as the user, but they cannot interact with
the system as the user.
Users must have their Administrative User Role set to Observer to appear in the list of
available Observers. Be aware that Observers are not able to enroll in courses as
Students.
Note: The Observer-user relationship is a one-to-one relationship. Users can only
have one Observer assigned to them and Observers can only watch one user.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the List/Modify Observers page.
Step 1
Click Observer Management from the Users section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click List/Modify Observers from the Observer Management page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 163
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Search for users
The List/Modify Observers page contains a search function at the top of the page. The
following search tabs are available on the List/Modify Observers page:
Functions

Search: Click Last Name, User Name, or Email and enter a value. A list of
users in the course with that last name, user name or email address will
appear.

A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a last
name. A list of all users with a last name that begins with that character will
appear.

Advanced: Enter text in the Containing field to search for users that have
that text in their name or User Name. If desired, select Active within the
past . . . and enter a number to search only for users that have NOT been
active in the system for that number of days prior. The search can also be
limited based on number of courses by selecting Enrolled in . . . , selecting a
control from the drop-down list (more than or exactly) and then entering a
value in the field.

List All: Click List All to view all users in the system.
The table below details the functions available from the List/Modify Observer page.
To . . .
link an Observer
to a user
remove a link
between an
Observer and a
User
email an Observer
click . . .
Add User to Observer. The Add User to Observer page will
appear.
Remove User from Observer. The Observer will no longer
be able to track the progress of the user. The Observer is
free to be attached to another user.
on the Observer’s email address to open the browser’s
default email program with the user’s email address already
populated in the appropriate field.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 164
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add User to Observer
Overview
Find this page
Users are linked to Observers from the Add User to Observer page. An Observer may
only be linked to one user. If an Observer is already assigned to a user, remove that
link before trying to link the Observer to another user.
Follow the steps below to open the Add User to Observer page.
Step 1
Click Observer Management from the Users section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click List/Modify Observers from the Observer Management page.
Step 3
Perform a search for Observers.
Step 4
Click Add User to Observer for an Observer.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 165
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Search for users
The Add User to Observer page contains a search function at the top of the page. The
following search tabs are available on the Add User to Observer page:
Functions

Search: Click Last Name, User Name, or Email and enter a value. A list of
users in the course with that last name, user name or email address will
appear.

A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a last
name. A list of all users with a last name that begins with that character will
appear.

Advanced: Enter text in the Containing field to search for users that have
that text in their name or User Name. If desired, select Active within the
past . . . and enter a number to search only for users that have NOT been
active in the system for that number of days prior. The search can also be
limited based on number of courses by selecting Enrolled in . . . , selecting a
control from the drop-down list (more than or exactly) and then entering a
value in the field.

List All: Click List All to view all users in the system.
The table below details the functions available from the Add User to Observer page.
To . . .
link an Observer
to a user
email an Observer
edit the profile of
a User
click . . .
Observe. The user selected will now be linked to the
Observer.
on their email address to open the default email program
with the user’s email address already populated in the
appropriate field.
Properties. The Properties: User page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 166
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Part 3—Portal Areas
Overview
In this part
The Portal Areas section of the System Control Panel manages all aspects of the
portal. The portal consists of the tabs appearing in the header frame that link to the
common areas and the modules, links, images, and tools that make up the content of
those common areas.
This part of the Blackboard Academic Suite Administrator Manual includes the
following chapters.
Chapter
Manage Tabs
Manage Modules
Manage Channels
Manage Tool Panel
System Settings
Description
This chapter details the tools for administering
portal tabs, also called common areas.
This chapter details the tools for administering
modules.
This chapter details the tools for administering
channels of content for modules.
This chapter details the features for administering
the Tool Panel.
This chapter details some of the settings for
controlling the portal.
Common areas
The Blackboard Learning System and Blackboard Learning System – Basic Edition
include basic common areas. The Blackboard Portal System includes basic common
areas, advanced common areas, and tools for building common areas for specific sets
of users.
Blackboard Learning System includes several common areas as part of the portal. The
basic common areas included with Blackboard Learning System are:

My Institution: This tab acts as a gateway to the portal and provides users
with content from within and outside the Blackboard Learning System
environment.

Courses: An online area dedicated to learning. From this tab, users access the
Web sites for their courses.

Academic Web Resources: Links to the Blackboard Academic Web Resources
Web site. By default this tab is disabled.

System Admin: Only accessible by users with Administrator privileges.
The Blackboard Portal System also includes advanced common areas and the ability to
create new common areas. The advanced common areas and common area templates
are:

Community: An online area dedicated to clubs, organizations, and other
extracurricular activities.

Services: Typically used to connect users to other institutional offerings.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 167
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual

The Web: A tab that can be set to access a URL and display the content within
the tab. By default this tab is disabled.

Module common area: Administrators can create additional common areas that
include modules similar to the My Institution common area.

Tool common area: Administrators can create additional common areas that
point to a tool within the Blackboard Learning System.

Link common area: Administrators can create additional common areas that
point to a URL.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 168
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 1—Manage Tabs
Overview
This chapter covers the features that control the availability and the content of the
common areas. While the term “common area” refers to the content and the term
“tab” refers to the navigation item that opens the content area, these terms are often
used interchangeably.
Note: Most of the Portal management features listed in this chapter are only available
when licensing the Blackboard Portal System.
In this chapter
This chapter includes the following topics.
Topic
Manage Tabs
Add Module Tab
Add Tool Tab
Add Link Tab
Tab Properties
Modify Tab
Left Side Tool Panel
Properties
Manage Links (OffCampus) Content
Add/Modify an OffCampus Content Link
Content Metadata
Manage Sponsorship
Content
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Manage Tabs page. This
page lists all the common areas in the system
and includes features for modifying content and
making common areas available.
This topic covers the Add Module Tab page.
Administrators can add a custom module tab
from this page.
This topic covers the Add Tool Tab page.
Administrators can add a custom tool tab from
this page.
This topic covers the Add Link Tab.
Administrators can add a custom Link tab from
this page.
This topic covers the Tab Properties page. This
page includes controls for the name and
availability of each common area.
This topic covers the Modify Tab page. This
menu page includes links to manage the content
on the left side of tabs (except for tool and
module tabs). For specific tabs this page may
include links to additional features.
This topic covers the Left Side Tool Panel
Properties page. This page controls the names
and availability of the sections that appear on
the left side of some common areas.
This topic covers the Manage Links Content or
Manage Off-Campus Content Links page. This
page is named differently for each common
area. Administrators can control the links that
appear on the links section of the left side of a
common area from this page.
This topic covers the Add and Modify Link
pages. From these pages Administrators can
add or change a link that appears on the left
side of a content area.
This topic covers the Content Metadata page.
Metadata can be added to a link.
This topic covers the Manage Sponsorship
Content page. Administrators can add images to
the left side of a common area from this page.
Page 169
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Default Content
Default Layout
Preview By Portal Role
Services
Add/Modify Services
Folder
Add Services Link
Administrator Manual
This topic covers the Default Content page.
Administrators can define which modules may
appear and which modules are required to
appear on the common area. This page is only
available for the My Institution common area or
custom module areas.
This topic covers the Default Layout page.
Administrators define the color scheme for the
modules on the common area as well as the
default position of each module.
This topic covers the Preview By Portal Role
page. This page displays what a common area
will look like to users with the selected Portal
Role.
This topic covers the Services page. This page
contains the folders and Services links that
make up the Services common area.
This topic covers the Add and Modify Services
Folder pages. Administrators can create or
change a folder for the Services common area
from this page.
This topic covers the Add Services Link page.
From this page Administrators can add links to
the Services common area.
Modifying each common area
Each common area includes the following features on its Modify Tab page.
My Institution common area and Module Tabs created by the Administrator:

Tab Properties

Default Content

Default Layout

Preview By Portal Role

Left Side Tool Panel Properties

Manage Links Content

Manage Sponsorship Content
Courses Tab:

Tab Properties

Left Side Tool Panel Properties

Manage Off-Campus Learning Content

Manage Sponsorship Content
Community Tab:

Tab Properties

Left Side Tool Panel Properties

Manage Off-Campus Community Content

Manage Sponsorship Content
Services Tab:

Tab Properties

Services

Left Side Tool Panel Properties

Manage Off-Campus Services Content

Manage Sponsorship Content
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 170
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Tool tabs and Link tabs do not have space in the common area for additional content.
When modifying a Tool tab or a Link tab the Tab Properties page includes all the
configuration options.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 171
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Tabs
Overview
The common areas are organized through the Manage Tabs page. Tabs appear in the
header frame of the user interface and are used to navigate to the common areas.
Common areas contain links to courses and organizations, modules of content, user
tools, and external links to additional services and content.
Privileges can be applied to each Portal Role so that, for example, users with a system
role of Alumni could have access to a completely different set of common areas than
users with a system role of Staff or Faculty.
Note: The advanced features on this page, such as adding a Tab, are only available to
those users that license the Blackboard Portal System.
Find this page
Functions
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System Control Panel.
The table below details the functions available on the Manage Tabs page.
To . . .
change the order
that tabs appear
(from left to right
in the header
frame)
add a Module Tab
add a Tool Tab
add a Link Tab
modify a tab
click . . .
The drop-down arrow next to a tab in the list. From the
drop-down list, select a number. The tab will appear in that
position.
Module Tab in the action bar. The Add Module Tab page
will appear.
Tool Tab in the action bar. The Add Tool Tab page will
appear.
Link Tab in the action bar. The Add Link Tab page will
appear.
Modify for a tab in the list. For the My Institution, Courses,
Community, Services tab, and any Module tabs created by
the Administrator, a Modify Tab: Tab page will appear. For
all other tabs, clicking Modify will immediately open the
Tab Properties page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 172
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
remove a tab
preview a tab
based on user role
Administrator Manual
Remove for a tab in the list. Removing a tab cannot be
undone; the tab must be re-created. To prevent users from
accessing a particular tab, modify the Portal Roles that have
privileges to view the tab from the Tab Properties page.
The drop-down arrow and select a Portal Role from the list
in the action bar. Click Preview and a new browser window
will open with the tabs as those users will see them.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 173
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Module Tab
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Module tabs contain distinct packets of information with data generated from within
Blackboard Academic Suite and from outside sources. Module tabs added by the
Administrator function much the same way as the My Institution tab—including
allowing access to the Tool Panel. Multiple module tabs can be created with content for
specific Portal Roles.
Follow the steps below to open the Add Module Tab page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Module Tab in the action bar at the top of the Manage Tabs
page.
The table below details the fields on the Add Module Tab page.
Field
Description
Enter Tab Information
Title: [r]
Enter a title for the Module tab. The title will appear as the
Tab name in the header frame.
Personalizable:
Select either the Yes option or the No option. If Yes is
selected, Users will be able to organize the modules on the
common area as well as customize the appearance of the
modules.
Availability
System
Select either the Yes option or the No option. If No is
Availability:
selected, the tab will not be viewable by users until it is set
to Yes.
Available to
Select Everyone or Specific Roles. If Specific Roles is
specific portal
selected click the check boxes to determine which Portal
roles:
Roles have privileges to view the tab.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 174
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Tool Tab
Overview
Find this page
Tool tabs give access to a specific tool within Blackboard Academic Suite. Multiple tool
tabs can be created to allow specific Portal Roles access to specific tools. For example,
users with a Portal Role of Student could be given access to a common area that
displayed the My Grades tool. This common area would most likely not be made
available to users with a Portal Role of Alumni.
Follow these steps to open the Add Tool Tab page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Tool Tab in the action bar at the top of the Manage Tabs page.
The table below details the entry fields on the Add Tool Tab page.
Field
Description
Enter Tab Information
Title:[r]
Enter a title for the Tool tab. The title will appear as the Tab
name in the header frame.
Tool:[r]
Select a Tool from the drop-down list. The tool selected will
be available through the tab.
Availability
System
Select either the Yes option or the No option. If No is
Availability:
selected, the tab will not be viewable by users until it is set
to Yes.
Available to
Select Everyone or Specific Roles. If Specific Roles is
specific portal
selected click the check boxes to determine which Portal
roles:
Roles have privileges to view the tab.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 175
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Link Tab
Overview
Find this page
Link tabs display content from an outside Web page in a Blackboard Portal System tab.
Link tabs can give direct access to other institutional Web sites for specific Portal Roles
or allow users to access the Web site of an education partner.
Follow these steps to open the Add Link Tab page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Link Tab in the action bar at the top of the Manage Tabs page.
The table below details the entry fields on the Add Link Tab page.
Field
Description
Enter Tab Information
Title:[r]
Enter a title for the Link tab. The title will appear as the Tab
name in the header frame.
External Link:[r] Enter the full URL for a Web page (Example:
http://www.blackboard.com). The Web page will be
accessible through the tab.
Availability
System
Select either the Yes option or the No option. If No is
Availability:
selected, the tab will not be viewable by users until it is set
to Yes.
Available to
Select Everyone or Specific Roles. If Specific Roles is
specific portal
selected click the check boxes to determine which Portal
roles:
Roles have privileges to view the tab.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 176
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Tab Properties
Overview
Find this page
The Tab Properties page is similar for each Tab. From this page, the name of the tab
can be changed, and the Portal Roles that can access the Tab are defined. Some tabs
have additional properties that can be configured; these are discussed in the table
below.
Follow these steps to open the Tab Properties page for a specific tab.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Modify for a tab. If a menu appears, click Tab Properties.
The table below details the entry fields on the Tab Properties page.
Field
Description
Enter Tab Information
Title: [r]
The title of the tab can be changed by editing the text that
appears in this field. The title will appear as the Tab name in
the header frame.
URL/Tool:
If the tab is a Tool tab, this field will be display only and will
list the tool accessible through the tab. If the tab is a Link
tab, change the URL by editing the URL as it appears in the
field.
Personalizable:
This field only appears when changing the properties for the
My Institution Tab or a Module tab created by the
Administrator. Selecting Yes allows users to organize the
modules on the tab and customize the appearance of the
modules.
Availability
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 177
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
System
Availability:
Available to
specific portal
roles:
Administrator Manual
Select either the Yes option or the No option. If No is
selected, the tab will not be viewable by users until it is set
to Yes.
Note that Sys Admin tab access is restricted by the
Administrative Role of each user. It cannot be made
available based on Portal Role. Also, the only change that
can be made to the Sys Admin tab is the name. (The Sys
Admin tab cannot be set to display a tool or modules.)
Select Everyone or Specific Roles. If Specific Roles is
selected click the check boxes to determine which Portal
Roles have privileges to view the tab.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 178
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Modify Tab
Overview
Find this page
The Modify Tab: Tab menu page appears when changing the following tabs: My
Institution, Courses, Community, Services, or a module tab created by the
Administrator. The functions available for each tab are listed below under the
Functions heading.
Follow these steps to open the Modify Tab page for a specific tab.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify for one of the following tabs: My Institution, Courses,
Communities, Services, or any module tab created by the
Administrator.
Step 3
The Modify Tab: Tab page will appear. The functions on this page will
differ depending on the Tab selected.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 179
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Menu pages
Administrator Manual
Menus appear for the common areas as listed below:
My Institution common area and Module Tabs created by the Administrator:

Tab Properties

Default Content

Default Layout

Preview By Portal Role

Left Side Tool Panel Properties

Manage Links Content

Manage Sponsorship Content
Courses Tab:

Tab Properties

Left Side Tool Panel Properties

Manage Off-Campus Learning Content

Manage Sponsorship Content
Community Tab:

Tab Properties

Left Side Tool Panel Properties

Manage Off-Campus Community Content

Manage Sponsorship Content
Services Tab:

Tab Properties

Services

Left Side Tool Panel Properties

Manage Off-Campus Services Content

Manage Sponsorship Content
Tool tabs and Link tabs do not have space in the common area for additional content.
When modifying a Tool tab or a Link tab the Tab Properties page includes all the
configuration options.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 180
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Left Side Tool Panel Properties
Overview
Find this page
The Left Side Tool Panel appears on the My Institution Tab, Courses Tab, Community
Tab, Services Tab, and any module tabs. From the Left Side Tool Panel Properties
page, the name and availability of different features can be configured. The following
features can appear on the left side of the common area:

Tools: Blackboard Tools that are organized through the Tool Panel.

Links: Links that are managed through the Manage Link Content page or the
Manage Off-Campus Content page.

Sponsors: Images and links that are managed through the Manage
Sponsorship Content page.
Follow these steps to find the Left Side Tool Panel Properties page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify for one of the following tabs: My Institution, Courses,
Communities, Services, or any module tab created by the
Administrator. The Modify Tab: Tab page will appear. The functions on
this page will differ depending on the Tab selected.
Step 3
Click Left Side Tool Panel Properties.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 181
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Left Side Tool Panel Properties page.
Field
Description
Enter Toolbar Properties
Tools Available:
Select Yes or No. If Yes is selected, the Tool Panel will be
available.
Tools Label:
Edit the name of the Tool Panel. The name will appear on
the tab as it is entered in this field.
Links Available:
Select Yes or No. If Yes is selected, the Off-Campus Links
area will be available.
Links Label:
Edit the name of the Off-Campus Links area. The name will
appear on the tab as it is entered in this field.
Sponsors
Select Yes or No. If Yes is selected, the Sponsors area will
Available:
be available.
Sponsors Label:
Edit the name of the Sponsors area. The name will appear
on the tab as it is entered in this field.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 182
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Links (Off-Campus Learning) Content
Overview
Find this page
Functions
The Links that appear on the left side of the common area are managed from the
Manage Links Content page. For some tabs, the page is called Manage Off Campus
Learning Content, although the names are different, the pages serve the same
function.
Follow these steps to open a Manage Off-Campus Learning Content page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify for one of the following tabs: Courses, Communities,
Services, or any module tab created by the Administrator. The Modify
Tab: Tab page will appear. The functions on this page will differ
depending on the Tab selected.
Step 3
Click Manage Off Campus Tab Content from the Modify Tab: Tab
page (or Manage Links Content from the Modify Tab: My Institution
page and Modify Tab: Module Tab page).
The table below details the functions available on the Manage Off-Campus Learning
Content page.
To . . .
add a link
modify a link
remove a link
change the
placement of a
link
click . . .
External Link in the action bar. The Add Link page will
appear.
Modify for a link in the list. The Modify Link page will
appear.
Remove for a link in the list. This action is irreversible.
The drop-down arrow next to a link in the list. Select the
numbered position that the link should appear in sequence
with the other links.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 183
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
add or change the
metadata
associated with
the link
Administrator Manual
Describe. The Content Metadata page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 184
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add/Modify an Off-Campus Content Link
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Links for the Off-Campus Links area of the Tool Panel are added and modified from the
Add/Modify an Off Campus Content Link page view. Links can access educational
partners, research tools, or any Web page relevant to the institution.
Follow these steps to open the Add/Modify Links page an page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify for one of the following tabs: My Institution, Courses,
Communities, Services, or any module tab created by the
Administrator. The Modify Tab: Tab page will appear. The functions on
this page will differ depending on the Tab selected.
Step 3
Click Manage Off Campus Tab Content from the Modify Tab: Tab
page (or Manage Links Content from the Modify Tab: My Institution
page). The Manage Off-Campus Tab Content (or Manage Links
Content) page will appear.
Step 4
Click Add URL or Modify for an existing URL. A page view will appear
with fields for creating a link or modifying an existing one.
The table below details the entry fields on the Add/Modify Link page view.
Field
URL Information
Name:
URL:
Description
Enter a name for the link. The name will appear in the OffCampus Links box.
Enter the URL for the link. When entering a URL, do so as
http://www.blackboard.com, not www.blackboard.com or
blackboard.com.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 185
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Description:
Administrator Manual
Enter a description of the link. The description will appear
below the link name in the partnerships box. Select a text
type for the description from the following options:

Options
Do you want to
make the URL
visible?
Launch in
External
Window
Choose date
restrictions


Smart Text: Automatically recognizes a link entered
in the text box. Smart text recognizes the ENTER
key as a paragraph tag and accepts HTML tags as
well.
Plain text: Displays text as written.
HTML: Displays text as coded using HTML tags.
Click Yes or No to set the availability of the link. Links that
are not visible must be modified and switched to visible for
users to view the link in the Off-Campus links box.
Click Yes or No to determine if the link opens the Web site
in an external browser window.
Check Display After and Display Until then select the
range of dates that the folder will appear. Select dates using
the drop-down lists or click on the icon for a calendar
interface.
To display the folder from a date forward, check Display
After and select a date but do not check Display Until. To
display the folder from the current date until a future date,
check Display Until and select a date but do not check
Display After.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 186
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Sponsorship Content
Overview
Find this page
Sponsorship Content can be used to display advertisements or other images relevant
to the institution. Sponsor images appear below the Off-Campus Links in the Tool
Panel on portal tabs. Sponsor images can be uploaded by the Administrator or the
Outsourced HTML Code option can be used to import outside sponsor images and
information.
Follow these steps to open a Manage Sponsorship Content page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify for one of the following tabs: My Institution, Courses,
Communities, Services, or any module tab created by the
Administrator. The Modify Tab: Tab page will appear. The functions on
this page will differ depending on the Tab selected.
Step 3
Click Manage Sponsorship Content from the Modify Tab: Tab page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 187
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Manage Sponsorship Content page.
Field
Description
Designate Primary Sponsorship Content
None
Click this option to leave the primary sponsorship on the left
side of the common area blank.
Local Image and Click this option to add a local image as the primary sponsor
Link
image.
Enter a file name or click Browse to search for an image
file. This image will appear as the primary sponsor if the
Local Image and Link option is clicked.
Enter a URL. The URL will open in a separate browser when
the image is clicked. When entering a URL, be sure to enter
the URL completely, for example,
http://www.blackboard.com and not www.blackboard.com
or blackboard.com.
Outsourced
Sometimes when using an ad server the company running
HTML Code
the ad server will provide HTML code to serve the ad. Post
that HTML code in this box to display the ads.
Designate Secondary Sponsorship Content
None
Click this option to leave the secondary sponsorship on the
left side of the common area blank.
Local Image and Click this option to add a local image as the secondary
Link
sponsor image.
Enter a file name or click Browse to search for an image
file. This image will appear as the secondary sponsor if the
Local Image and Link option is clicked.
Outsourced
HTML Code
Enter a URL. The URL will open in a separate browser when
the image is clicked. When entering a URL, be sure to enter
the URL completely, for example,
http://www.blackboard.com and not www.blackboard.com
or blackboard.com.
Sometimes when using an ad server the company running
the ad server will provide HTML code to serve the ad. Post
that HTML code in this box to display the ads.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 188
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Default Content
Overview
Find this page
Modules are included and required on the My Institution or other Module common
areas from the Default Content page. The modules are listed with check boxes in two
columns: DISPLAYED and REQUIRED. Displayed modules will be available to users and
required modules will always appear to users. With displayed modules users can
determine whether or not the module appears on their individual view of the common
area. Required modules will always appear to all users with a Portal Role that can view
the common area.
Follow these steps to open the Default Content page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify for the My Institution tab or a module tab created by the
Administrator.
Step 3
Click Default Content from the Modify Tab: My Institution page.
Step 4
The Default Content page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 189
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the functions available on the Default Content page.
To . . .
click . . .
assign a module to the check box in the DISPLAYED column for modules that
appear on the tab should appear on the common area. A check mark in the
box indicates that the module will appear on the common
area. Click the check box again to remove a module from
the common area.
require a module
the check box in the REQUIRED column for modules that
to appear on the
should appear on the common area. A check mark in the
tab
box indicates that the module will always appear on the
common area. Click the check box again to set modules to
not required.
organize module
Default Layout in the instructions at the top of the page.
placement and
The Default Layout page will appear.
appearance on the
tab
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 190
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Default Layout
Overview
Find this page
The appearance and organization of modules on a common area is configured from the
Default Layout page. The Administrator can create additional module themes to
change the appearance of modules from the Customize Module Theme page.
Follow these steps to open the Default Layout page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify for the My Institution tab or a Module Tab created by the
Administrator.
Step 3
Click Default Layout from the Modify Tab: My Institution page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 191
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Default Layout page.
Field
Description
Customize Page Layout
Left Panel:
The list contains all the modules that will appear in the left
column of modules on the common area. Re-order the tabs
by selecting one and clicking the up arrow or down arrow
to change its position. To move a tab to the Right Panel,
click the right arrow. To remove a module from the Left
Panel, click the X.
Right Panel:
The list contains all the modules that will appear in the right
column of modules on the Tab. Re-order the tabs by
selecting one and clicking the up arrow or down arrow to
change its position. To move a tab to the Left Panel, click
the left arrow. To remove a module from the Right Panel,
click the X.
Customize Theme
Select one of the themes for displaying modules on the common area. Additional
themes can be created through the Customize Module Theme feature.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 192
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Preview By Portal Role
Overview
Find this page
Functions
Administrators can test how a common area appears for specific Portal Roles from the
Preview by Portal Role page. When a role is selected, the tab will appear in the page
exactly as it will appear to that role.
Follow these steps to open the Preview by Portal Role page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify for the My Institution tab or a module tab created by the
Administrator.
Step 3
Click Preview By Portal Role from the Modify Tab: My Institution
page.
Select a Portal Role from the drop-down list and click Go. The common area view for
that Portal Role will appear on the page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 193
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Services
Overview
Find this page
Functions
The Services tab displays links. Most often, these links point to other services offered
at the institution. Service Links can be organized into folders and subfolders to create
an outline of Services. Users can drill down through the folder to uncover additional
services.
Follow these steps to open the Services page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify for the Services tab.
Step 3
Click Services from the Modify Tab: Services page.
The table below details the functions available on the Services page.
To . . .
order the links
follow a link
add a link
modify a link
remove a link
add folder
view links and
folders within a
folder
click . . .
the drop-down arrow and select a number from the list for a
link. The links will appear in numerical order on the Services
area or within the folder. There is no limit on the number of
links that can be displayed.
the hyperlink of an external link to follow the link to a Web
site.
Add External Link in the action bar. The Services Add link
page will appear.
Modify for a particular link.
Remove for a link to permanently remove it from the
system. This action is irreversible.
Add Folder in the action bar. The Add Folder page will
appear.
the folder name. A page view will appear with all the folders
and links that appear in that folder.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 194
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
remove a folder
Modify a folder
Copy a folder
Administrator Manual
Remove for a folder to permanently remove it from the
system. This action is irreversible and will also remove any
links and folders that appear within that folder.
Modify for a folder. The Modify Folder page will appear.
Copy for a folder. The Copy Folder page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 195
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add/Modify Services Folder
Overview
Services Folders can hold links to Services and other folders.
Folders may be added or modified by accessing the Add Folder page view or Modify
Folder page view. The fields on the Add Folder page and Modify Folder page are the
same and the pages function in a similar manner. The difference being, the Add Folder
page opens with empty fields while the Modify Folder page opens with populated
fields.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Add Services Folder or Modify Services Folder page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify for the Services tab.
Step 3
Click Services from the Modify Tab: Services page.
Step 4
From the action bar, click Add Folder or click Modify for an existing
Folder.
The table below details the fields on the Add/Modify page view.
Field
Folder Information
Name:
Or, specify your own
name:
Choose color of
name:
Description
Select a folder name from the drop-down list.
Enter a name for the folder if one of the provided folder
names is not suitable.
Click Pick to select a color for the folder name display.
Blackboard Portal System allows the Administrator to
select from 216 different colors to customize the color
of the folder.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 196
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Text:
Administrator Manual
Enter a description of the folder. The following options
are available:

Smart Text: Automatically recognizes a link
entered in the text box. Smart text recognizes
the ENTER key as a paragraph tag and accepts
HTML tags as well. Smart Text will also prompt
to load images if an image source text is used
when adding smart text as part of a content
item.

Plain text: Displays text as written.

HTML: Displays text as coded using HTML tags.

√x: Opens the WebEQ Equation Editor.



Options
Do you want to make
folder visible:
Choose date
restrictions
<: Opens the MathML Equation Editor.
ABC: Opens Spell Check.
Preview: Opens the text as it will appear to the
user.
Click Yes or No to indicate whether or not the folder is
to be available to users.
Check Display After and Display Until then select
the range of dates that the folder will appear. Select
dates using the drop-down lists or click on the icon for
a calendar interface.
To display the folder from a date forward, check
Display After and select a date but do not check
Display Until. To display the folder from the current
date until a future date, check Display Until and
select a date but do not check Display After.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 197
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Services Link
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Links are added to the Services common area from the Services-Add Link page view.
Links may appear directly on the common area or within a folder.
Follow these steps to open the Add or Modify Services Link page view.
Step 1
Click Manage Tabs from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify for the Services tab.
Step 3
Click Services from the Modify Tab: Services page.
Step 4
From the action bar, click Link. Or click Modify for a link that already
exists.
The table below details the fields on the Add Services Link page view.
Field
URL Information
Link Name:
URL:
Description:
Options
Description
Enter a name for the link.
Enter a URL for the link. Enter the full URL, for example
http://www.blackboard.com, not www.blackboard.com or
blackboard.com
Enter a description of the link. Select a text type for the
description from the following options:

Smart Text: Automatically recognizes a link entered
in the text box. Smart text recognizes the ENTER
key as a paragraph tag and accepts HTML tags as
well.

Plain Text: Displays text as written

HTML: Displays text as coded using HTML tags
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 198
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Do you want to
make the URL
visible?
Launch item in
external window
Choose data
restrictions
Administrator Manual
Click Yes to display the URL as part of the link. The URL will
appear after the link name.
Click Yes or No to open the link in an external window.
Check Display After and Display Until then select the
range of dates that the folder will appear. Select dates using
the drop-down lists or click on the icon for a calendar
interface.
To display the folder from a date forward, check Display
After and select a date but do not check Display Until. To
display the folder from the current date until a future date,
check Display Until and select a date but do not check
Display After.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 199
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 2—Manage Modules
Overview
This chapter describes the features for managing and creating portal modules.
In this chapter
Chapter 2—Manage Modules includes the following topics.
Topic
Description
Manage Modules
This topic covers the Manage Modules page.
Administrators create, modify, and determine
the availability of modules from this page.
Create a New Module
This topic covers the procedure for creating a
new module.
Create/Edit Module
This topic covers the Create Module and Edit
Module pages. These pages are used to create
a module and define its settings.
Login Module
This topic explains the Login Module.
Module Contents: Login Module This topic covers the Module Contents: Login
Module page. This page is used to build the
Login module content.
Module Contents: Channel
This topic covers the Module Contents: Channel
Module
Module page. This page is used to build the
module content.
Module Contents: HTML Module This topic covers the Module Contents: HTML
Module page. This page is used to build the
module content.
Module Contents: URL Module
This topic covers the Module Contents: URL
Module page. This page is used to build the
module content.
Module Contents: Multi-Section This topic covers the Module Contents: MultiModule
Section Module page. This page is used to build
the module content.
Add/Modify Section to a MultiThis topic covers the Add and Modify Section to
Section Module
a Multi-Section Module pages. Administrators
can add or change sections of the module from
this page.
Module Contents: Opinion Poll
This topic covers the Module Contents: Opinion
Module
Poll Module page. This page is used to build the
module content.
Module Contents: Multiple
This topic covers the Module Contents: Multiple
Choice Module
Choice Module page. This page is used to build
the module content.
Module Contents: Image
This topic covers the Module Contents: Image
Module
Module page. This page is used to build the
module content.
Module Contents: External Link This topic covers the Module Contents:
Module
External Link Module page. This page is used to
build the module content.
Add/Modify Link to an External This topic covers the Add and Modify Link to an
Link Module
External Link Module pages. Administrators can
add or edit the links that appear in the module
from this page.
Export Module
This topic covers the Export Module page. This
page is used to create a System Extension of
modules that appear on the system.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 200
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Modules
Overview
Modules are packets of content that appear on the My Institution common area or
customized Module tabs created by an Administrator. From the Manage Modules page
an Administrator can add and modify modules as well as control the content of
modules.
To determine what modules will appear on a common area, use the Default Content
page for a particular content area.
Note: The advanced features on this page, such as adding a module, are only
available to those users that license the Blackboard Portal System.
Find this page
Functions
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Area section of the System Control Panel.
The following functions are available from the Manage Modules page.
To . . .
add a module
remove a module
modify a module
customize the
content of a
module
view a module
click . . .
Module in the action bar.
Remove for a module in the list. This action cannot be
undone.
Properties for a module in the list.
Contents for a module in the list. The appropriate Modify
Module page will appear.
Preview. The module will appear as users will see it on a
common area.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 201
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Content System
If the Blackboard Content System is installed an additional set of Portal Modules will
be available. These include:








Content System: Course Content
Content System: Bookmarks
Content System: Institution Content
Content System: My Content
Content System: My Portfolios
Content System: Organization Content (This is only available with the
Blackboard Portal System)
Content System: Search Content Systems
Content System: Workflow Activities
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 202
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Create a New Module
Overview
Modules can only be created with the Blackboard Portal System license. Several
different types of modules can be created from the System Control Panel or
Administrators can use Building Blocks technology to create a completely new and
customized module and add it to the Blackboard Portal System. Once modules are
created they can be set to appear on the My Institution common area or any other
common area that accepts modules.
To create a module using Building Blocks technology, please refer to the Blackboard
Building Blocks Module Developer’s Guide or the Building Blocks Web site
(http://buildingblocks.blackboard.com).
Create a module
Follow the steps below to create a module from the System Control Panel.
Step 1
Plan the module! Decide the type of module you want to create and
what content will be contained in the module, what Portal Roles
should have access to the module, and who should manage the
content of the module.
Step 2
Go to the System Admin Tab.
Step 3
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 4
Click Add Module in the action bar at the top of the page.
Step 5
Enter a title, module type and description.
Step 6
Select a setting for System Availability (is the module available
system-wide?), Select from module list (does the module appear to
Users as a module they can add or remove from Module Tabs?), and
Allow Personalization (can Users modify the content of the
module?).
Step 7
Make the module available to Everyone or Specific Roles. If Specific
Roles is selected, select the checkbox for each Portal Role that will
have access to the module.
Step 8
Enter the User names of any Users that will be assigned to manage
the content of the module. If no Users are entered, only Users with
Administrator privileges that include managing the Portal will be able
to manage the content of the module.
Step 9
Click Submit to create the module.
Step 10
The Module Content page specific to the module type will open.
Step 11
Define the content for the module or click Submit to add the content
at another time. From the Manage Module page, click Contents for a
module to edit the content. If Users are assigned to manage the
content of a module, they can edit the content from any Module Tab
where the module appears.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 203
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Create Module/Edit Module
Overview
Modules and module properties are set and updated through the Create Module and
Edit Module pages. These pages include the same fields for configuring modules. To
modify the content of a module, click Contents for a module listed on the Manage
Modules page.
Note: After creating a module the Modify Module page appears after clicking Submit.
Module content is controlled from this page. A different page will appear depending on
the type of module created.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Create Module or Edit Module page.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Area section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Add Module from the action bar or click Properties for a
module in the list.
The following entry fields appear on the Create Module and the Edit Module page.
Field
Description
Module Properties
Title:[r]
Enter or modify a title for the module.
Module Type:[r]
Select a module type from the drop-down list. Once
selected, this field cannot be modified.
Description:
Enter or modify a description of the module. The description
will appear to users when they select modules to display on
a Tab.
Allow users to
Select Yes or No to allow Users to change the content of
Personalize the
the module. A Pencil icon will appear in the top right corner
module:
of the module. Clicking the icon takes a User to a page
where they can edit the module content.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 204
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Allow users to
detach the
module:
Availability
System
Availability:
Available for
users to select
from module
list:
Available to
specific portal
roles:
Delegated
Admins:
Administrator Manual
Select Yes or No to allow the module to be detached from
the tab by the user.
Select Yes or No to make the module available.
Select Yes or No to allow users to select module from the
module list.
Select Everyone or Specific Roles. If Specific Roles is
selected click the check boxes to determine which Portal
Roles have privileges to view the tab.
Enter the usernames for all users that should have
privileges to modify and add module content. A comma
should separate each username. The Users selected to
administer a module will see a Module Admin button on
the Tab that will allow them to modify the content of a
Module.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 205
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Login Module
Overview
Portal Direct Entry skips the Gateway and Login pages when users access the URL for
the Blackboard Academic Suite. Instead, users are shown the first portal tab. When
users access the system through Portal Direct Entry, they are considered Guests until
they log in. The Login Module is a portal module that allows users to enter a User
Name and Password to log in. This module can be placed on any Module Tab to allow
users to login to the system. For information on how to add a module to a tab, please
see Add Module Tab.
For more information on enabling Portal Direct Entry, please see the Gateway Options
topic.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Edit Module page.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Properties for the Login Module.
The table below details the entry fields on the Edit Module page.
Field
Description
Enter Tab Information
Title: [r]
The title of the Login Module can be changed by editing the
text that appears in this field. The title will appear as the
Module name in the header. The default value is “Login
Here.”
Module Type:
Login Module is automatically displayed here.
Description:
Enter a description for the Login Module. This description is
not displayed to users.
Availability
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 206
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
System
Availability:
Administrator Manual
This is set to Yes by default if Portal Direct Entry is enabled.
This option may be set to No if Portal Direct Entry is
enabled. If No is selected, the Login Module is removed
from all module pages and users must use the icon at the
top of the page to access the Login page.
The Login module cannot be enabled if Portal Direct Entry is
not enabled.
Note: This module is no longer available to users once they have logged in. Therefore,
unlike other modules, it is not possible to allow users to personalize the location and
appearance of the module.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 207
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Module Contents: Login Module
Overview
The Login Module displays to users when Portal Direct Entry is enabled. Text for the
Login Module may be added from the Module Contents: Login Module page. The text
will appear in the module along with the fields for entering a User Name and
Password.
Note: When running two or more Virtual Installations it is now possible to create a
separate Login Module for each Virtual Installation.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Login Module page:
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Contents for the Login Module.
Enter text to display to users in the Text field of the Login Module. Users may enter
HTML in this area. Users should not add <body> tags, <form> tags, or <form
element> tags; entering these tags will cause issues when the page is accessed by
end users.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 208
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Module Contents: Channel Module
Overview
Channel modules stream content from an outside source into a Blackboard Portal
System module. The module content is updated at intervals. Blackboard Portal System
provides a means for institutions to incorporate content from channel providers but
Blackboard Portal System does not provide the channels themselves.
To add a channel to Blackboard, contact a channel provider. Channels are presented to
users through Channel Modules and administered through the Manage Channels
feature.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Modify Module page for a Channel Module.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Field
Click Contents for a Channel Module that appears in the list. The
Modify Module page will appear with the Channel Module page view
loaded.
Select a channel from the drop-down list.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 209
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Module Contents: HTML Module
Overview
Find this page
HTML Modules display information according to HTML code.
Follow these steps to open the Modify Module page for a HTML module.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Field
Click Contents for an HTML Module that appears in the list. The
Customize Module page will appear with the HTML Module page view
loaded.
Enter text in the box to display in the module. If HTML is selected then the text will
display as tagged. If Plain Text is selected then the text in the module will appear
exactly as written.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 210
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Module Contents: URL Module
Overview
URL modules display Web page content from outside of the Blackboard Academic
Suite. From this page view, the URL of the Web page is entered. The content from the
URL will appear in the module. URL Modules should be tested before making them
available to ensure that the content will display correctly in a module.
URL Modules differ from External Links Modules because they display the actual
content of the URL instead of a link to the URL.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Modify Module page for a URL Module.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Contents for a URL Module that appears in the list. The Modify
Module page will appear with the URL Module page view loaded.
The table below details the entry fields on the Modify Module page for an URL Module.
Field
Description
Edit URL Information
URL:
The URL entered here indicates the Web page that will
populate inside the module. The URL should be entered
fully, for example, http://www.blackboard.com, not
blackboard.com.
Maximum Hours Select the number of hours (or days) that the Web page
Cached:
remains cached.
Refresh Cache
on Submit
Example: If set to 12 hours, the module content will be
refreshed from the URL every 12 hours.
Check this box to refresh the cache immediately after
clicking Submit. If this box is not checked, the next refresh
will occur at the next scheduled refresh interval.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 211
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Note: It is also possible to modify the refresh interval for some of the modules that
are included with the Blackboard Portal System. Also, some modules that are installed
as part of a System Extension may include the Refresh Interval setting.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 212
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Module Contents: Multi-Section Module
Overview
Find this page
A Multi-Section module splits the module into sections and displays different content in
each section. From this page view, sections can be added, modified, or removed. The
sections will appear in the module according to the sequence they are listed on this
page.
Follow these steps to open the Modify Module page for a Multi-Section module.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Functions
Click Contents for a Multi-Section module that appears in the list. The
Modify Module page will appear with the Multi-Section module page
view loaded.
The table below details the available functions on the Multi-Section module page view
of the Customize Module page.
To . . .
add a section to
the module
modify a section
of the module
remove a section
of the module
set the position of
sections in the
module
click . . .
Section in the action bar. The Add Section page view will
appear.
Modify for a section in the list. The Modify Section page
view will appear.
Remove for a section in the list. The section will be
permanently removed from the module.
a number from the drop-down list in front of a section. This
number is the position that the section will appear in
sequence with the other sections within the module.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 213
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add/Modify Section to a Multi-Section Module
Overview
Find this page
Fields
A section is an area of a Multi-Section module dedicated to a piece of content. Content
can include HTML code, links, and images. Sections are arranged and managed from
the Modify Module page loaded with a Multi-Section module.
Follow these steps to open the Add Section or Modify Section page view.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Contents for a Multi-Section module that appears in the list.
Step 3
The Modify Module page will appear with a Multi-Section module
loaded.
Step 4
Click Add Section or Modify for a section in the list.
The table below details the entry fields on the Add/Modify Section page view.
Field
Edit Module Text
Title: [r]
Display By
Default:
HTML:
Link Name:
Description
The title for the section. The title will appear at the top of
the section.
This module will automatically be displayed as the default
setting.
Text that displays according to HTML code.
Name of a link to another Web page. The name of the link
will appear in the section. Clicking on the link name in the
section will open the Web page identified in the Link URL
field.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 214
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
External Link
Image alt text:
Image Link:
ImageAlign:
Image Border
Size:
Administrator Manual
URL for the link. The URL must be entered completely. For
example, http://www.blackboard.com, not blackboard.com.
Enter the alt text that will appear to accessibility users for
the image.
Enter the URL to display an image.
Select an alignment for the image from the drop-down list.
This controls where the image will appear in the section.
The choices are left, center, and right.
Select a border size, in pixels, from the drop-down list. The
Image will appear with a border this size surrounding it.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 215
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Module Contents: Opinion Poll Module
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Opinion Polls ask a question and give users a chance to enter a full response in a text
box. The module also displays some of the recent responses to the module. The
Opinion Poll should not be used to collect information from Users that should be saved.
Opinions are added, posted to the recent responses section of the module, and
disappear as new responses are added.
Follow these steps to open the Modify Module page with an Opinion Poll loaded.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Contents for an Opinion Poll Module that appears in the list.
Step 3
The Modify Module page will appear with an Opinion Poll module
loaded.
The table below details the entry fields on the Opinion Poll Module page view of the
Modify Module page.
Field
Description
Enter Opinion Poll
Question:
Enter the question or text.
Allow Multiple
Allow users to enter multiple opinions on the matter.
Votes
Reset Existing
Remove opinions that have been entered. If Users are only
Poll:
allowed one response, Users that have already responded
will be able to respond again.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 216
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Module Contents: Multiple Choice Module
Overview
Find this page
The Multiple Choice module presents a question with multiple answers. Users will see
the question as well as options for selecting one of the answers. After users select an
answer, they will see the results of the poll to date within the module. The only way to
see the results of a poll is to vote.
Follow these steps to open the Modify Module page with a Multiple Choice module
loaded.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Contents for a Multiple Choice Poll Module that appears in the
list. The Modify Module page will appear with a Multiple Choice module
loaded.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 217
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Modify Module page with a Multiple
Choice module loaded.
Field
Description
Enter Poll Question
Question
The question as it will appear to users within the module.
Answer
Enter up to five possible answers to the poll question. The
answers will appear in the module as they appear in the
fields.
Reset Existing
Check this box to remove all votes that have been recorded.
Tally:
The tally for each option will return to 0. Users that have
already voted may vote again.
Feedback
Enter text that will appear once the users completes the
question in the module.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 218
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Module Content: Image Module
Overview
Find this page
Image modules display a graphic in the module. From this page view, the URL of the
image is entered.
Follow these steps to open the Modify Module page for an Image Module.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Contents for an Image module that appears in the list. The
Modify Module page will appear with the Image module page view
loaded.
The table below details the entry fields on the Modify Module page for an Image
Module.
Field
Edit Module Text
Image Link: [r]
Image alt text:
ImageAlign:
Image Border
Size:
Description
URL for the link. The URL must be entered completely. For
example, http://www.blackboard.com, not blackboard.com.
Enter the alt text that will appear to accessibility users for
the image.
Select an alignment for the image from the drop-down list.
This controls where the image will appear in the section.
The choices are left, center, and right.
Select a border size, in pixels, from the drop-down list. The
Image will appear with a border this size surrounding it.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 219
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Module Contents: External Link Module
Overview
Find this page
An External Link module can display several links to outside Web sites. From this page
view, links can be added, modified, or removed. The links will appear in the module
according to the sequence they are listed on this page.
Follow these steps to open the Modify Module page for an External Link module.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Functions
Click Contents for an External Links module that appears in the list.
The Modify Module page will appear with the External Link module
page view loaded.
The table below details the available functions on the Modify Module page with an
External Link module loaded.
To . . .
add a link to the
module
modify a section
of the module
remove a section
of the module
set the position of
links in the
module
click . . .
Add Link in the action bar. The Add Modify External Link
page view will appear.
Modify for a section in the list. The Modify External Link
page view will appear.
Remove for a section in the list. The link will be
permanently removed from the module.
a number from the drop-down list in front of a link. This
number is the position that the link will appear in sequence
with the other link within the module.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 220
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add/Modify Link to an External Link Module
Overview
Find this page
Fields
External Links point to outside URLs. Links are arranged and managed from the Modify
Module page loaded with an External Link module.
Follow these steps to open the Modify External Links page view.
Step 1
Click Manage Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Contents for an External Links module that appears in the list.
Step 3
The Modify Module page will appear with an External Link module
loaded.
Step 4
Click Add Link or Modify for a link in the list.
The table below details the entry fields on the Add/Modify Link page view.
Field
Edit Link
External Link:[r]
Link Name:[r]
Text Color:
Description
URL for the link. The URL must be entered completely. For
example, http://www.blackboard.com, not blackboard.com.
Name of a link to another Web page. The name of the link
will appear as entered. Clicking on the link name in the
module will open the Web page identified in the Link URL
field.
Click Pick to open the color palette. Click on a color to
select it as the text color for the links.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 221
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Export Module
Overview
Find this page
Fields
The Export Module page is used to create a System Extension of modules that can be
downloaded and applied at other institutions or on a Virtual Installation at the same
institution. When a package is created it is created with the name given in the Name
field as a .WAR file. It can then be added to another Blackboard Portal System as a
System Extension.
Click Export Modules from the Portal Areas section of the System Control Panel.
The table below details the fields on the Export Modules page.
Field
Description
Module Export Information
Name:[r]
Enter the name of the System Extension.
Description:
Enter a description of the System Extension.
Version:
Select numbers from the drop-down list to generate the
version number of the System Extension.
Company
Enter the name of the company or institution developing the
Name:[r]
System Extension.
Company URL:
Enter the URL for the company or institution developing the
System Extension. When entering a URL, be sure to enter
the URL completely, for example,
http://www.blackboard.com and not www.blackboard.com
or blackboard.com.
Company
Enter a description for the company or institution
Description:
developing the System Extension.
Choose Modules for Export
Export
Check this box for each module that will be included in the
System Extension.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 222
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Removable
Modifiable
Detachable
Administrator Manual
Check this box to allow Administrators to remove the
module from the list of available modules without removing
the System Extension (and all the other modules).
Check this box to allow users to modify the content of the
module.
Check this box if the module can be detached from a
common area and viewed in a separate window.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 223
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 3—Manage Channels
Overview
This chapter describes the features for adding and administering the channels that
supply content to Channel Modules.
In this chapter
This chapter includes the following topics.
Topic
Manage Channels
Add/Modify Channel
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Manage Channels page.
Administrators can see all the channels
supplying content to modules and select
options to control the channels.
This topic covers the Add Channel and Modify
Channel pages. These pages are used to create
or change a connection to a channel.
Page 224
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Channels
Overview
Channels bring in real-time information from outside of Blackboard Academic Suite for
display through Channel modules. News headlines, weather reports, sports scores, and
similar data are the most common data included in channels.
Blackboard Portal System only provides a means for posting channel information
through portal modules. To arrange for channel content, please contact a channel
provider.
Find this page
Functions
Click Manage Channels from the Portal Areas section of the System Control Panel.
The table below details the functions on the Manage Channels page.
To . . .
add a channel
modify a channel
remove a channel
click . . .
Channel in the action bar. The Add Channel page will
appear.
Modify for a channel in the list.
Remove for a channel in the list.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 225
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add/Modify Channel
Overview
Find this page
Enter the information for the Channel. This information can be obtained when
arranging content with a channel provider.
Step 1
Step 2
Fields
Click Manage Channels from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Click Channel from the action bar or Properties for a channel in the
list.
The table below details the entry fields on the Add Channel page and the Modify
Channel: Channel page.
Field
Edit Channel
Title:[r]
Description:
Image Source:
Image Links:
Data Source:[r]
Update
Frequency:
Last Updated:
Refresh Cache
on Submit
Description
Enter a title for the Channel.
Enter a description for the Channel.
Enter the source for an image to place in the module.
Enter the external link to the Channel.
Enter the link to the data feed, for example, a .rss file.
Select how often the Channel is updated.
The date the Channel was last updated appears.
Check this box to refresh the cache immediately after
clicking Submit. If this box is not checked, the next refresh
will occur at the next scheduled refresh interval.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 226
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 4—Manage Tool Panel
Overview
This chapter describes the features for controlling the tool panel that appears on the
left side of some common areas.
In this chapter
Chapter 4—Manage Tool Panel includes the following topics.
Topic
Manage Tool Panel
Add/Modify Tool
Add/Edit External Link
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Manage Tool Panel page.
This page lists the tools and the order in which
they appear on the Tool Panel.
This topic covers the Add Tool page and the
Modify Tool page. These pages let the
Administrator add and rename tools on the
Tool Panel.
This topic covers the Add External Link and Edit
External Link pages. Administrators can add
links to the Tool Panel or modify a link that
already appears on the Tool Panel from these
pages.
Page 227
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Tool Panel
Overview
The Tool Panel appears in the Left Side Tool Panel of common area. The left side of a
common area can also include links and sponsors. The Tool Panel can be renamed for
each common area through the Manage Tabs feature. The way tools appear within the
Tool Panel is controlled from this page. Tools will appear with the name as it appears
on this page and in order from top to bottom as shown on this page. The only
exception is that tools that are marked disabled do not appear in the Tool Panel.
Besides tools, Administrators can also display external links in the Tool Panel.
Note: The settings that are configured for Course Tools are distinct from the Tool
Panel. Changes made to the Course Tools or to the Tool Panel will not impact the
other.
Find this page
Functions
Click Manage Tool Panel from the Portal Areas section of the System Control Panel.
The table below details the functions available from the Manage Tool Panel page.
To . . .
add a tool
add an external
link
modify a tool or
link
remove a tool or
link
click . . .
Add Tool in the action bar. The Add Tool page will appear.
Add External Link in the action bar. The Add External Link
page will appear.
Modify. The Modify Tool page or the Modify External Link
page will appear.
Remove. The tool or link will no longer appear on the tool
panel.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 228
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add/Modify Tool
Overview
Find this page
Tools are added or modified to the Tool Panel from the Add Tool or Modify Tool page.
Both pages contain the same fields for adding or modifying a Tool. The settings
configured here apply only to the tool as it appears on the Tool Panel.
Follow these steps to open the Add Tool or Modify Tool page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tool Panel from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Tool from the action bar or Properties for a tool in the list.
The table below details the entry fields on the Add Tool page and the Modify Tool
page.
Field
Description
Enter Information
Title:[r]
Enter or change the title of a tool.
Tool:[r]
Select a tool from the drop-down list. This field may not be
changed once it is set. On the Modify Tool page it appears
as display only.
Available:
Select either the Yes or No option to make this tool
available to users through the Tool Panel.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 229
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add/Edit Tool Panel External Link
Overview
Find this page
Links to other Web pages can be added to the Tool Panel through the Add External
Link page. External Links that are already a part of the Tool Panel can be updated
through the Edit External Link page. Both pages contain the same fields for adding or
modifying an External Link.
Follow these steps to open the Add External Link page or Edit External Link page.
Step 1
Click Manage Tool Panel from the Portal Areas section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click External Link from the action bar or Modify for an External Link
in the list.
The table below details the entry fields on the Add External Link page and the Edit
External Link page.
Field
Description
Enter Information
Title:[r]
Enter or change the title of the link.
External Link:[r] Enter or change the URL for the link. When adding a URL,
do so as http://www.blackboard.com, not
www.blackboard.com or
blackboard.com
Available:
Select either the Yes or No option to make this link
available to users through the Tool Panel.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 230
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 5—System Settings
Overview
This chapter describes the features that control the portal settings for the system.
In this chapter
Chapter 5—System Settings includes the following topics.
Settings
Topic
Customize Top Frame
Sponsorship or Hotlinks
Manage Hot Links
Add/Modify Hot Link Tool
Add/Edit External Link
Primary Site Sponsor
Customize Module Theme
Set Frame Size
Edit Roles
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Settings page. This is a
menu page with links to the features for
managing the portal settings.
This topic covers the Customize Top Frame
page. The colors and images of the top frame
are set from this page.
This topic covers the Sponsorship or Hotlinks
page. From this page an Administrator can
select to use links on the right side of the top
frame or a sponsorship image.
This topic covers the Manage Hot Links page.
This page includes all the features necessary to
manage the Hot Links that can be set to
appear on the right side of the top frame.
This topic covers the Add and Modify Hot Link
Tool pages. Tools can be added to the right
side of the top frame as Hot Links.
This topic covers the Add and Edit External Link
pages. These pages are used to manage the
links that appear on the right side of the top
frame as Hot Links.
This topic covers the Primary Site Sponsor
page. This page includes all the features
necessary to manage the sponsorship images
that can be set to appear on the right side of
the top frame.
This topic covers the Customize Module Theme
page. Administrators can create customized
color schemes to use with any common area
that includes modules.
This topic covers the Set Frame Size page.
Administrators can define the size of the top
frame from this page.
This topic covers the Edit Roles page. The
names of the Portal Roles can be changed from
this page.
Page 231
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Settings
Overview
Find this page
Functions
System settings are functions for customizing the appearance of the top frame, the
functions available through the Gateway page, and for creating module color schemes.
Click Settings from the Portal Areas section of the System Control Panel.
The following functions are accessible through the Settings page.
To . . .
Set the
appearance of the
top frame
Set whether links
or sponsorship
images appear in
the top frame
Configure links
that will appear in
the top frame
Configure
sponsorship
images for the top
frame
Create a color
scheme and
design for
modules
Change the
amount of space
used by the top
frame
click . . .
Customize Top Frame. The Customize Top Frame page
will appear.
Sponsorships or Hotlinks. A Customize Top Frame page
will appear with options for selecting sponsorships or links.
Manage Hot Links. The Manage Hot Links page will
appear.
Primary Site Sponsor. The Primary Site Sponsor page will
appear.
Customize Module Theme. The Customize Module Theme
page will appear.
Set Frame Size. The Set Frame Size page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 232
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Edit the names of
the Portal Roles
Administrator Manual
Edit Roles. The Edit Roles page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 233
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Customize Top Frame
Overview
Find this page
The appearance and content of the top frame is configured from the Customize Top
Frame page. A primary image for the institution can be added to the top frame and
the color of the background and text can be set. Also, the shape and colors of the
navigation tabs can be changed from this page.
Follow these steps to open the Customize Top Frame page.
Step 1
Click Settings in the Portal Areas section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Customize Top Frame from the Settings page.
The table below details the fields on the Customize Top Frame page.
Field
Description
Institution Image
Current Image:
Displays the banner image that appears in the top frame.
Banner Link:[r]
Enter a URL that links to the banner image. A user clicking
on the image will access this URL. When adding a URL, do
so as http://www.blackboard.com, not www.blackboard.com
or blackboard.com
Name of Link:
Name the link to the Banner Image.
Banner Image:
Enter the path of an image file or Browse for an image file
on the system. This image will become the banner image on
the top frame. The file must be in .GIF or .JPEG format.
Institution Colors
Background
Click Pick to open the color palette. Click on a color to
Color:
select it as the background color for the top frame.
Text Color:
Click Pick to open the color palette. Click on a color to
select it as the text color for the links in the top frame.
Choosing white text will make the text stand out against
darker backgrounds.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 234
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Tabs
Tab Style:
Tab Alignment:
Select the shape of the tabs from the available options.
Select the justification of the tabs across the top frames
from the available options.
Tab Color:
Click Pick to open the color palette. Click on a color to
select it as the color for the tabs.
Tab Text Color:
Click Pick to open the color palette. Click on a color to
select it as the text color for the tabs. Choosing white text
will make the text stand out against darker colors.
Active Tab Text
Click Pick to open the color palette. Click on a color to
Color:
select it as the background color for the tab that is currently
visible.
Designate Home and Support Links and Icons
Home Link:[r]
Enter a URL that links to the Home button in the top frame.
Users clicking on the Home button will be taken to this link.
When adding a URL, do so as http://www.blackboard.com,
not www.blackboard.com or
blackboard.com
Support Link:[r]
Enter a URL that links to the Help button in the top frame.
Users clicking on the Help button will be taken to this link.
When entering a URL, be sure to enter the URL completely,
for example, http://www.blackboard.com and not
www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com.
Icon Set:
Hint: Linking the Help button to the Support section of the
Blackboard Web site will give users quick access to
discussions, FAQs, and User Manuals. The URL for the
Blackboard Support is
http://www.blackboard.com/products/services/support.htm
Click one of the options to select an icon set.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 235
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Sponsorship or Hotlinks
Overview
Find this page
The right side of the top frame can be set to display links or sponsorship images. Links
can be set to point to an external URL or to a Tool within the Blackboard Academic
Suite. Sponsorships are typically used to place advertisements but the images can be
set to display content other than sponsor information.
Follow these steps to open the Sponsorship or Hotlinks page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Portal Areas section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Click Sponsorship or Hotlinks.
Select sponsorships or links
Select what will appear in the upper right corner of the header frame. If Hot Links is
selected, the links can then be set from the Manage Hot Links page. If Image/HTML
is selected, configure the appearance of the upper right corner from the Primary Site
Sponsor page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 236
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Hot Links
Overview
Find this page
Functions
Hot Links can appear in the top right corner of the header frame. Hot Links allow
access to Tools or External Links from the header frame. Hot Links will not appear on
the header frame if the Administrator selects to display sponsorships.
Follow these steps to open the Manage Hot Links page.
Step 1
Click Settings in the Portal Areas section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Manage Hot Links from the Settings page.
The table below details the functions available from the Manage Hot Links page.
To . . .
add a Tool to the
Hot Links
add an External
Link to the Hot
links
modify a Tool or
External Link
change the
position of a Tool
or External Link
remove a Tool or
External Link from
the Hot Links
click . . .
Add Tool in the action bar. The Add Tool page will appear.
Add External Link in the action bar. The Add External Link
page will appear.
Modify. The Modify Tool page or the Modify External Link
page will appear.
the drop-down arrow next to a Tool or External Link and
select the position that the item should appear in sequence
with the other Tools and External Links.
Remove. The tool or link will no longer appear on the top
frame.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 237
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add/Modify Hot Link Tool
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Hot Link Tools are added or modified from the Add Tool or Modify Tool page. Both
pages contain the same fields for adding or modifying a Tool. The settings configured
here apply only to the Tool as it appears in the Hot Link section of the top frame. For
example, if the Calendar is added and given the name College Calendar it will still be
called Calendar on the Tools Panel.
Follow these steps to open the Add Tool page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Portal Areas section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Click Manage Hot Links from the Settings page.
Step 3
Click Tool from the action bar or Modify for a tool in the list.
The table below details the entry fields on the Add Tool page and the Modify Tool
page.
Field
Description
Enter Information
Title:[r]
Enter or change the title of a tool.
Tool:[r]
Select a tool from the drop-down list. This field may not be
changed once it is set.
Available:
Select either the Yes or No option to make this tool
available to users on the top frame.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 238
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add/Edit External Link
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Hot Link External Links are added or modified from the Add External Link or Modify
External Link page. Both pages contain the same fields for adding or modifying an
External Link. Links added here appear in the Hot Links area in the upper right corner
of the top frame.
Follow these steps to open the Add External Link or Modify External Link page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Portal Areas section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Click Manage Hot Links from the Settings page.
Step 3
Click External Link from the action bar or Modify for an External Link
in the list.
The table below details the entry fields on the Add External Link page and the Edit
External Link page.
Field
Description
Enter Information
Title:[r]
Enter or change the title of a link.
External Link:[r] Enter or change the URL for the link. The URL must be
entered fully. For example, http://www.blackboard.com, not
blackboard.com.
Available:
Select either the Yes or No option to make this link
available to users through the top frame.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 239
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Primary Site Sponsor
Overview
Find this page
The Primary Site Sponsor page defines an image that can appear on the right side of
the top frame. The right side can also be used to display links to URLs or Tools. To
switch between displaying a sponsor image and displaying links see the Sponsorship or
Hotlinks topic.
Follow these steps to open the Primary Site Sponsor page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Portal Areas section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Primary Site Sponsor from the Settings page.
The table below details the entry fields on the Primary Sponsor page.
Field
Description
Designate Primary Sponsorship Content
None
Click this option to leave the Primary Sponsorship Area
blank.
Local Image and Click this option to add a local image as the Primary Site
Link:
Sponsor image.
Upload Image:
Enter a file name or click Browse to search for an image
file. This image will appear as the Primary Site Sponsor if
the Local Image option is clicked.
Image Link:
Enter a URL. The URL will open in a separate browser when
the image is clicked. The URL must be entered fully, for
example:
http://content.blackboard.com/images/picture.jpg.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 240
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Outsourced
HTML Code:
Administrator Manual
Sometimes when using an ad server the company running
the ad server will provide HTML code to serve the ad. Post
that HTML code in this box to display the ads.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 241
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Customize Module Theme
Overview
Find this page
Module Themes determine the colors of modules as they appear on module tabs and
the My Institution common area. A Module Theme configured here will be selectable
for a tab from the Default Layout page. When a theme is applied to a common area all
the modules in that common area use the same color scheme.
Follow these steps to open the Customize Module Theme page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Portal Areas section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Customize Module Theme from the Settings page.
The table below details the fields on the Customize Module Theme page.
Field
Description
Customize Module Theme
Label:[r]
Enter a name for the module theme.
Background
Click Pick to open the color palette. Click on a color to
Color:
select it as the background color for modules.
Border Color:
Click Pick to open the color palette. Click on a color to
select it as the color for the module border.
Title Background Click Pick to open the color palette. Click on a color to
Color:
select it as the color for the background of the module title
bar.
Title Color:
Click Pick to open the color palette. Click on a color to
select it as the color for the title text of the module.
Border Size:
Select None, Thin, or Thick. The border for each module
using the theme will appear as selected.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 242
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Set Frame Size
Overview
Find this page
Administrators can set the size of the header frame as it appears on the portal and in
course Web sites. Using the smaller frame will remove any images or sponsorships
from the header frame and create more space in the main frame for content and tools.
Follow these steps to open the Set Frame Size page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Portal Areas section of the System Control
Panel. The Settings page will appear.
Step 2
Fields
Click Set Frame Size from the Settings page.
Click one of the following options to determine the size of the header frame for the
portal and for course Web sites:



Always Use Large Frame
Always Use Small Frame
Use Large Frame for Portal and Small Frame for Courses
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 243
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Edit Portal Roles
Overview
Find this page
Fields
The Edit Portal Roles page allows Administrators to change the name of the Portal
Roles that define what common areas and modules are available to users. The
Blackboard Portal System includes an additional 12 roles that can be customized by
the institution and applied to different sets of users.
Follow these steps to open the Edit Roles page.
Step 1
Click Settings from the Portal Areas section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Click Edit Roles.
Delete the default name from a field and enter a customized field. The default name
always appears to the left of each field.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 244
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Part 4—Building Blocks Management
Overview
In this part
This part of the Blackboard Academic Suite Administrator Manual details the system
administration features that appear under Building Blocks Management on the System
Control Panel.
Part 4—System Options includes the following topics
Chapter
System Extensions
Reports
System Information
Logs
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This chapter includes information on installing
and managing System Extensions.
This chapter includes information on system
reporting including the Advanced System
Reporting features.
This chapter includes information on viewing
and updating information about the system.
This chapter includes information about
viewing and managing the log files.
Page 245
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 1—System Extensions
Overview
This chapter reviews the features for installing and managing System Extensions from
the System Control Panel. System Extensions are an easy and secure way to extend
the Blackboard Academic Suite. Just a few of the ways System Extensions can be used
are: custom portal modules, new content tools, and new user tools.
System Extensions must be created by the institution or downloaded before they can
be installed. To download a System Extension contact the vendor or visit the
Blackboard Building Blocks catalog on the Web at
http://buildingblocks.blackboard.com.
In this chapter
This chapter includes the following topics.
Topic
Installing and Uninstalling
System Extensions
Manage System Extensions
Examine System Extension
Download System Extensions
Install System Extension
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic has step by step instructions for
installing and uninstalling System Extensions.
This topic covers the Manage System
Extensions page. Administrators view and
control the System Extensions on the system
from this page.
This topic covers the Examine System
Extension page. This page describes the
System Extension and its components.
This topic covers the Download System
Extensions page. This page links Administrators
to the Blackboard Building Blocks catalog.
This topic covers the Install System Extension
page. Administrators install downloaded
System Extensions from this page.
Page 246
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Installing and Uninstalling System Extensions
Overview
This topic includes step by step instructions for installing a System Extension and for
uninstalling a System Extension.
Note: System Extension vendors may occasionally update their extensions. Follow
instructions from the vendor to run an update. Be aware that an update will uninstall
the old version of the System Extension and replace it with the new version.
Step by step instructions
Follow these steps to install a System Extension.
Step 1
Click Manage System Extensions from the System Control Panel.
The Manage System Extensions page will open.
Step 2
Click Install System Extension. The Install System Extension page
will open.
Step 3
Click Browse and locate the System Extension .war file. The path to
the System Extension should appear in the field. This file may also be
a .zip file.
Note: System Extensions can be created using Building Blocks technology
or acquired from third-party vendors. Blackboard maintains a catalog of
System Extensions at http://buildingblocks.blackboard.com.
Step 4
Click Submit to upload the .war file to the Education Suite. The
System will unpackage the Building Block .war file and display a
success message when the upload is complete.
Step 5
Click OK to dismiss the message and return to the Manage System
Extensions page.
Step 6
Find the System Extension within the list of installed System
Extensions. The status of the System Extension should be Inactive.
Step 7
To enable the System Extension select Available from the drop-down
list. When the System Extension is first made available the list of
permissions required by the System Extension is displayed. This is a
security feature to protect Blackboard systems from dangerous
content. If you are concerned about the permissions given to a system
extension, contact the vendor and ask about the permissions before
changing the System Extension status from Inactive.
Step 8
Click OK to make the integration agent available and allow it the listed
permissions. The system will display a confirmation message that the
Building Block is enabled.
Step 9
Click OK to return to the Manage System Extensions page. The
System Extension should now have a status of Available.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 247
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Uninstalling a System Extension
Follow these steps to completely remove a System Extension from the Blackboard
Academic Suite.
Note: It is also able to simply disable a System Extension. Disabling will keep the
System Extension on the system but the System Extension will not be available to
users. This may be preferable to complete removal if the System Extension will be
used again in the future.
Step 1
Click Manage System Extensions from the System Control
Panel. The Manage System Extensions page will appear.
Step 2
Find the System Extension to remove from within the list of installed
System Extensions.
Step 3
Click Remove for the System Extension. A message will appear to
confirm the removal of the System Extension.
Step 4
Click OK to complete the removal of the Building Block. A success
message will be appear.
Step 5
Click OK to return to the Manage System Extensions page. The
System Extension should no longer appear on this page.
What Happens to System Extension Content?
Content Tools that are added as System Extensions allow Instructors to create
different types of content and display it to users. When these content tools are
removed or made unavailable, it restricts the ability for users to access this content.
Within a course, the links to content items created with a System Extension will not
appear to Students when the System Extension is removed or made unavailable.
Instructors will see the links to the content but will not be able to open or view the
content. The content will become available again if the System Extension is once again
made available.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 248
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage System Extensions
Overview
Find this page
Functions
System Administrators can configure or remove installed System Extensions from the
Manage System Extensions page. System Extensions are tools or content that is added
to the system through Building Blocks technology. System Extensions are available for
use with Blackboard Learning System and Blackboard Portal System.
Click Manage System Extensions from the System Options section of the System
Control Panel.
This table details the functions available on the Manage System Extensions page.
To . . .
make changes to
the System
Extension
remove the
System Extension
make the System
Extension
unavailable/
available
click . . .
Properties. The Properties page will appear. Make any
changes to the configuration of the System Extension. The
properties are specific to each System Extension and may
contain items such as license files, external resources, or
global settings. This button will only appear if the System
Extension is configurable.
Remove. This action is irreversible.
The drop-down list in the Status column and select
Inactive (installed, but not able to interact with the
Blackboard Academic Suite), Available (users have access
to the System Extension), or Unavailable (users do not
have access to the System Extension).
By default, all System Extensions are first installed as
Inactive. This is done for security reasons, a System
Extension cannot interact with the System unless activated
by the Administrator.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 249
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
examine details
about the System
Extension
download a
System Extension
install a System
Extension
Administrator Manual
View Components. The Examine System Extension page
will appear.
Download Extension. The Blackboard System Extension
Catalog will open.
Install Extension. The Install System Extension page will
appear.
System Extension status
System Extensions can have a status of:

Inactive: This is the default state. In this state the System Extension is
registered but cannot execute any code, including configuration scripts.

Available: The System Extension is available to users.

Unavailable: The System Extension is registered, can execute code, but is not
available to users.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 250
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Examine System Extension
Overview
Find this page
The Examine System Extension page displays information about the System Extension
and lists the components that make up the System Extension.
Follow these steps to open the Examine System Extension page.
Step 1
Click Manage System Extensions from the System Options section
of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click View Components for one of the System Extensions in the list.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 251
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Download System Extensions
Overview
The Download System Extensions link opens the Blackboard Building Blocks Catalog
(http://buildingblocks.blackboard.com). System Extensions can be downloaded from
the catalog to a computer and then added to Blackboard Academic Suite. Downloading
a System Extension will not install it! To install a System Extension once it has been
downloaded, use the Install Extension feature.
When downloading a System Extension, make sure that the System Extension is
designed for your version of the Blackboard Learning System.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Download System Extensions page.
Step 1
Click Manage System Extensions from the System Options section
of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Download System Extensions.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 252
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Install System Extension Page
Overview
System Administrators can install a variety of System Extensions to the Blackboard
Academic Suite from the Install System Extensions page. Before a System Extension
can be installed it must be downloaded or created.
Building Blocks can be acquired from third party vendors or through the Building
Blocks Catalog at http://buildingblocks.blackboard.com.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Install System Extension page.
Step 1
Click Manage System Extensions from the System Options section
of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Install System Extension.
Install a System Extension
The steps below detail how to install a System Extension through this page.
Step 1
Click the Browse button and select the System Extension to install.
Step 2
Click Submit.
Step 3
A message appears stating that the System Extension has been
successfully installed. After a System Extension is installed the status
of the System Extension must be changed on the Manage System
Extensions page before the System Extension can be used.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 253
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 2—Reports
Overview
This chapter describes the reporting features available to Administrators. There are
two types of reporting, Standard and Advanced. Standard System Reporting generates
a defined set of reports. Advanced System Reporting can be used to created
customized reports.
In this chapter
This chapter includes the following topics.
Topic
System Reports
Standard System Reports
View Report
Advanced System Reporting
Advanced System Reporting:
Sample Templates
Auto-Reporting Options
Send System Statistics to
Blackboard
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the System Reports page.
This is a menu page with links to the reporting
features.
This topic covers the Standard System Reports
page. Administrators input information used to
generate access reports on this page.
This topic covers the View Report page. This
page displays the results of a report generated
on the Standard System Reports page.
This topic covers the Advanced System
Reporting database and the command line
tools used to manage the data in the database.
This topic covers the Advanced System
Reporting: Sample Template page.
Administrators can download templates useful
for generating reports from the Advanced
System Reporting database.
This topic covers the Auto-Reporting Options
page. Administrators can automatically have
the system send reports on system
performance to Blackboard.
This topic covers the Send System Statistics to
Blackboard page. Administrators can use this
feature to send information about the system
to Blackboard Technical Support.
Page 254
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
System Reports
Overview
Find this page
Functions
The System Reports menu page contains links to access tools for viewing and
communicating system statistics. The Blackboard Learning System also includes
Advanced System Reporting for generating more detailed reports from a statistics
database.
Click System Reports from the System Options section of the System Control Panel.
The following functions are available from the System Reports page.
To . . .
view access
statistics for the
system
download
templates for
Advanced System
Reporting
set up the system
to automatically
send reports to
Blackboard
send a report of
system statistics
to Blackboard
click . . .
Standard System Reports. The Standard System Reports
page will open.
Advanced System Reporting: Sample Templates.
Templates for Advanced System Reporting are available
from this page.
Auto-Reporting Options. The Auto-Reporting Options
page will open.
Send System Statistics to Blackboard. The Send System
Statistics to Blackboard page will open.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 255
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Standard System Reports
Overview
Administrators track system usage through System Reports. Standard System Reports
provide information on the number of courses, users, overall usage, and cumulative
hits. Reports may also be exported and viewed as a text file or in a spreadsheet
program.
The Enable Event Tracking option must be set to Yes on the Auto-Reporting Options
page before Statistics will be recorded.
Note: When viewing reports that include hit statistics, a hit is tracked every time a
request is sent to the Blackboard Learning System. For example, a Student logs in to
Blackboard Learning System (1 hit), clicks the Courses tab (2 hits), clicks a course link
(3 hits), accesses the Communication area (4 hits), clicks Discussion Boards (5 hits),
clicks a forum (6 hits), and clicks a message to read (7 hits).
Basic users: The database only stores data for the previous 30 days to prevent
system slowdowns. Therefore, activity that occurred more than 30 days before
running the report will not be included in the report. To increase the number of days
that data is stored, please contact Blackboard Product Support.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Standard System Reports page.
Step 1
Click System Reports from the System Options section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Standard System Reports from the System Reports menu
page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 256
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Entry fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields used to filter System Reports.
Field
Select Report Filter
Select Report:
Description
Select a type of data from the drop-down list to display a
report. The options are:
Overall Summary of Usage: Displays the average
number of users, courses, and page views per
month.

User Statistics: Displays the average number of
total users, Students, and Instructors per month
and per day.

Course Statistics: Displays the average number
of active courses and organizations per month
and per day.

Site Page Views: Displays the average number of
page views and course page views per month
and per day.
Pick a start date and an end date for the range from the
drop-down lists. Dates can also be selected by clicking
the icon to bring up the calendar interface.

Time period:
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 257
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
View Report
Overview
After selecting the filters and generating a report on the Standard System Reports
page, the results are displayed on a new page. Included is a summary as well as
graphs of all the data requested through the Generate Reports page view. The report
lists the total numbers as well as the number of active Users, courses, or
organizations. Active applies to the subset of the total that have been used during the
date range. For example, the total number of Users may be 2,000, but if the date
range is only one day, perhaps only 750 Users logged in that day (considered active).
Note: When viewing reports that include hit statistics, a hit is tracked every time a
request is sent to the Blackboard Learning System. For example, a Student logs in to
Blackboard Learning System (1 hit), clicks the Courses tab (2 hits), clicks a course link
(3 hits), accesses the Communication area (4 hits), clicks Discussion Boards (5 hits),
clicks a forum (6 hits), and clicks a message to read (7 hits).
Find this page
Follow these steps to view a standard report.
Step 1
Click System Reports from the System Options section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Standard System Reports from the System Reports menu
page.
Step 3
Filter data to generate a report and click Submit.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 258
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Functions
Administrator Manual
The table below outlines the functions available when viewing a System Report.
To . . .
view a different set of
reports
print a set of reports
export a file
containing report data
click . . .
Change Filter to return to the Standard System
Reports page.
Print.
Export Data. The data file can be opened in a text
editor or a spreadsheet application.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 259
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Advanced System Reporting
Overview
Function
Advanced System Reporting enables institutions to do robust reporting in order to
understand how their system is being used. Administrators can use data from
predefined fields in a separate database dedicated to statistics to create and tailor
reports to meet their specific needs. These reports assist in understanding and
analyzing use of the system and can report information such as when different types
of users access the system, how they use the system, and if the system improves
student performance.
Data from the Blackboard Learning System is transferred nightly into a separate
reporting database. The name of the database is the name of the Virtual Installation
appended with stats. The base Virtual Installation that appears in all implementations
of the Blackboard Learning System, bb_bb60, has the stats database bb_bb60_stats
to handle Advanced System Reporting.
Administrators can schedule the data transfer so that it occurs at a low-traffic time of
the night and is properly coordinated with Snapshot loading or other integration
processes. Administrators have open access to this database so that they can use the
Crystal Reports® templates that Blackboard provides through the Advanced System
Reporting: Sample Templates page or develop reports to suit their institution’s needs.
Data
The data that is transferred to the statistics database is a sub-set of the data that is
located on the production database. It has a different schema from the data on the
production database.
Administrators have open access to the statistics database to use for analysis and
creating reports.
Installation and Setup
Advanced System Reporting is set up automatically when the Blackboard Learning
System is installed.
The Enable Event Tracking option must be set to Yes on the Auto-Reporting Options
page before Statistics will be recorded.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 260
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Purging data in the databases
Every 30 days an automatic process runs that synchronizes the data in the stats
database with the data in the main database and then deletes the statistical data from
the main database that is more than 30 days old. This process can be run at any time
using the PurgeAccumulator tool. The PurgeAccumulator tool can also be used to
delete data from the statistics database.
The PurgeAccumulator tool is installed as part of Blackboard Learning System. It is run
from the $blackboard/tools/admin directory.
Syntax:
PurgeAccumulator <command> <Virtual_Installation> <days_or_date>
Argument
<command>
Description
1. purge-live –Takes data from Blackboard
database and syncs with tables in the
statistics database. After synching, it purges
statistical data in the main database that is
older than the number of days or date set.
2. purge-stats – goes to stats DB and purges
all data older than the last x days or older
than a specific date.
<Virtual_Installation>
<days_or_date>
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Enter the name of the main database (bbuid) of
the Virtual Installation to be purged.
The number of days (from the current date) that
should not be processed by the PurgeAccumulator
tool. It is also possible to set a date in yyyy-mmdd format. Only data older than the date will be
purged.
Page 261
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Database diagram
The diagram below shows the relationships between the tables in the Advanced
System Reporting database.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 262
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Advanced System Reporting: Sample Templates
Overview
Blackboard Learning System includes a set of Advanced System Reporting templates
for use with Crystal Reports. The templates require a license for Crystal Reports from
Crystal Decisions, Inc.
Note: It is not necessary to use Crystal Reports to run Advanced System Reports
against the statistics database. Other reporting software programs may also be used.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Advanced System Reporting: Sample Templates page.
Step 1
Click System Reports from the System Options section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Advanced System Reporting: Sample Templates from the
System Reports menu page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 263
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Auto-Reporting Options
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Administrators choose whether or not to enable auto-reporting from the AutoReporting Options page. Auto-reporting sends system updates to a secure Blackboard
server automatically. Blackboard Support uses this information to assist the
Administrator in maintaining Blackboard Learning System. In addition, Administrators
can disable the event tracking that generates reports on activity in the Blackboard
Learning System from this page.
Follow these steps to open the Auto-Reporting Options page.
Step 1
Click System Reports from the System Options section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Auto-Reporting Options from the System Reports menu page.
Click Yes in the Enable Auto-Reporting field to automatically send system data
updates to a secure Blackboard Learning System server. The benefits of autoreporting are:



Assist in capacity planning with Blackboard Learning System for future growth
Notification from Blackboard Learning System when a patch or upgrade is
available
Assist system maintenance with the help of Blackboard Support staff
Note: If Auto-Reporting is disabled no data will still be sent to the Blackboard
database.
In the Enable Event Tracking field, Yes is the default selection. Select No to disable
tracking and reporting of user actions through System Reporting and Advanced
System Reporting.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 264
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Send System Statistics to Blackboard
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Administrators email system statistics to Blackboard from the Send System Statistics
to Blackboard page. Blackboard Support staff use system statistics to help
troubleshoot problems and assist institutions in planning for future development.
Follow these steps to open the Send System Statistics to Blackboard page.
Step 3
Click System Reports from the System Options section of the System
Control Panel.
Step 4
Click Send System Statistics to Blackboard from the System
Reports menu page.
The table below details the entry fields on the Send System Statistics to Blackboard
page.
Field
Description
Edit Statistics Message
To:
Displays the email address at Blackboard that will receive
system statistics. This field is display only.
From:
Displays the email address of the Administrator. This
field is display only.
Subject:
Displays a subject for the message. This field populates
with a default subject that can be changed before
sending.
Message:
Enter a message to Blackboard to send along with the
attached statistics..
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 265
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 3—System Information
Overview
This chapter details the pages that display information about the system, license, and
institution.
In this chapter
This chapter includes the following topics.
Topic
System Config Info
System Information
Registration Information
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the System Config Info page.
This menu page includes links to pages that
show information about the system.
This topic covers the System Information page.
This page lists details about licensing and the
versions of installed Blackboard Academic Suite
components.
This topic covers the Registration Information
page. Administrators can view and change
information about the institution from this
page.
Page 266
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
System Config Info
Overview
Find this page
Functions
Administrators view and update institution information through the System Config Info
page. Administrators can view the installation date and versions of Blackboard
Academic Suite components, view and change the registration data, and select a
primary support contact for Blackboard Academic Suite users.
Click System Config Info from the System Options section of the System Control
Panel.
The following functions are accessible through the System Config Info page.
To . . .
view information
about the versions
and licenses
installed
view or change
registration
information
click . . .
System Information. The System Information page will
appear.
Registration Information. The Registration Information
page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 267
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
System Information
Overview
Find this page
The System Information page displays the date Blackboard Academic Suite was
installed, the last date Blackboard Academic Suite was updated, and the current
version of installed components. This information is useful in determining if the system
is running the latest patch or upgrade release.
Follow these steps to open the System Information page.
Step 1
Click System Config Info from the System Options section of the
System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click System Information from the System Config Info page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 268
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Registration Information
Overview
Find this page
Administrators view and modify the registration information provided at installation
through the Registration Information page. Click Submit after making any changes to
send updated registration information to Blackboard.
Follow these steps to open the Registration Information page.
Step 1
Click System Config Info from the System Options section of the
System Control Panel.
Step 2
Fields
Click Registration Information from the System Config Info page.
The table below details the entry fields on the Registration Information page.
Field
Description
View/Modify Registration Information
Name:
Displays the name of the institution. Enter a new
institution name, if needed.
City:
Displays the city of the institution. Enter a new city, if
needed.
State:
Displays the state of the institution. Enter a new state, if
needed.
ZIP Code:
Displays the ZIP Code of the institution. Enter a new ZIP
Code, if needed.
Country:
Displays the country of the institution. Enter a new
country, if needed.
Institution Type:
Displays the institution type. Select a new institution type
from the list by clicking the drop-down arrow.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 269
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 4—Logs
Overview
This chapter details the features on the System Control Panel that allow Administrators
to manage the log files.
In this chapter
Chapter 4—Logs includes the following topics.
Description
This topic covers the logs page. This page is a
menu page with links to the features used to
manage logs.
Send System Logs
This topic covers the Send System Logs page.
Administrators can send an email of selected
logs.
Download Individual System
This topic covers the Download Individual
Logs
System Logs page. Selected logs can be
downloaded from this page.
Manage Log Rotation
This topic covers the Manage Log Rotation
page. Administrators can manually rotate logs
as well as determine when logs are
automatically rotated.
Log Descriptions
Lists the different system logs and describes
the information recorded in each log.
Cartridge Import Status This topic covers the Cartridge Download
Status page. Administrators can view and
manage current Course Cartridge downloads
from this page.
Course Copy Status
This topic covers the Course Copy Status page.
Administrators can view the status of courses
that have been copied from this page.
Logs
Topic
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 270
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Logs
Overview
Find this page
Functions
The Blackboard Academic Suite generates a number of logs to help system
Administrators with performance tuning, troubleshooting, and tracking. The Logs
features are a quick way to manage logs through the interface. It is also possible to
manage logs at the operating system level or through a third party tool.
Click Logs from the System Options section of the System Control Panel.
The following functions are available through the Logs page.
To . . .
email log files
download log files
configure log
rotation
check on a Course
Cartridge import
Check course copy
status
click . . .
Send System Logs. The Send System Logs page will
appear.
Download Individual System Logs. The Download
Individual System Logs page will appear.
Manage Log Rotation. The Manage Log Rotation page will
appear.
Cartridge Import Status. The Cartridge Import Status
page will appear.
Course Copy Status. The Course Copy Status page will
appear.
Blackboard Academic Suite logs
All logs are stored in the logs directory under the top-level blackboard directory.
Within the logs directory there are folders that store logs as well as an archive folder
for logs that have been compressed and stored as a means of managing the size of
the log files.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 271
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Send System Logs
Overview
Find this page
The Send System Logs feature is a quick way for an Administrator to view a log
without having to access the application file system on the Web/application server.
The logs are emailed to the Administrator from this page.
Follow these steps to open the Send System Logs page.
Step 1
Click Logs from the System Options section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Click Send System Logs.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 272
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The following table details the fields on the Send System Logs page.
Field
Recipients
To:
Description
Click this check box to send the logs to the system
Administrator.
Enter Message Details
From:
This field is display only.
Subject:
This field will automatically populate but can be changed by
the sender.
Message:
This field will populate with the name of the server. The
sender can add a message to the system Administrator
Set Message Options
Send Copy of
Click this check box to send a copy of the logs to the email
Message to self
address associated with your account.
Add Attachments
Current Log
Select the current log file or files to send to the
Files
Administrator. To select more than one log, hold down the
CTRL key. The size of each log file is displayed following the
name of the log.
Archive of Old
Select the archived log file or files to send to the
Logs
Administrator. To select more than one .ZIP package, hold
down the CTRL key. The size of each log file is displayed
following the name of the log.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 273
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Download Individual System Logs
Overview
Find this page
System Logs can be downloaded and saved to another location. Downloading a log will
not remove the log. The downloaded log is a static file, it will not be updated with
system events. System events will continue to be written to the original log.
Follow these steps to open the Download Individual System Logs.
Step 1
Click Logs from the System Options section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Click Download Individual System Logs.
Download a log
The logs that are available for download are listed as links. Logs that contain
passwords or other sensitive information are marked with a red asterisk. For most
browsers, simply clicking on the link to a log will open a download window. If it does
not download try right-clicking on a log and selecting “save target as . . .” from the
menu.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 274
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Log Rotation
Overview
The Manage Log Rotation tool creates an archive file of all logs. The entries that are
sent to the archive are set on this page. Once the logs have been rotated, the logs will
consume less space. Please note that the archive files must be moved or deleted
manually or they will remain on the Web/application server indefinitely.
Note: There is a command line tool available for manually rotating logs.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Manage Log Rotation page.
Step 1
Click Logs from the System Options section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Click Manage Log Rotation.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 275
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the fields on the Manage Log Rotation page.
Field
Description
Configure Log Rotation Behavior
Set Frequency of Select a number of days between log rotations from the
System Log
drop-down list. Logs will be rotated and archives created at
Rotation
intervals based on the number of days set.
If logs are manually rotated from the command line it will
not interrupt the regular intervals. However, the logs that
were rotated manually will not be included in the archive
files created at the regularly scheduled rotation.
Set Time of Day
for System Log
Rotation
For example, if the log rotation is set at 30 days and the
logs are manually rotated after 15 days, only the last 15
days of logs will be included in the archives at the next
scheduled log rotation.
Set the time of day that the logs will be rotated. The time is
determined based on the server clock. If the server is in a
different time zone be sure to take that into account when
selecting a time for the rotation to occur.
Manual log rotation
The RotateLogs tool processes a log rotation outside the scheduled log rotations
configured through the Manage Log Rotation page. The tool stops all necessary
services and starts the services after the rotation is finished.
Windows:
\Blackboard\tools\admin\RotateLogs.bat
UNIX:
/blackboard/tools/admin/RotateLogs.sh
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 276
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Log Descriptions
Overview
The log files that appear within the user interface are also accessible within the file
system. It should be noted that the user interface provides a more descriptive title
than the names in the file system. Also, when opening logs downloaded from the user
interface, it may be necessary to open them in Excel or a similar program—sometimes
the text runs together and individual entries are difficult to discern.
Log Descriptions
The table below lists the logs as they appear in the file system, the user interface, and
a description of each.
File System
collab-server
User Interface
DATE_Collaboration Server_BYTES
content-exchange
DATE_Content Exchange Tool_BYTES
httpd:
perlex
DATE_Perl App Server_BYTES
snapshot
system-info
DATE_System Information_BYTES
update-tools
DATE_System Update_BYTES
bb-services-log
DATE_Blackboard Services
(Daemons)_BYTES
isapi_redirect.log
jasper.log
DATE_Session Manager_BYTES
servlet.log
tomcat-jvm-stderr.txt
DATE_servlet.log_BYTES
DATE_Java App Server - stderr_BYTES
tomcat-jvm-stdout.txt
DATE_Java App Server - stdout_BYTES
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
Logs events associated
with the Collaboration
Service.
Logs events and errors
with course
import/export/archive/resto
re/copy
Logs events from the Web
server (IIS or Apache).
Logs events associated
with the Perl engine.
Logs snapshot events.
Lists hardware and
software information and
settings.
Logs events associated
with system updates.
Logs services exceptions,
including authentication
exceptions.
Logs session exceptions.
This log will include
additional events written
by the Tomcat Java App
Server if the verbosity is
set high.
Logs Java servlet events.
Logs Java App server
exceptions.
Logs Java App server
output.
Page 277
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Cartridge Import Status
Overview
Find this page
Functions
Administrators can troubleshoot Course Cartridge downloads from the Cartridge
Import Status page. Downloads that do not complete correctly can be removed from
the system or restarted.
Follow these steps to open the Cartridge Import Status page.
Step 1
Click Logs from the System Options section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Click Cartridge Import Status.
The table below details the functions available on the Cartridge Download Status page.
To . . .
Remove a
Cartridge
Download that is
in progress or has
failed to complete
Reset a download
that has failed to
complete
click . . .
Remove. Any Cartridge content that was added to the
course will be deleted.
Reset. The download will begin again.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 278
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Copy Course Status
Overview
The Copy Course Status page lists attempts to copy a course or course materials in a
table. Each attempt is a row with the following attributes (columns):



Title: Shows the destination (target) Course ID and the source Course ID
separated by a pipe (|).
Type: Course Copy is displayed.
Status: Displays the current state of the attempt. The options for this area
include Waiting, Complete and Running.
Reports may be sorted by clicking the carats at the top of each column. For example,
to sort completed copies from those that are still in process, click the carat above the
Status column.
Administrators may view details of an attempt from this page. Reports on completed
attempts may be deleted if they are no longer needed.
Note: A Status of Complete does not mean that the operation was successful; only
that it has finished. Administrators must open the Details of the Task to ensure it was
completed successfully.
Find this page
Follow these steps to locate the Copy Course Status page.
Step 1
Step 2
Click Logs from the System Control Panel.
Click Course Copy Status from the Logs page.
View a status report
Click Details to view the report of a specific copy attempt. The report will show:







Title: Target course and source course separated by a pipe delimiter
Type: The action attempted.
Status: Complete or in progress.
User: The User Name that initiated the copy operation.
Start Date: Date and time the copy operation was initiated.
End Date: Date and time the copy operation completed.
Results: Successful or unsuccessful.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 279
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Delete status reports
Mark the check box next to a report to select it for deletion. Click Delete Tasks in the
action bar to remove the selected reports from the list. Tasks are only deleted through
this option; they will not be purged after a specific amount of time.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 280
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Part 5—System Tools
Overview
In this part
Part 5—System Tools describes the tools available to Administrators to communicate
with users on the system.
This part includes the following chapters.
Chapter
System-wide Announcements
and Events
Email
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This chapter details the features for creating
and managing Announcements and Calendar
Events for all users.
This chapter details the email features that
allow the Administrator to communicate with all
users or specific sets of users.
Page 281
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 1—System-wide Announcements and Events
Overview
This chapter reviews the Announcements and Calendar features available to
Administrators. Administrators use these tools to communicate with all users on the
system.
In this chapter
Chapter 1—System-wide Announcements and Events contains the following topics.
Topic
Announcements
Add/Modify Announcements
Institution Calendar
Add/Modify Calendar Event
Calendar Quick Jump
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Announcements page.
Administrators can view Announcements from
this page as well as add Announcements or
make changes to an existing Announcement.
This topic covers the Add and Modify
Announcements pages. Announcements can be
posted for all users or existing Announcements
modified from these pages.
This topic covers the Institution Calendar page.
Administrators can view Calendar Events from
this page as well as add Calendar Events or
make changes to an existing Calendar Event.
This topic covers the Add and Modify Calendar
Event pages. Calendar Events can be posted
for all users or existing Calendar Events
modified from these pages.
This topic covers the Calendar Quick Jump
page. This page is used to navigate to a
specific date and time in the Calendar.
Page 283
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Announcements
Overview
Administrators add, modify, and delete important messages from the institution on the
Announcements page. Messages posted from the Announcements function on the
System Control Panel will appear in:

The Announcements section of every course Web site and organization Web
site

The My Announcements portal module

The Announcements tool in the portal Tool Panel
Administrators can list Announcements by post date. Click on the tabs to view
announcements for a specific period of time. The default is View Last 7 Days.
Find this page
Functions
Click Announcements from the System Tools section on the System Control Panel.
To use the functions available on the Announcements page, follow the table below.
To . . .
add an announcement
modify an
announcement
remove an
announcement
click . . .
Add Announcement. The Add Announcement page will
appear.
Modify next to a specific announcement. The Modify
Announcement page will appear.
Remove next to a specific announcement. A
confirmation window will appear. This action is
irreversible.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 284
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add/Modify Announcement
Overview
Find this page
The pages for adding and modifying an Announcement contain the same fields and
functions. The page for adding an Announcement opens with empty fields while the
page for modifying an Announcement opens with the fields populated with information
on a specific Announcement. To modify an Announcement, edit the information on the
Modify page and click Submit.
Follow these steps to open the Add Announcement or Modify Announcement page.
Step 1
Click Announcements from the System Tools section on the System
Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Add Announcement or Modify next to a specific announcement
on the Announcement page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 285
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Add Announcement or Modify
Announcement page.
Field
Display
Announcement Information
Subject:[r]
Enter a subject for the message.
Message:
Enter the body of the announcement. The following
options are available:

Smart Text: Automatically recognizes a link
entered in the text box. Smart text recognizes
the ENTER key as a paragraph tag and accepts
HTML tags as well. Smart Text will also prompt
to load images if an image source text is used
when adding smart text as part of a content
item.

Plain text: Displays text as written.

HTML: Displays text as coded using HTML tags.

√x: Opens the WebEQ Equation Editor.



Options
Always show this
announcement:
Restrict Dates to
Show this
Announcement:
<: Opens the MathML Equation Editor.
ABC: Opens Spell Check.
Preview: Opens the text as it will appear to the
user.
Click an option to select whether or not this
Announcement is always displayed.
Select Display After to make the Announcement
available on a certain date. Click the drop-down arrow
and select time values.
Select Display Until to stop displaying the
Announcement after a certain time. Click the drop-down
arrow and select time values.
Announcement Display
The following is the order in which Announcements are displayed on the My Institution
page:





Permanent system Announcements are displayed first
System Announcements that fall into the display range appear next. For
example, an Announcement that was created in the last week if the user views
the View Last 7 Days tab will be displayed.
Permanent Course and Organization Announcements display next.
Course and Organization Announcements that fall into the display range are
listed last.
Within each of the above categories, Announcements are displayed in order of
creation with the most recently created Announcements displaying before
older Announcements.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 286
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Institution Calendar
Overview
Administrators manage institution events through the Institution Calendar. Upcoming
and past events can be viewed daily, weekly, or monthly. An event posted to the
Institution Calendar will display in all Calendars system-wide.
The default view shows the day’s events, however, Administrators may also select a
weekly, monthly, or yearly view.
Find this page
Functions
Click Institution Calendar from the System Tools section of the System Control
Panel.
To use the functions available on the Institution Calendar page, follow the table below.
To . . .
create an event and
add it to the calendar
view events for a
specific date and time
view events by day,
week, or month
view previous or
future events
view event details
modify an event
remove an event
click . . .
Add Event. The Add Calendar Event page will appear.
Quick Jump to access the Quick Jump page. From
here, select a date and time and the calendar will
immediately display events for that time.
the appropriate tab to view events for the current day,
current week, current month, or current year.
the arrows to the left of the current day, week, month,
or year. Click on the arrows to the right to view future
events.
a calendar event.
Modify. The Modify Event page will appear.
Remove for an event to remove it from the calendar.
This action is irreversible.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 287
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
View Events
Administrator Manual
Click on an event to view event details. The details page lists the date and time of the
event, the category associated with the event, and a description of the event. It is
possible to modify or remove the event by clicking the appropriate button.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 288
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add/Modify Calendar Event
Overview
Find this page
The Add or Modify Calendar Event pages contain the same fields and function almost
the same way. The Add Calendar Event page opens with empty fields while the Modify
Calendar Event page opens with the fields populated with information on a specific
event. To modify an event, edit the information in the fields on the Modify Event page
and click Submit.
Follow these steps to open the Add Calendar Event or Modify Calendar Event page.
Step 1
Click Institution Calendar from the System Tools section of the
System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Add Event or Modify next to an event on the Institution
Calendar page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 289
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Add Calendar Event page and Modify
Calendar Event page.
Field
Event Information
Event Title:
Description:
Description
Enter the title of the event. This title will appear on
Calendar pages at the date and time indicated in the
Event Time fields.
Enter a description of the event. The following options
are available:

Smart Text: Automatically recognizes a link
entered in the text box. Smart text recognizes
the ENTER key as a paragraph tag and accepts
HTML tags as well. Smart Text will also prompt
to load images if an image source text is used
when adding smart text as part of a content
item.

Plain text: Displays text as written.

HTML: Displays text as coded using HTML tags.

√x: Opens the WebEQ Equation Editor.



Event Time
Event Date:
Event Start Time:
Event End Time:
<: Opens the MathML Equation Editor.
ABC: Opens Spell Check.
Preview: Opens the text as it will appear to the
user.
Select the date of the event from the drop-down lists or
click the icon to select a date from the calendar
interface.
Select the time the event will begin from the drop-down
lists.
Select the time the event will end from the drop-down
lists.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 290
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Calendar Quick Jump
Overview
Find this page
Fields
The Calendar Quick Jump page allows Administrators to quickly access a portion of the
Calendar. Quick Jump is useful when looking for events planned for months in advance
of the current date. It is also useful for looking up the events of a past day, week, or
month.
Follow these steps to open the Calendar Quick Jump page.
Step 1
Click Institution Calendar from the System Tools section of the
System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Quick Jump on the Institution Calendar page.
The table below details the entry fields on the Calendar Quick Jump page.
Field
Calendar Quick Jump
Date:
Type of view:
Description
Select the date to jump to from the drop-down lists or
click the icon to select a date from the calendar
interface.
Select to view Calendar Events for the month, week, or
day for the date chosen in the Date field.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 291
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 2—Email
Overview
The Blackboard Academic Suite includes an email function for Administrators to quickly
email sets of users.
In this chapter
Chapter 2—Email includes the following topics.
Send Email
Topic
Email Users
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Send Email page.
This is a menu page with links to pages
where Administrators can compose
messages to sets of users.
This topic covers the Email Users pages.
Administrators can compose messages
to different sets of users from these
pages.
Page 292
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Send Email
Overview
Find this page
Functions
Administrators send email to users through the Send Email page. From this page, an
Administrator can send an email to all Instructors, all Students, or all users.
Click Send Email from the System Tools section of the System Control Panel.
Click a link on this page to compose and send an email to the appropriate set of users.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 293
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Email Users
Overview
Find this page
Fields
The Administrator selects email recipients by clicking on a link to all Instructors, all
Students, or all users. Once the recipients are determined, all messages are created
using the Compose Email pages.
Follow these steps to open the Send E-mail page.
Step 1
Click Send Email from the System Tools section of the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Click All Instructors, All Students, or All Users from the Send Email page.
The table below details the fields available on the Compose Email pages.
Field
Description
Enter Message Details
To:
Displays the group of users to receive the message.
From:
Displays the address of the sender.
Subject:
Enter a subject for the email message.
Message:
Enter the text of the message.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 294
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 3—Text Box Editor and Spell Check
Overview
Blackboard Learning System includes a Text Box Editor with advanced functionality
that enables users to create professional content. Tools within the Text Box Editor
include WebEQ, MathML, and Spell Check. In addition to the standard Spell Check
Dictionary, Administrators may upload and manage supplemental word lists for each
Virtual Installation.
In this chapter
Chapter 3— Text Box Editor and Spell Check includes the following topics.
Topic
Manage Text Box Editor
About Spell Check
Manage Spell Check
Download Wordlist
Upload Wordlist
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Text Box Editor.
This page allows Administrators to
manage the Text Box Editor and Text
Box Editor Tools.
This topic explains the details of the
Spell Check feature.
This topic covers the options available
within Spell Check.
This topic covers downloading a word
list for Spell Check to the system.
This topic covers uploading a word list
for Spell Check to the system.
Page 295
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Text Box Editor
Overview
The Text Box Editor allows users to create professional, vibrant content wherever
users can create blocks of text. Text is entered through a simple editor in the
Blackboard Learning System that nonetheless contains several powerful options
including:

WYSIWYG - The WYSIWYG features (What You See Is What You Get) allow
users to create content with a simple editor. Users may format text using a
WYSIWYG text editor to create HTML and cut and paste content from other
applications. Advanced file upload tools are also available.
Note: Instructors may upload files to the Text Box Editor in Content Areas. There is no
limit to the size or number of files that may be uploaded. Administrators may want to
advise Instructors to limit the number of files that are uploaded to their courses to
prevent overloading the system.

Smart Text - Automatically recognizes a link entered in the text box. Smart
text recognizes the ENTER key as a paragraph tag and accepts HTML tags as
well. Smart Text will also prompt to load images if an image source text is
used when adding smart text as part of a content item. This option is only
available if the WYSIWYG features in the Text Box Editor are not enabled.

Plain Text – This option displays text as it is written in the text area. This
option is only available if the WYSIWYG features in the Text Box Editor are not
enabled.

HTML – This option displays text as coded by the user using HTML tags.

Spellcheck – This Spell Check feature is available in most areas where users
may enter blocks of text. It includes a full English dictionary, a supplemental
word list configured by the Administrator, and custom word lists that are
stored as a cookie on a user’s local machine.

WebEQ Equation Editor - The Math and Science Notation Tool (WebEQ™
Equation Editor) is a general purpose equation editor designed for working
with equations. It enables users to use mathematical and scientific notation
throughout the Blackboard Learning System.

MathMLEquation Editor - The MathML Equation Editor functions in the same
way as the WebEQ Equation Editor. Instead of opening with the symbol
buttons, a blank text box will appear where users can enter XML
Administrators manage the availability of Text Box Editor features through the Manage
Text Box Editor page.
Note: The Text Box Editor is only available to users with a Windows Operating System
and Internet Explorer Version 5 or a later version. Users who have alternate browsers
will have options to use Plain Text, Smart Text, and HTML. Spell Check, WebEQ and
MathML will also be available to these users, unless disabled by the Administrator.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 296
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Find this page
Fields
Administrator Manual
Click Text Box Editor from the Tools section of the System Control Panel.
The table below details the fields on the Manage Text Box Editor page.
Field
Description
Enable/Disable Text Box Editor
Set the availability of the Text Box Editor for users by selecting the option Enable
the version for Internet Explorer Web Browsers. If the Text Box Editor is
disabled, Users will have limited features for adding content to the Text Box.
Options for Plain Text, HTML, and Smart Text will be available.
Enable/Disable Text Box Editor Tools
Enable Spell Check
Set the availability of Spell Check for users by selecting
Enable or Disable.
Enable WebEQ
Set the availability of WebEQ for users by selecting
Enable or Disable.
Enable MathML
Set the availability of MathML for users by selecting
Enable or Disable.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 297
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
About Spell Check
Overview
Word lists
The Blackboard Learning System includes a robust Spell Check feature supported by a
full English dictionary, a supplemental word list for each Virtual Installation, and
custom word lists that are stored as a cookie on a user’s local machine. The spell
check feature is available wherever users can enter blocks of text. It is also available
as a module with the Blackboard Portal System.
Misspelled words are determined by the following three sources:

Spell Check Dictionary: A full English dictionary of words that will not be
flagged for correction. The dictionary is also the only source for suggestions
when a misspelled word is found. This dictionary cannot be modified.

Virtual Installation Supplemental Word List: A list of additional terms
added by the System Administrator that do not appear in the default
dictionary. For example, a medical school might wish to upload a list of
medical terms so they are not flagged as incorrect terms for their users. This
word list can be modified from the System Control Panel.

Personal Word List: This word list is stored as a cookie on each user’s local
machine. Words are added to this list using the Learn feature within Spell
Check. Like the supplemental word list, the words on each personal word list
are not flagged for correction and are not included as a suggestion for errors.
Note: Extensive supplemental and personal word lists may slow performance of the
Spell Check tool.
Personal word list and cookies
The personal word list is stored as a cookie on the user’s local machine. The cookie is
not user or Virtual Installation specific. Therefore, a user’s word list will be available to
them whenever they are using Spell Check with the Blackboard Learning System, as
long as they are on the same local machine. Also, if another user logs onto the same
machine, that user will have the same personal word list stored on that machine
applied when running spell check. Since word lists are cookie-based, users are unable
to transport them. Word lists cannot be disabled on a computer.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 298
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Spell Check
Overview
The Blackboard Learning System includes a spell check feature available to users in
most areas where blocks of text can be entered. The list of words that are not flagged
for correction can be expanded with a supplemental word list for each Virtual
Installation. From the Spell Check page, the supplemental word list for the Virtual
Installation may be uploaded, modified, and then downloaded to change the list of
words.
Access to this feature is initially granted to users with the following Sys Admin roles:



Find this page
Functions
System Administrator
System Support
Course Admin
Click Spell Check from the Tools section of the System Control Panel.
The table below details the available functions on the Spell Check page.
To . . .
upload a modified
supplemental
word list for use in
the Virtual
Installation
download the
supplemental
word list for
modification
click . . .
Upload Word List. The Upload Word List page will appear.
From this page a new or modified supplemental word list
can be uploaded to replace the word list currently in use.
Note that, by default, there is no supplemental word list. A
word list must be created and uploaded to begin.
Download Word List. The Download Word List page will
appear. From this page the supplemental word list can be
downloaded. The supplemental word list will still be in use
until a new version is uploaded to replace it. This option
only appears on the page if a word list has been uploaded.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 299
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Download Word List
Overview
The Download Word List page displays a link that, when clicked, will begin
downloading the supplemental word list to the local machine. The supplemental word
list includes additional words that should not be flagged for correction when using the
Spell Check feature in the current Virtual Installation. A word list must be created and
uploaded before the option to download the word list appears.
Note: No matter what the name of the supplemental word list file is when it is
uploaded it will always be changed to dictionaryLocal.txt and stored in a folder for that
Virtual Installation. Therefore, the downloaded supplemental word list file will always
be dictionaryLocal.txt.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Download Word List page.
Step 1
Step 2
Click Spell Check from the Tools section of the System Control Panel.
Click Download Word List.
Modify the supplemental word list
After the supplemental word list has been downloaded, simply open it then add and
replace words to modify the list. The list appears in a standard text file with each word
separated by a hard return.
Keep in mind that the supplemental word list is a list of words that will not be flagged
for correction by the spell checker. In addition to the supplemental word list, spell
check also checks words against a robust English dictionary, and words that individual
users have added to their personal word lists. Personal word lists are only available on
a users’ local machine.
Note: Only words that appear in the Spell Check dictionary will be listed as
suggestions when a possible error is encountered. Words in the supplemental word list
will not be offered as suggestions.
For information on uploading a modified supplemental word list please see the Upload
Word List topic.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 300
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Upload Word List
Overview
The Upload Word List page adds a new word list or replaces the supplemental word list
currently used by the system with a new list. Each Virtual Installation may have a
separate Word List. For information on downloading and modifying the supplemental
word list, please see the Download Word List topic.
Note: The file name of the supplemental word list will be changed to
dictionaryLocal.txt when uploaded.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Upload Word List page.
Step 1
Click Spell Check from the Tools section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Upload Word List.
Upload a word list
Enter the full path to a new supplemental word list or click Browse to search the file
system for the new supplemental word list. A supplemental word list must be a .txt file
with each word separated by a hard return.
Note: Word lists may not be removed from the system. To ‘remove’ a word list, an
Administrator must upload an empty word list to overwrite the supplemental word list
on the system. The empty file must contain a space in order to be uploaded properly.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 301
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Part 6—Security and Integration
Overview
In this part
This part of the Blackboard Academic Suite Administrator Manual details the features
in the Security and Integration section of the System Control Panel. There are also
several topics in this part of the manual that detail administrative tasks and features
that are used outside of the System Control Panel.
Part 6 – Security and Integration includes the following chapters.
Security
Chapter
Customize the Login and
Gateway Pages
User Record Properties and
Privileges
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This chapter details the features for securing
connections that pass sensitive data to and
from the Blackboard Academic Suite.
This chapter details the tools and the process
for customizing the appearance and available
functions of the Login and Gateway pages.
This chapter details the features for defining
the attributes in user accounts and the
privileges assigned to Course Roles and
Administrative User Roles.
Page 302
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 1—Security
Overview
This chapter describes the features used to secure the Blackboard Academic Suite.
In this chapter
Chapter 1—Security includes the following topics.
SSL Choice
Topic
Authentication Config
Manage Context Encryption
Keys
Download the Context
Encryption Key
Create a Context
Encryption Key
Deciphering Encrypted Context
Integration Password
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the SSL Choice page. Before
making any changes to the SSL Choice settings
the Administrator must configure the IIS or
Apache™ Web server for SSL.
This topic covers the Authentication Config
page. This page lists the authentication options
and details the settings configured for each
option.
This topic covers the Manage Context
Encryption Keys page. This is a menu page for
creating or downloading a key to encrypt
content-passing from the Blackboard Learning
System through a System Extension.
This topic covers the Download Context
Encryption Key page. From this page a key can
be downloaded and then shared with a URL to
secure content-passing.
This topic covers the Create a Context
Encryption Key page. Keys are created for
content-passing from this page.
This topic covers how to programatically
decipher encrypted content on an outside URL.
This topic covers the Integration Password
page. Administrators can set a password for
the Integration account that handles Snapshot
tasks from client machines using SOAP.
Page 303
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
SSL Choice
Overview
If IIS (Windows) or Apache (UNIX) is configured to support SSL, then the
communication between users and the Blackboard Academic Suite can be configured
using the SSL Choice feature. SSL Choice allows Administrators to determine if none,
all, or some of the Blackboard Learning System is secured with SSL.
Note: If the SSL Choice is set to use SSL before SSL is configured in IIS or Apache the
Blackboard Academic Suite will not be accessible! To ensure that users can always
login, configure IIS or Apache for SSL prior to changing the security options on the
SSL Choice page. Please see the Blackboard Academic Suite Setup Guide for your
operating system to learn how to install and configure SSL.
If planning on using SSL, Blackboard recommends enforcing SSL on the entire system.
This ensures that all proprietary data is secured. If the choice option is chosen, it is
important to update SSL settings whenever a new tool is enabled or a System
Extension added.
Find this page
Select SSL Choice from the Security and Integration section of the System Control
Panel.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 304
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the fields on the SSL Choice page.
Field
Entire System
Disable SSL
System-wide
Description
Select this option and SSL will not be used to secure any of
the communication between users and the Blackboard
Academic Suite.
Enable SSL
Select this option and SSL will be used to secure all of the
System-wide
communication between users and the Blackboard Academic
Suite.
Enable SSL for
Select this option to determine which areas of the
the following
Blackboard Academic Suite will be secured through SSL.
areas
Select the different areas from the check boxes on this
page.
System Specific Areas
Select the check box for each area that should be secured using SSL.
Blackboard Tools
Select the check box for each tool, tab, or course content area that should be
secured using SSL.
System Extension Tools
Select the check box for each System Extension that should be secured using
SSL.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 305
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Authentication Config
Overview
Administrators can view but not edit the authentication configuration of the Blackboard
Learning System from this page. For information on editing the authentication
configuration properties, please see the Blackboard Learning System Authentication
Manual.
Find this page
View settings
Follow these steps to open the End-User Authentication Configuration page.
Step 1
Click Authentication Config from the Security and Integration
section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
The End-User Authentication Configuration Information page will
appear.
Click List All to view the authentication settings for an Authentication Type. While it is
possible to view settings for all the different Authentication Types only one type may
be enabled at a time.
The default Authentication Type is Blackboard Challenge-Response.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 306
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Context Encryption Keys
Overview
The context passing APIs allow the Blackboard Learning System to pass data to URLs
requiring that data in a query string. To see an example of this type of URL, simply
look at the URL for any course. The last part of the URL is
url=/bin/common/course.pl?course_id=<unique_id> where the <unique_id> is a
variable. It is variables such as this that can be passed using the context passing APIs.
Context passing is especially useful when implementing System Extensions that
require content from Blackboard Learning System to generate a URL. To protect the
transfer of possibly sensitive data as part of a context passing function, context
encryption using Cryptix (Blowfish) can be used to secure the data transfer instead of
the standard Base64Encoding.
Find this page
Select Manage Context Encryption Keys from the Security and Integration
section of the System Control Panel.
Enable the Manage Context Encryption page
The cryptix32.jar file must be downloaded and the Blackboard Learning System
configured before the features on the Manage Context Encryption Keys page become
available. Follow the steps below:
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Download the cryptix32.jar file from the Cryptix Web site
(http://www.cryptix.org)
Put cryptix32.jar in blackboard/systemlib
Create the directory blackboard/config/tomcat/classpath/cryptixshared.classpath.bb. The .bb file should contain the following:
@@[email protected]@/systemlib/cryptix32.jar
Run blackboard/tools/admin/PushConfigUpdates.sh
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 307
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Step 5
Administrator Manual
In the System Control Panel, select Manage Context Encryption
Keys.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 308
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Functions
Administrator Manual
The following functions are available from the Manage Context Encryption Keys page:
To . . .
create a new key
download an
existing key
click . . .
Create New Context Encryption Key. A new key will be
created and used by the Blackboard Learning System. For
outside URLs to decipher context-passed data the key must
be downloaded and made accessible to the outside URL.
Creating a new key will remove the existing key. Any
existing context-passing System Extensions that rely on the
key will not work until the new key is made available.
Download Existing Context Encryption Key. A key must
be created before it can be downloaded and shared.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 309
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Download the Context Encryption Key
Overview
Find this page
Function
Once a context encryption key has been created, it must be downloaded and then
made accessible to the URL that will accept data passed from the Blackboard Learning
System.
Follow these steps to open the Download Existing Context Encryption Key page.
Step 1
Click Manage Context Encryption Keys from the Security and
Integration section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Download Existing Context Encryption Key.
Click Submit to download the key. A Download window from the browser will appear.
The context key is always named blackboard.key.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 310
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Create a Context Encryption Key
Overview
The only variable to consider when creating a context encryption key is the key length
in bits. Longer keys are more secure but also perform somewhat slower.
It is only possible to use one key with the Blackboard Learning System at a time. If
the context APIs are used to tie in more than one URL the same key will be used to
encrypt communication for all the URLs.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Create New Context Encryption Key page.
Step 1
Click Manage Context Encryption Keys from the Security and
Integration section of the System Control Panel.
Step 2
Function
Click Create New Context Encryption Key.
Select the key length from the drop-down list and click Submit to create a new key. If
a key already exists, creating a new key will overwrite the existing key. Any URLs
relying on the old key to decipher context passed from the Blackboard Learning
System will not work until the new key is downloaded and made available to the URL.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 311
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Deciphering Encrypted Context
Overview
Code example
To encrypt data during context passing the Blackboard Learning System and the
external URL must have access to the same context encryption key. The key must be
created from the Manage Context Encryption Key feature available on the System
Control Panel. Once the key has been created it must be downloaded and distributed
to external servers that will accept context.
After downloading a context encryption key it must be made available to the URL that
will receive encrypted data through context-passing. The code example below shows
how to programmatically decipher encrypted context data on the external URL when it
is passed.
The object indicated by the target URL (in this case, index.jsp) could decrypt the
context as follows (importing blackboard.client.decryption.*):
String context = request.getParameter("context");
//if isEncryptionEnabled = false, base 64 encoding will be used instead
//of encryption
boolean isEncryptionEnabled = true;
ContextDecryptor bfd =
ContextDecryptorFactory.getContextDecryptor(isEncryptionEnabled );
// retrieve the Blackboard encryption key as a File or InputStream
File key = new File( strKeyLocation );
// or InputStream key = // implementation detail…
// to simply decrypt the context string:
String decryptedContext = bfd.decrypt( context, key );
// or, to get a HashMap of all key-value pairs
HashMap map = bfd.parseEncryptedContext( context, key );
// then search the HashMap for an expected value, and continue.
if (map.containsKey( “user” )
{ // execute…
}
Resolving multiple keys
The code example above is useful when there is a one-to-one relationship between the
external URL and the Blackboard Learning System. For instances where an external
URL is supporting a System Extension for multiple instances of the Blackboard
Learning System the hostname of the instance can be used to handle multiple keys.
In the example below, the key is found through association with the hostname for the
instance or Virtual Installation of the Blackboard Learning System. In this case the
hostname is physics.yourinstitution.com. Since the client decryption code has the
ability to pass in a decryption key to the ContextDecryptor object, the client server
must be able to map a hostname to its appropriate key (usually accessed as a File, but
can be an InputStream).
System Extension server developers can write a simple wrapper that:
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Pulls the hostname off the request
Looks up the encryption key file in the hostname-encryptionKey map
Passes the encryption key to the decrypt() method
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 312
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Pseudocode wrapper, implemented by a client server utility object:
/**
* Utility Pseudocode
*/
decryptByHostname( HttpServletRequest request)
{
// get context parameter from the request
String context = request.getParameter("context");
// determine if the context is encrypted
String strEncryptInd = request.getParameter("encrypt");
if ( (strEncryptInd != null) && (strEncryptInd.equalsIgnoreCase("y")) )
{
isEncrypted = true;
}
// if isEncrypted, look up the key
key = null;
if (isEncrypted)
{
// get hostname from HttpUtils.getRequestURL().getHost();
// get key map, possibly stored as a property file in the format:
// physics.yourinstitution.com=
/key/file/location/physics_yourinstitution_com/key.sec
// get encryption key from map as either a File or an
InputStream,
// depending on client implementation detail (key is passed as
null if
// isEncrypted= false, and Base64Encoding is used instead)
}
ContextDecryptor decryptor =
ContextDecryptorFactory.getContextDecryptor(isEncrypted);
// then either return the values passed in the context as either
// a HashMap of key-value pairs
HashMap values = decryptor.parseEncryptedContext(context, key);
// or a String
String values = decryptor.decrypt(context, key);
return values;
}
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 313
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Integration Password
Overview
The Integration User is a special User account that is used by Snapshot and the Data
Integration APIs to process operations from a client machine using Simple Object
Access Protocol (SOAP). This page allows the Administrator to change the password
for the Integration user.
The Integration user does not have access to the Blackboard Learning System through
the GUI nor can the Integration user be assigned to a course or participate in the
teaching and learning environment in any way.
Find this page
Fields
Click Integration Password from the Security and Integration section of the System
Control Panel.
The table below details the entry fields on the Integration Password page.
Field
Description
Modify Password
Old Password:
Enter the old password.
New Password:
Enter a new password for the Integration account.
Confirm New
Enter the new password again to confirm.
Password:
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 314
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 2— Customize the Login and Gateway Pages
Overview
This chapter describes the tools for customizing the appearance and available features
on the Login and Gateway pages.
In this chapter
Chapter 2—Customize the Login and Gateway Pages includes the following topics.
Topic
Login Page Customization
Gateway Page Customization
System Settings
Gateway Options
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Login Page Customization
page and the process for customizing a Login
page.
This topic covers the process for customizing
the appearance of the Gateway page.
This topic covers the System Settings page.
This page includes settings for managing the
features on the Login page.
This topic covers the Gateway Options page.
This page includes settings for managing the
features that appear on the Gateway page.
Page 315
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Login Page Customization
Overview
Find this page
Functions
Administrators can download Login Page Templates supplied with Blackboard Learning
System and configure them for their system. If a Login Page Template breaks, or is
not appropriate for the institution, the default Login page can be restored so that users
can access the system with minimal interruption.
Click Customize Login Page from the Security and Integration section of the System
Control Panel.
The following functions are accessible through the Login Page Customization page:
To . . .
download a
template for the
Login page
upload a
customized Login
page
reset the Login
page to the
default
click . . .
Download Login Page Template. The template download
will begin.
Upload Customized Login Page. The Upload Customized
Login page will appear. From this page the path to a
customized Login page is entered. The customized Login
page is then uploaded and set as the Login page.
Reset to Default Login Page. The Login page will be set
to the default.
Create a customized Login page
Follow these steps to create a customized Login page.
Step 1
Go to the System Admin Tab.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 316
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Step 2
Click Customize Login Page from the Security and Integration
section of the System Control Panel.
Step 3
Click Download Login Page Template.
Step 4
A download window from your Web browser will appear. If a download
window does not appear, right-click on Download Login Page
Template and choose the Save Target As. . . option.
Step 5
The “login” file will be saved to the directory of your choice.
Step 6
Open the “login” file with a text editor.
Step 7
The colors, appearance of text, and the text itself can be edited. It is
also possible to create a link to an image.
Step 8
Save the “login” file with the same file name.
Step 9
Login into Blackboard Learning System (if you logged out to edit the
“login” file) and go to the System Admin Tab.
Step 10
Click Customize Login Page from the Security and Integration
section of the System Control Panel.
Step 11
Click Upload Customized Login Page.
Step 12
Enter the path to the new “login” file in the File: field. If you do not
know the exact path, click Browse to search for the file.
Step 13
Logout and test the new Login page.
Step 14
If the page fails and you are unable to login in, enter the following
address in your Web browser to bring up the default login page:
http://domain_name.host_name/webapps/login?action=default_login.
After logging in, return to Customize Login Page and click the link to
restore the default Login page. This will allow users to once again
login.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 317
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Gateway Page Customization
Overview
The Gateway page is the first page that users see when accessing the Blackboard
Academic Suite (unless the Administrator opts to use Portal Direct Entry). The
Gateway page includes the following buttons:

Login: Directs the user to the Login page.

Course Catalog: Directs the user to the Course Catalog. This button may be
disabled by the Administrator.

Create Account: Directs the user to the Create Account page. This button
may be turned off by the Administrator. This button should be turned off
unless the Administrator wants anyone with access to the URL to create
accounts.
The Gateway page also includes a default welcome message and image from
Blackboard Inc.
Note: Blackboard 5 users were able to edit the Gateway page by modifying the
login.ci file. This is not possible in Release 6.x. The Gateway page must be customized
by editing the gateway.bb file in the branding directory for each Virtual Installation.
Customize the buttons on the Gateway page
To customize the buttons on the Gateway page please see Gateway Options.
Customize the welcome message and image
The welcome message and image can be customized by replacing an HTML fragment
in the file system. It is possible for each Virtual Installation to have its own customized
welcome message and image. Follow the steps below to replace the HTML fragment
that generates the welcome message and image with one customized for the
institution.
Step 1
Access the URL for the Virtual Installation and verify that the Gateway
page appears.
Step 2
Within the $blackboard file system change directories to
/content/vi/vi_ID/branding. Where vi_ID is the name of the Virtual
Installation.
Step 3
Save a copy of the gateway.bb file so that it can be restored to the
default.
Step 4
Edit or replace the gateway.bb file with another HTML fragment.
Step 5
Access the URL for the Virtual Installation and verify that the welcome
message and image appear as desired.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 318
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Administrator Manual
Page 319
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
System Settings
Overview
The System Settings page controls the availability of two features: Allow Guest Access
and Forgotten Password.
Allowing Guest Access will enable anyone to access the system. If Guest Access is
allowed in Courses and Organizations, then these users may view the portions of any
courses or organizations that are not secured against Guest access by the Instructor
or Leader. Guests will see the portal content available to the Portal Role of Guest and
have system access as the Administrative User Role of Guest.
Note: It is also possible to create users with an Administrative User Role of Guest. By
doing so, the Administrator can control Guest access by requiring all Guests to obtain
the User Name and password for a Guest account.
The Forgotten Password feature enables a link on the Login page that will direct Users
to a page where the password for their account can be requested. The password will
be sent to the email address associated with the User account. It is also possible to set
the link to another URL. This is useful if using an Authentication method other than the
default Blackboard Learning System challenge and response. For example, if LDAP is
configured as the Authentication method then the link can be directed to a page
connected to the LDAP server. The URL can be configured on the Gateway Options
page.
Find this page
Click System Settings from the Security and Integration section of the System
Control Panel.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 320
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The table below details the entry fields on the Integration Password page.
Field
Guest Access
Allow Guest
Access:
Description
Select Allow and users who do not have an account (nonauthenticated users) may access the system, such as portal
areas. Select Do Not Allow and users without an account
will not have any access to the system.
Allow Guest
Select Allow and users who do not have user accounts
Access to
(non-authenticated users) may access courses on the
Courses:
system. If Do Not Allow is selected, Instructors will not be
able to make areas in their courses available to Guests.
Allow Guest
Select Allow and users who do not have user accounts
Access to
(non-authenticated users) may access organizations. If Do
Organizations:
Not Allow is selected, Leaders will not be able to make
areas in their organizations available to Guests.
Forgotten Password
Select Allow under Forgotten Password to enable the link that allows users to
request that the password for the account.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 321
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Gateway Options
Overview
Several of the buttons and options on the Gateway Page and the Login page can be
customized. The Gateway page is the first page users typically see when accessing
Blackboard Academic Suite. It can include buttons for creating an account and allowing
anyone to browse the Catalog.
For security and data integrity reasons, it is not recommended that users be able to
create accounts.
The Gateway page can be bypassed completely and site visitors will be taken directly
to the portal as a Guest. Users can then login using the Login button in the header
frame.
The Gateway Options page also includes an option for changing the URL that handles
User requests for lost passwords.
Find this page
Fields
Click Gateway Options from the Security and Integration section of the System
Control Panel.
The table below details the fields on the Gateway Options page.
Field
Description
Enable Course Catalog on Gateway
Course Catalog
Select Enable to display a button that links to the Course
on Gateway:
Catalog on the Gateway page.
Enable New User Account Creation on Gateway
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 322
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
User Account
Generation on
Gateway:
Select Enable to display a button on the Gateway page that
lets visitors create a User account. The User account is
created with a Portal Role of Student and an Admin User
Role of None.
Set URL for Forgotten Password
URL for
If using an authentication system other than the standard
Forgotten
Blackboard Learning System challenge-response, the URL to
Password:
a page where users can request a forgotten password can
be set here. When entering a URL, be sure to enter the URL
completely, for example, http://www.blackboard.com and
not www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com.
Enable Portal Direct Entry
Portal Direct
Select Enable to skip the Gateway page entirely and send
Entry:
site visitors directly to the portal as guests. Users can login
using the button in the header frame. If this setting is
changed from Allow to Not Allow, please restart the
server to avoid experiencing errors.
The Login Module may only be enabled if Portal Direct Entry
is enabled.
Note: Portal Direct Entry is only available to users with the Blackboard Portal System.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 323
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 3—User Record Properties and Privileges
Overview
This chapter details the features for managing the user account attributes and the
privileges assigned to each role in the Blackboard Academic Suite. There are three
types of roles that can be applied to each user:



Portal Role
Course Role
Administrative User Role
In this chapter
Chapter 3—User Record Properties and Privileges includes the following topics.
Topic
Portal Roles
Administrative User Roles
Course Roles
Admin User Accounts Created
at Install
Customize User Profile
User Privileges
Modify Privilege
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic explains the roles that determine
access to portal content.
This topic covers the different roles available
that grant access to the System Control Panel.
This topic covers the roles available in a
course.
This topic covers the three accounts that are
automatically created for Administrators at the
time of install.
This topic covers the Customize User Profile
page. The attributes for user accounts can be
renamed and a link can be set to another
administrative system that users can access to
change their account information.
This topic covers the User Privileges page. This
page lists the roles that are assigned to each
privilege. Privileges can be modified to grant
access to different roles.
This topic covers the Modify Privilege page.
From this page Administrators can change the
roles that have access to a privilege.
Page 324
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Portal Roles
Overview
List of roles
This role determines access to portal content. Different common areas and modules
can be set to appear to specific roles to create a completely different portal
environment for each of the different roles. For example, users with a Portal Role of
Alumni could be given access to a common area with content dedicated to graduates.
Users with a role of Student would not be able to see this tab or access the common
area (until they graduated and their Portal Role was changed).
The following is a listing of Portal Roles available in the Blackboard Portal System:









Student
Faculty
Staff
Alumni
Prospective Student
Guest
Other
Observer
Role 9, Role 10, . . ., Role 20
Roles 9 through 20 can be used by the Administrator to group users in unique ways.
These roles can be renamed by the Administrator from the Edit Portal Roles page.
Because the Portal Role is not displayed to users when they access the portal, the
name of the role is unimportant to users. It is only important that the Administrator
keep track of the role definitions and which users should be assigned to which role.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 325
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Administrative User Roles
Overview
Every user account in the Blackboard Academic Suite has an Administrative User Role.
Different roles grant the user different levels of access to the System Admin tab. To
delegate responsibility for the system, Administrators may give varying privileges to a
small number of users by assigning Administrative roles. Administrative User roles
should be strictly managed for security reasons.
Note: Only users with the role of System Administrator may create or modify System
Administrator accounts.
Administrative User Roles include the following:

Course Administrator

Guest

None

Observer

Portal Administrator

Support

System Administrator

System Support

User Administrator
Note: System Administrators may modify the privileges of Administrative User Roles
with the User Privileges feature. The information below is based on the default settings
in the Blackboard Learning System.
Course Administrator
Users with the role of Course Administrator may access areas of the System Admin tab
that are used to manage courses in the system. These users do not have access to the
Course Control Panels for individual courses.
This role may be assigned to someone who assists the System Administrator with
course management tasks, such as creating courses, updating course information, and
copying and recycling courses.
Course Administrators have access to the following areas in the System Admin tab:

*Restore Course




List / Modify Courses – may
not modify content
Create Course
Batch Create Course
Batch Enroll Users in Course
*Remove Course








*Copy Course
*Import Course
*Export Course
*Archive Course




*Settings (under Courses)
*Images and Icons
*Catalog
List / Modify Users (can only
update user Course Roles)
Batch Create Users
*Observer Management
*Logs
*Send Email

* Settings for areas with an asterisk (*) cannot be modified on the User Privileges
page.
Note: All options within these areas of the System Admin Tab may not be available.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 326
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Guest
Administrator Manual
Every Blackboard system has a pre-set user account called "Blackboard Guest" with
the username of "guest" and the password of “guest”. Any user who logs in with this
username and password, or who clicks Preview on the Gateway page, is
automatically given the Administrative Role of Guest. Administrators may also create a
assign the role of Guest to specific users.
A user with the role of Guest may view any unsecured areas of courses that have
Guest Access enabled. A Guest does not have access to the System Admin tab.
None
Observer
A user with the role of None has no administrative controls and no access to the
System Admin tab. All Students and Instructors are usually given an Administrative
User Role of None.
A user with the role of Observer can “shadow” one other user on the system. An
Observer can see all courses in which a specific user is enrolled, and, within each
course, those materials and tools that the Instructor has given Observers access to.
An Observer does not have access to the System Admin tab.
This role may be assigned to a parent, an evaluation team or others who may need to
monitor the course work of one other user on the system.
Portal Administrator
Portal Administrators have access to the areas of the System Admin tab that deal with
managing the portal. This role may be assigned to someone who is responsible for
creating and modifying portal content, adding tabs to the system and establishing
portal roles.
Portal Administrators have access to the following areas in the System Admin tab:




List / Modify Users – may not
modify content
*Manage Tabs
*Manage Modules
*Manage Channels

*Manage Tool Panel



*Settings (under Portal Areas)
*Export Modules
*Gateway Options
* Settings for areas with an asterisk (*) cannot be modified on the User Privileges
page.
Note: All options within these areas of the System Admin Tab may not be available.
Support
Users with the role of Support have limited access to the System Admin tab. This role
may be assigned to an individual who is assisting the System Administrator with
course management tasks, such as creating courses, batch enrolling users, updating
course information and copying and recycling courses.
Support users have access to the following areas in the System Admin tab:
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 327
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual


*List / Modify Courses
*Import Course




*Export Course
*Settings (under Courses)

*Catalog
List / Modify Users – may not
modify content
*Observer Management
* Settings for areas with an asterisk (*) cannot be modified on the User Privileges
page.
Note: All options within these areas of the System Admin Tab may not be available.
System Administrator
System Administrators may access the entire System Admin Tab and the Course
Control Panel for every course in the system. This is the highest level of access that
may be assigned.
Some areas of a course Web site require a user be enrolled to view material. The
System Administrator can use the Quick Enroll button in the course's Navigation
Menu to temporarily enroll in a course to view or troubleshoot these areas. The Quick
Un-enroll button reverses the process.
System Support
A user with the System Support role has access all areas on the System Admin tab,
but not to the Control Panels for individual courses in the system. This role may be
assigned to individuals who need to perform administrative tasks, but who should not
have the ability to access or change the content in a course. These users are also
unable to modify content in List/Modify Users.
User Administrator
User Administrators have access to areas of the System Admin tab which deal with
managing users on the system. This role may be assigned to a user who will be
creating other users, enrolling them in courses, and changing passwords. Although a
User Administrator can assign most Administrative Roles to any user, only System
Administrators can assign the System Administrator role or System Support role.
User Administrators have access to the following areas in the System Admin tab:


Batch Enroll Users
List/Modify Users




Create User
Batch Create Users


Remove Users from the System
Batch Remove Users from the
System
*Observer Management
*Send Email
* Settings for areas with an asterisk (*) cannot be modified on the User Privileges
page.
Note: All options within these areas of the System Admin Tab may not be available.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 328
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Roles
Overview
Course Roles control access to the content and tools within a course. Each user is
assigned a role for each Course (or Organization) in which they participate. For
example, a User with a role of Teaching Assistant in one Course can have a role of
Student in another Course. Instructors may use these roles to delegate some of the
responsibility for maintaining the course.
The Course Role is set when a User is enrolled. It can also be modified after
enrollment from the Course Control Panel of the Course.
Course






Roles include:
Course Builder
Grader
Guest
Instructor
Student
Teacher’s Assistant
Note: The Course Control Panel privileges associated with each Course Role can be
modified using the User Privileges feature. In addition, the names of the Course Roles
can be changed with the Course Role Rename feature.
Course Builder
The Course Builder role has access to most areas of the Course Control Panel. This
role is appropriate for a research assistant or to an assistant who has limited
responsibilities, but should not have access to student grades.
Note: If the course is unavailable to Students, a Course Builder can still access the
course. A Course Builder cannot remove an Instructor from a Course.
Course Builders have access to the following areas within the Course Control Panel:
















*Course Information
*Course Documents
*Assignments
*External Links
*Announcements
*Course Calendar
*Staff Information
*Tasks
*Discussion Boards
*Send Email
*Collaboration
*Digital Drop Box
Manage Course Menu
Archive Course
Recycle Course
*Manage Tools















Settings
Import Course Cartridge
Import Package
*Resources
Course Copy
Export Course
List / Modify Users
Create User
Batch Create Users for Course
Enroll User
Remove Users from the Course
*Manage Groups
*Test Manager
*Survey Manager
*Pool Manager
* Settings for areas with an asterisk (*) cannot be modified on the User Privileges
page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 329
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Note: All options within the available areas of the Course Control Panel may not be
available.
Grader
The Grader role has limited access to the Course Control Panel. A Grader would assist
the Instructor in the creation, management, delivery, and grading of Assessments and
Surveys. A Grader may also assist the Instructor with adding manual entries to the
Online Gradebook.
Note: If a course is unavailable to students, the course will appear in the My Courses
module and Course list for a user with the role of Grader, but the Grader will not be
able to enter the course until the course is available
Graders have access to the following areas within the Course Control Panel:





*Announcements
*Course Calendar
*Digital Drop Box
List/Modify Users – may not
modify content
*Test Manager




*Survey Manager
*Pool Manager
*Gradebook
*Gradebook Views

*Course Statistics
* Settings for areas with an asterisk (*) cannot be modified on the User Privileges
page.
Note: All options within the available areas of the Course Control Panel may not be
available.
Guest
Users with the role of Guest have no access to the Course Control Panel. If Guest
access is enabled by the System Administrator, an Instructor can make areas within a
course accessible to Guests.
Visitors to the Blackboard Learning System such as prospective Students, alumni or
parents may be given the role of Guest.
Instructor
Instructors have access to all areas in the Course Control Panel. This role is generally
given to the person developing, teaching or facilitating the class. If a course is
unavailable to Students, Instructors may still access it.
Administrators may modify access to the following areas on the User Privileges page:






List / Modify Users
Create User
Batch Create Users for Course
Remove Users from the
Course
Enroll User
Settings
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential






Course Copy
Recycle Course
Import Course Cartridge
Export Course
Archive Course
Manage Course Menu
Page 330
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Student
Administrator Manual
Student is the default Course User Role. As user with the role of Student has no access
to any areas on the Course Control Panel.
Teacher’s Assistant
The Teacher’s Assistant has access to nearly everything in the Course Control Panel. If
the course is unavailable to students, Teaching Assistants may still access the course.
Unlike the Instructor, the Teaching Assistant will not be listed in the Course Catalog
listing for the course.
Note: A Teaching Assistant cannot remove an Instructor from a course.
Administrators may modify access to the following areas on the User Privileges page:






List / Modify Users
Create User
Batch Create Users for Course
Remove Users from the
Course
Enroll User
Settings
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential






Course Copy
Recycle Course
Import Course Cartridge
Export Course
Archive Course
Manage Course Menu
Page 331
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Admin User Accounts Created at Install
Overview
When the Blackboard Learning System is installed three User accounts with admin
privileges are created:



Administrator
Administrator
root_admin
integration
The Administrator account has full system Administrator privileges. This account, and
the root_admin account are the only two accounts that can login until more users are
created.
The password for the Administrator account is set during the installation of the
Blackboard Learning System.
root_admin
The root_admin account has full administrative privileges including the management of
virtual installations through the System Control Panel. When the root_admin account
views the System Control Panel the Manage Virtual Installations link appears at the
top of the panel. The root_admin can login to any virtual installation and access the
Virtual Installation management features from this link.
The password for this account is set during installation.
Note:
The root_admin account is created even if your license does not include the use of any
virtual installations. The root_admin account can be modified from the Edit Root
Administrator Profile page.
integration
The integration user is used only to facilitate Blackboard Learning System Snapshot
operations. This account cannot be used to login through the GUI nor does it appear in
any lists of users on the GUI. To change the password for this account, use the
Integration Password feature available on the System Control Panel.
The default password for the integration account is set at installation.
For more information on how the integration account is used during Snapshot
processes, please see the Blackboard Learning System Advanced Integration and Data
Management Manual.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 332
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Customize User Profile
Overview
Through the Customize User Profile page data fields for user accounts can be renamed
and configured as displayed and editable. The labels of the fields that store data can
be changed and the Administrator can select whether or not users can view and edit
data for each field. Once changes are made, they will appear within the user interface.
For example, if the name of the default Student ID field is changed to ‘Identification’ it
will appear as ‘Identification’ everywhere.
Often fields are not editable in Blackboard Learning System because the data is owned
by another institutional information system. Administrators can add a URL where users
can update this data that is owned by another information system. When Users access
the Edit Personal Information page the link with instructions will appear at the top of
the page.
Find this page
Fields
Click Customize User Profile from the Security and Integration section of the
System Control Panel.
The table below details the fields on the Customize User Profile page.
Field
Description
Link Information
Update Link:
Select this check box to provide a link to another URL for
updating data that is not editable within the Blackboard
Learning System.
URL:
Enter the URL to the location where Users can update profile
information. When entering a URL, be sure to enter the URL
completely, for example, http://www.blackboard.com and
not www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 333
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Link Title:
Enter a name for the link that will appear at the top of the
Edit Personal Information page.
Instructions:
Enter instructions for using the link that will appear under
the link on the Edit Personal Information page.
Manage Data Fields
Item
Displays the data item. The default label for each item is the
name of the item. This field is display only.
Display
Click the check box to display the field. If the field is
displayed it will appear to users. Items that are grayed out
may not be modified.
Editable
Click the check box to allow users to change the information
stored in the field. If the field is editable users may change
this information from the Personal Information tool. Items
that are grayed out may not be modified.
Label
Edit the title of the field. The field title will appear as it is
entered throughout the system. The default label is the
name of the item as it appears in the Item column.
Revert All to Defaults
Check here to
Click the check box and the Label of all fields will revert to
revert all fields
the default. This will not change the Displayed or Editable
to default titles
field settings.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 334
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
User Privileges
Overview
The privileges assigned to Administrative User Roles and Course Roles can be modified
by the Administrator to control access to the different areas of the System Control
Panel and Course Control Panels. The User Privileges page lists the privileges assigned
to each role and each privilege can be changed to include or exclude roles.
Note: Section 1, User Privileges for All Users, includes privileges for both
Administrative User Roles (the first set under the Portal Tool Links heading) and
Course Roles (the second set under the Course/Organization Tool Links). Use caution
when setting these privileges to reconcile user access to the tools through the portal
and user access through a course. It should also be noted that privileges for the tools
on Portal pages are controlled by Administrative User Role, and not by the Portal Role!
In most cases, users such as Students and Instructors will have an Administrative
User Role of None (N).
Find this page
Functions
Click User Privileges from the Security and Integration section of the System Control
Panel.
The tables on the User Privileges page have the privileges for row headers and the
applicable roles as the column headers. To see if a privilege is applied to a row simply
line up the privilege with the row. A check mark indicates that a user with that role
has access to that content or tool.
To modify a privilege, click Modify in the row for that privilege.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 335
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Modify Privilege
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Course Roles and Administrative User Roles can be assigned privileges from the Modify
Privilege page. Privileges are granted by clicking the check box next to each role. It is
also possible to redirect a privilege to point to an outside URL from this page.
Follow these steps to open the Modify Privilege page.
Step 1
Click User Privileges from the Security and Integration section of the
System Control Panel.
Step 2
Click Modify in the row for the privilege that will be modified. The
Modify Privilege page will appear.
The table below details the fields on the Modify Privilege page.
Field
Properties
Privilege:
Redirect to:
Description
Displays the name of the privilege. This field is display only.
Enter the URL of the page that Users will be redirected to
when accessing the tool or area. The default tool or area
can be restored by leaving this field blank. When entering a
URL, be sure to enter the URL completely, for example,
http://www.blackboard.com and not www.blackboard.com
or blackboard.com.
Text of link for
If the link is redirected, the text of the link can be set here.
Redirect:
It is not possible to change the text of the default link.
Available:
Select Yes or No to set the availability of the link.
Set Privileges by Role
Select the check box in the Allow column for each Role that will have the
privilege enabled.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 336
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Administrator Manual
Page 337
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Part 7—Assistance
Introduction
Assistance
Assistance allows the Administrator to research the online Knowledge Base, browse
the online version of the Blackboard Academic Suite Administrator Manual, and contact
Blackboard support.
Assistance appears in the bottom right of the System Control Panel.
Online Support Site
Click Online Support Site to open the Behind the Blackboard extranet in another
browser window.
Online Admin Manual
Click Online Admin Manual to open the Blackboard Academic Suite Administrator
Manual in another browser window.
Designate Support Contact
Click Designate Support Contact to set an email address as the primary contact
point for user assistance.
Accessibility tips
For information on how to make the Blackboard Academic Suite more accessible to all
users see the Accessibility Tips topic.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 338
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Designate Local Support Contact
Overview
Find this page
Field
Administrators enter a support contact for Instructors and Students from the
Designate Local Support Contact page. The email address provided by the
Administrator will be linked to the Support button in course and organization Web
sites. Instructors and Students will submit questions and requests through this button.
Select Designate Local Support Contact from the Assistance area of the System
Control Panel.
Enter an email address in the Email Address field. This address will be the institution
support contact for Instructors and Students. The Support button in course and
organization Web sites will be linked to this address.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 339
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Accessibility Tips
Overview
Good teaching and learning practices suggest conveying information in as many ways
as possible. This is also valuable advice when creating accessible online courses. This
topic offers Instructors information to assist them in designing courses that are
accessible to all users.
By offering Students a variety of options for using online course materials Instructors
can reach the whole learning community. When uploading an image, video, sound file,
or text file, think about ways to convey that information to different types of learners.
For example, if you post a complex image, supplement it with a text file explaining it.
If you post a text file, post illustrations to supplement it. Create an environment where
learners of many types and abilities can absorb and comprehend the information.
Accessibility tips
The table below details options that will make online course materials more accessible.
Topic
Non-text
content
Multimedia files
Accessibility Tip
Include a text equivalent for items such as graphic images.

Supply alternative text in the Multimedia Options
settings when displaying an image.

Supply a description on the Description field when
using more complex media.
When uploading multimedia files, choose types of
multimedia that support synchronized captioning.
Synchronized captioning means that the captions are
synchronized with the audio content. When uploading a long
audio file, upload the transcript in a separate file
immediately above or below the audio file. When uploading
a shorter audio file, consider using the Description field for
the transcript.
The National Center for Accessible Media has developed an
authoring tool, MAGpie, for creating captioned multimedia.
For more information on this visit:
http://access.blackboard.com/
Color
Tables
Design Web pages so that all information that is conveyed
with color is also available without color. For example,
instead of asking Students to choose between a red button
and a green button provide additional information, such as
“Select the red button with the word Stop on it.”
When data tables are created to upload to a course Web site
make sure to identify row and column headers. For data
tables that have two or more levels of row or column
headers use markup to associate data cells and header
cells. Sample code and instructions can be found in the Web
Accessibility Initiative HTML techniques documentation. A
link for this site can be found at
http://access.blackboard.com/
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 340
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Frames
Screen Flicker
Text only pages
Applets and
plug-ins
Forms
HTML
Resources
Administrator Manual
Multiple sets of frames can be confusing to users, whenever
possible consider creating pages that do not use frames.
When using multiple frames include text titles that facilitate
frame identification. When HTML that uses frames is
uploaded verify that those frames are appropriately titled.
Make sure that titles are appropriate even when the content
of the frame changes.
Design pages to avoid causing the screen to flicker with a
frequency greater than 2 Hz and lower than 55 Hz. Be
careful not to upload content, particularly multimedia files
that may cause the screen to flicker. This is important when
designing or choosing animated gifs, Flash files, DHTMLenabled Web sites, or other dynamic content.
Provide a text-only page with the equivalent information or
functions if there is no other way to present the original
information in an accessible way. Whenever possible, it is
better to make the original content accessible instead of
supplementing it with a text-only alternative.
When uploading files that require plug-ins use the
Description field to add a link to download the plug-in. In
general, any file type other than HTML or images will
require a plug-in.
Please note that although the browser may show these file
types seamlessly (without appearing to need a plug-in), the
same files may not be visible on user’s computers, this will
depend on the software they have installed.
When creating forms make sure that form elements make
sense when read from left to right across the page. It is also
important to associate labels with form elements, such as
placing the text labels next to text input boxes. Make sure
that a form can be filled out and submitted when using only
the keyboard, rather than relying on the mouse.
When uploading Web files that have been authored using
another tool (for example, Front Page, Word, Dreamweaver,
or HomeSite), it is important to check the accessibility of the
pages first. Some tools, such as Bobby and A-Prompt, have
accessibility tools built in or available as plug-ins. Links to
these tools can be found at http://access.blackboard.com/.
For more information about accessibility, please visit the Web site
http://access.blackboard.com/.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 341
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Part 8—Blackboard Content System
Overview
The Blackboard Content System is a file repository with several sophisticated features
for working with content. It is fully integrated with the Blackboard Learning System
and the Blackboard Portal System—making use of a similar interface as well as
creating repositories for Blackboard Learning System courses and users.
This chapter reviews how to manage the Blackboard Content System through the
Administrator Control Panel.
Note: Once the Content System is enabled, the Content System Tab will appear when
a user logs into Blackboard. If a user with the role of Administrator selects this tab, he
will be treated as a normal user. In order to have administrative privileges for
managing the Content System, the Administrator must use the Manage Content
option on the System Admin Panel to enter the Content System. This will launch the
Content System with Administrative privileges.
In this part
Part 8 – Content System includes the following chapters.
Topic
Manage Content
Manage Portfolios
Portfolio Templates
Custom Metadata
Display Options
Settings
Technical Settings
System Info
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
Describes how to create and modify folders
and content.
Explains how to create and manage Portfolios.
Describes how to modify and add Portfolio
Templates.
Provides information managing custom
metadata for an institution.
Describes the options for displaying and
viewing content.
Explains how to manage the tools, features,
and privacy settings on a system wide basis.
Explains how to manage technical settings on
a system wide basis.
Displays information about the system
Page 342
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 1 – Manage Content
Overview
This chapter explains the features for managing folders and directories in the Content
System.
In this chapter
Chapter 1—Manage Content includes the following topics.
Topic
Content System
Copy Directory or Folder
Move Directory or Folder
Email Entries
Workflow Activities
Properties
Manage Permissions
Add Permissions for a User or
Group of Users
Add Permissions for a Course
User List
Add Permissions for a Portal
User List
Add Permissions for the Public
Add Permissions for All System
Accounts
Modify Permissions
Comments
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Content System page.
Administrators create, modify, and set
permissions from this page.
This topic covers the Copy Directory or Folder
page. Administrators may copy a directory or
folder from this page.
This topic covers the Move Directory or Folder
page. Administrators may move a directory or
folder from this page.
This topic covers the Email Entries page.
Administrators may email users links to
content directories from this page.
This topic covers Workflow Activities.
Administrators may create Workflow activities
from these pages.
This topic covers the Properties page.
Administrators may view and modify details of
folder information.
This topic covers the Permissions page.
Administrators can modify the permissions for
individual and groups of users.
This topic covers the Add A User or Group of
Users to a folder page. Administrators may
modify permissions for one or more users.
This topic covers the Add Course User List
page. Administrators may modify permissions
to the folder for all users in a course.
This topic covers the Add Portal User List page.
Administrators may modify permissions to the
folder for users with specific portal roles.
This topic covers the Add Public page.
Administrators may modify permissions to the
folder for the general public.
This topic covers the Add All System Accounts
page. Administrators may modify permissions
to the folder for all users with a system
account.
This topic covers the Modify Permissions page.
Administrators may modify the permissions for
a user or group of users who has already been
given permissions to the folder.
This topic covers the Comments page. This
menu page includes links to manage comments
for the item.
Page 343
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Set Private/Shared Comments
Manage Comments
Configure WebDAV
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Administrator Manual
This topic covers the Set Private / Shared
Comments page. Administrators may make
comments for the folder private or public.
This topic covers the Manage Comments page.
Administrators manage comments for the
folder.
This topic covers the Manage Comments page.
Administrators manage comments for the
folder.
Page 344
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Content System
Overview
The Content System organizes files and folders into separate directories for users,
courses, and the institution itself. The default directories of the Content System
appear on the Content System page. Administrators may add folders to the file system
and manage the properties of the existing folders from this page.
Note: Additional information about Content Areas and Folders may be found in the
Blackboard Content System User Manual.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Content System page.
Step 8
Step 9
Functions
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Manage Content under Content System.
The Content System page includes the following functions:
To . . .
view the contents
of a content folder
access the Web
Folder
click . . .
the name of the folder in the Name column.
Web Folder in the action bar. The Web Folder area in the
network will open. An overview for using the Web Folder
area in the network is included in the Blackboard Content
System User Manual.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 345
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
copy a content
folder in the file
system
move content
folder in the file
system
remove a content
area
change content
settings
create a workflow
email the content
folder to a user or
group of users
download a
content folder
Bookmark a
content folder
Administrator Manual
the check box next to the directory and select Copy in the
action bar. The Copy page will open.
the check box next to the directory and select Move in the
Action bar. The Move page will open.
the check box next to the content then click Remove in the
action bar. All of the content in this folder will be removed.
Modify next to the folder. The Manage Folder page will
open with options for opening the Web Folder and managing
Properties, Permissions and Comments.
the drop-down menu in the action bar and select one of the
Workflow options. Select Go. The Workflow page will
appear.
the drop-down menu in the action bar and select Email
Items. Select Go. The Email Entries page will appear.
the drop-down menu in the action bar and select Download
Items. Select Go.
the drop-down menu in the action bar and select
Bookmark Items. Select Go. The Create Bookmark page
will appear.
Accessing Content System folders
All personal folders will appear when the Administrator opens the /user, /course/,
/eReserves, or /organization directory. For example, when /courses is opened, only
folders for courses in which the Administrator is enrolled or in which he or she is the
Instructor will appear.
Administrators may access and manage ALL user, course, eReserve and organization
folders in the Content System. These are opened through the Search and Go To
Location tools.
When the /library or /institution directories are opened, all folders that are available in
the Content System will appear.
Creating Course and User folders
When a new course or user is added to the Learning System, corresponding folders in
/users or /courses in the Content System are not automatically created. A personal
folder in /users is automatically created the first time the user enters the Content
System. A course folder in /courses is automatically created when the Instructor
enters the Content System. Students in a course will not see a course folder unless the
Instructor or Administrator grants them permissions to do so.
An Administrator will not be able to locate a user’s home directory (for example,
/users/studentA) or a course directory (for example, /courses/courseId) until the user
has entered the Content System at least one time. When the user first enters, the
Content System generates all appropriate directories for the user.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 346
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Copy Directory or Folder
Overview
Administrators can create a copy of a folder on the Copy page and place it in a new
location.
Note: Administrators may not copy content directories, such as /users, or top-level
folders, such as a course folder.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Copy page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Step 3
Select a content directory or folder and Copy.
The Copy page includes the following fields.
Field
Description
Content Information
The name, size, and last date modified for this content appears.
Destination
Destination
Enter the path to the location for where this copied folder
will appear or click Browse to locate and select the area.
Overwrite if a
Check this box if the item should replace an item that
file with the
already exists with this name.
same name
exists
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 347
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Move Directory or Folder
Overview
Administrators can move a folder to another location in the Blackboard Content
System from the move page.
Note: Administrators may not move content directories that are automatically
generated, such as /users or course folders. The Move option will not be available.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Move page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Step 3
Select a content folder and Move.
The Move page includes the following fields.
Field
Description
Content Information
The name, size and last date modified for this content appears.
Destination
Destination
Enter the path to the location for where this folder will move
to or click Browse to locate and select the area.
Overwrite if a
Check this box if the item should replace an item that
file with the
already exists with this name.
same name
exists
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 348
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Email Entries
Overview
Administrators can email a link to a content directory to users through the Email
Entries page. The file is not attached to the email; a URL to the content item is sent
along with the email message.
Note: Users must have ‘Read’ permissions for items that are included in the email.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Email Entries page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Select Email Items in the drop-down list and select Go.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 349
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The Email Entries page includes the following fields.
Field
Message Details
To:
Cc:
From:
Subject:
Message:
Description
Enter email address of the recipient. Separate multiple
addresses with commas.
Enter email address for additional recipients. Separate
multiple addresses with commas.
Displays the name of the sender.
Edit the subject of the email if necessary.
Edit the text in the message if necessary. Do not modify the
URL in the message! This is the link to the content folder.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 350
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Workflow Activities
Overview
The Workflow feature is a sophisticated tool for assigning and tracking tasks related to
a content item. Although all workflows function in essentially the same way, the
different types of workflow are designed to handle a wide range of tasks. The different
workflows are:






Approve: Use this workflow to ask other users to review a file and
validate it.
Complete: Use this workflow to ask other users to complete work on a
file.
Grade: Use this workflow to ask other users to review a file and submit a
grade.
Remind: Use this workflow to prompt users to take action regarding a file.
Review: Use this workflow to solicit opinions or analysis on a file from
other users.
Share: Use this workflow to collaborate with other users.
Note: Administrators may assign tasks through the System Admin Panel. Tasks must
be modified and tracked through the Content System Tab. See the Content System
User Manual for additional information.
Create Workflow
Workflows are built and sent to other users from the Create Workflow page. The steps
for creating a workflow are the same for each type of workflow.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open a Create Workflow page.
Step 4
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 5
Select Manage Content under Content System.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 351
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Step 6
Fields
Administrator Manual
Select a type of workflow from the drop-down list in the action bar and
then click Go. The Create Workflow page will appear.
The Create Workflow page includes the following fields.
Field
Description
Activity Information
Title
Enter a title for the workflow. This title will appear in the
Received Activities for users selected to receive the
workflow.
Instructions
Enter any instructions for completing the task.
Type
This field displays the type of workflow that will be created.
The type of workflow is selected from the Manage Workflow
Activities: Sent Activities page.
Priority
Select a priority from the drop-down lists. There are three
levels of importance that can be assigned to a workflow:

High

Normal

Low
Deadline
Enter a date that the workflow must be completed in
MM/DD/YYYY format or use the calendar pop-up to select a
date from a graphical interface. A link to the calendar popup appears next to the field.
Send Activity to Users
User Name
Enter the User Name of each user that will receive the
workflow. Separate User Names by commas. The Browse
button next to the field will open a search function to help
find users. User Names can be selected and added to the
workflow directly from the search results.
Email to Users
Select this check box to notify users of the new workflow
with an email message. The email message is automatically
generated and sent. It contains a link to the workflow and
the subject line is “Your Name has sent you an Activity.”
Send Activity to Course(s)
Your Courses:
Check the box next to each course that will receive this
activity.
Additional
Use the Browse button to find courses that will receive this
Courses:
activity. Separate multiple courses with a comma.
Roles:
Check the box next to each user role that will receive this
activity. All users in the courses chosen above who have
these roles, will receive this activity.
Email to Course
Select this check box to notify users of the new workflow
User(s):
with an email message. The email message is automatically
generated and sent. It contains a link to the workflow and
the subject line is “Your Name has sent you an Activity.”
Content Items
Content
Enter the path to a folder or file to include in the workflow
Addresses
or click Browse to open a pop-up window with the
Blackboard Content System directory so you can search and
select the folder or file. It is possible to include multiple
folders and files in a workflow.
Permissions
Select each permission that users should have over the file
or folder included in the workflow.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 352
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Modify folder
Overview
Find this page
Administrators’ access features to customize folders in the Content System through
the Modify Folder page. The Modify folder page is simply a menu of features.
Follow these steps to open the Modify Folder page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Step 3
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Modify Folder page will
appear.
Available functions
The following functions are accessible through the Modify Folder page:
To . . .
open the Web
folder
edit folder
properties
click . . .
Open Web folder. The Web folder for will appear.
Properties. The Properties page will appear. The
Administrator may modify folder information such as the
quota and lock options.
Permissions. The Manage Permissions page will appear.
manage
permissions to the
folder
Manage comments Comments. The Comments page will appear.
for the folder
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 353
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Properties
Overview
Find this page
The Properties page allows Administrators to view the details of folder information,
such as when it was created and by whom. It also allows Administrators to set a quota
to limit the size of the folder’s contents, determine if the folder should be available to
others and set up Comment options.
Follow these steps to open the Properties page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Fields
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Modify Folder page will
appear.
Select Properties.
The Properties page includes the following fields.
Field
Description
Folder Information
Folder Name [r] Displays the name of the folder. This field cannot be
modified for directories automatically created by the
Content System.
Address
Displays the location of the folder.
Owner
Displays the name of the user who owns the folder.
Created By
Displays the name of user who created the folder.
Created On
Displays the date and time when the folder was created.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 354
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Last Modified By Displays the name of the user who last modified the folder.
Date Last
Displays the date and time when a change was made to the
Modified
folder.
Quota Information
Size
Displays the quota for the folder. This limits the total size of
the folder’s contents.
Quotas in
Enter a space quota for the folder in megabytes (MB). The
Megabytes (M)
space quota can not be larger than the quota displayed in
the Size field.
Available Space
Lock Options
Lock Type
Administrators should ONLY set a quota for this folder to
manage hardware limits. If possible, Administrators should
leave this field blank.
Display only field that shows the amount of available space
for the folder
Select a lock for the folder from the following options:

No Lock

Lock This Folder

Lock this Folder and everything it contains
A lock secures the folder itself (name and settings) from
changes. Locking the folder and all its contents protects
both the folder itself and the materials it contains.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 355
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Permissions
Overview
User access to a directory is controlled through the Manage Permissions page. Users
can be added individually with separate permissions assigned to each user or users
can be added in groups, such as all the users enrolled in a particular course or all the
users with a certain portal role. These groupings are derived automatically from the
user roles in Blackboard Learning System.
Users or groups of users can have none, one, or many of the following permissions




Read: Ability to view content items within the folder unless explicitly
prevented from doing so by the permissions of a particular item.
Write: Ability to make changes to content items within the folder unless
explicitly prevented from doing so by the permissions of a particular item.
Remove: Ability to remove items from the folder unless explicitly prevented
from doing so by the permissions of a particular item.
Manage: Ability to control the properties and settings of items within the
folder unless explicitly prevented from doing so by the permissions of a
particular item.
Note: Administrators should be careful when granting permissions to areas of the
Content System, as all folders and items inherit permissions from the parent folder.
For example, if permissions were granted is the /courses directory, these permissions
would also exist for everything in the /courses directory.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 356
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Find this page
Functions
Administrator Manual
Follow the steps below to open the Manage Permissions page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Step 3
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Modify Folder page will
appear.
Step 4
Select Permissions.
The Manage Permissions page includes the following functions.
To . . .
add permissions
for a user
add permissions
for a course or
organization user
list
add permissions
for portal users
add permissions
for public users
add permissions
for all users with
accounts on the
system
remove
permissions for a
user or a group of
users
modify the
permissions for a
group
click . . .
Add User in the action bar. The Add User page for the
folder will appear. From this page a user can be added and
permissions set for that user.
the drop-down list and select Add Course User List or
Organization User List. Click Go and the Add Course User
List page will appear. From this page a users in a course
may be granted permissions.
the drop-down list and select Add Portal User List. Click
Go and the Add Portal User List page will appear. From this
page a users with different Portal roles may be granted
permissions.
the drop-down list and select Add Public. Click Go and the
Add Public User page will appear. From this page a users
from the general public may be granted permissions.
the drop-down list and select Add All System Accounts.
Click Go and the Add All System Accounts page will appear.
From this page all users with accounts on the system may
be granted permissions.
the check box next to the user or group of users and then
click Remove in the action bar. All of the selected users
and groups will have their permissions removed. Once
permissions are removed, the users can no longer access
the folder.
Modify at the end of the row for the appropriate user or
group. The Modify Permissions page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 357
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Permissions for a User or a Group of Users
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Adding selecting users or a group of users to a folder allows the user or users to
access the folder according to the permissions set.
Follow these steps to open the Add User page for a folder.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Step 3
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Modify Folder page will
appear.
Step 4
Select Permissions. The Manage Permissions pages will appear.
Step 5
Select Add Users.
The Add User for a folder page and the Add User Group to a folder page include the
following fields:
Field
Choose User(s)
Username(s)
Set Permissions
Permissions
Description
When adding a user or users, individual users can be added
by entering each user’s User Name (separated by commas)
or using the Browse function to find each user to include.
Check each box for the permissions that will be applied to
the user or users. For a full description of each permission
please see Manage Permissions.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 358
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Folder Options
Apply to this
folder only
Apply to this
folder, files
within this
folder, and all
sub-folders and
their files
Overwrite any
existing
permissions for
this user list
Administrator Manual
Selecting this button applies the permissions only to the
folder and its items. Users will not have access to subfolders
unless permissions are set for the users on that subfolder.
Selecting this button applies the same permissions to this
folder and all the items and subfolders nested within the
folder.
Check this box to have these permissions replace any
existing permissions for the user or users that already exist.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 359
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Permissions for a Course User List
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Adding a Course User List to a folder allows the all users within a course to access the
folder according to the permissions set.
Follow these steps to open the Add Course User List page for a folder.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Step 3
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Modify Folder page will
appear.
Step 4
Select Permissions. The Manage Permissions pages will appear.
Step 5
Select Add Course User List from the drop-down list and select Go.
The Add Course User List page includes the following fields:
Field
Description
Choose Course(s)
Your Courses
Select the check box for the course that will be added.
Multiple courses may be selected.
Additional
Courses
Choose Role(s)
Use the Browse button to find courses that should be
included. Separate multiple courses with a comma.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 360
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Roles:
Set Permissions
Permissions:
Folder Options
Apply to this
folder only
Apply to this
folder, files
within this
folder, and all
sub-folders and
their files
Overwrite any
existing
permissions for
this user list
Administrator Manual
Check each box for the roles of users who will have
permissions for this folder. For example, if Instructor is
selected, only users with the role of Instructor may access
this folder.
Check each box for the permissions that will be applied to
the user or users. For a full description of each permission,
please see Manage Permissions.
Selecting this button applies the permissions only to the
folder and its items. Users will not have access to subfolders
unless permissions are set for the users on that subfolder.
Selecting this button applies the same permissions to this
folder and all the items and subfolders nested within the
folder.
Check this box to have these permissions replace any
existing permissions for the user or users that already exist.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 361
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Permissions for a Portal User List
Overview
Adding a Portal User List to a folder allows the all users with specific Portal roles to
access the folder according to the permissions set.
Note: Portal Roles are only available if the Blackboard Portal System is installed.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Add Portal User List page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Step 3
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Modify Folder page will
appear.
Step 4
Select Permissions. The Manage Permissions pages will appear.
Step 5
Select Add Portal User List from the drop-down list and select Go.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 362
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The Add Portal User List page includes the following fields:
Field
Choose Role (s)
Portal Roles
Set Permissions
Permissions:
Folder Options
Apply to this
folder only
Apply to this
folder, files
within this
folder, and all
sub-folders and
their files
Overwrite any
existing
permissions for
this user list
Description
Check each box for the portal roles of users who will have
permissions access to this folder
Check each box for the permissions that will be applied to
the role or roles. For a full description of what each
permission means, please see Manage Permissions.
Selecting this button applies the permissions only to the
folder and its items. Users will not have access to subfolders
unless permissions are set for the users on that subfolder.
Selecting this button applies the same permissions to this
folder and all the items and subfolders nested within the
folder.
Check this box to have these permissions replace any
existing permissions for the user or users that already exist.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 363
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Permissions for the Public
Overview
Find this page
Adding Public permissions to a folder allows all users with system accounts and people
in the general public to access this file or folder. Users who do not have accounts on
the Blackboard Learning System, but who may access the server where this Web
folder resides, may access this folder.
Follow these steps to open the Add Public page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Step 3
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Modify Folder page will
appear.
Step 4
Select Permissions. The Manage Permissions pages will appear.
Step 5
Select Add Public from the drop-down list and select Go.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 364
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The Add Public page includes the following fields:
Field
Set Permissions
Permissions:
Folder Options
Apply to this
folder only
Apply to this
folder, files
within this
folder, and all
sub-folders and
their files
Overwrite any
existing
permissions for
this user list
Description
Check each box for the permissions that will be applied to
the role or roles. For a full description of what each
permission means, please see Manage Permissions.
Selecting this button applies the permissions only to the
folder and its items. Users will not have access to subfolders
unless permissions are set for the users on that subfolder.
Selecting this button applies the same permissions to this
folder and all the items and subfolders nested within the
folder.
Check this box to have these permissions replace any
existing permissions for the user or users that already exist.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 365
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Permissions for All System Accounts
Overview
Find this page
Adding permissions for all system accounts to a folder allows all users with Blackboard
Learning System accounts to access this folder.
Follow these steps to open the Add All System Accounts page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Step 3
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Modify Folder page will
appear.
Step 4
Select Permissions. The Manage Permissions pages will appear.
Step 5
Select Add All System Accounts from the drop-down list and select Go.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 366
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The Add All System Accounts page includes the following fields:
Field
Set Permissions
Permissions:
Folder Options
Apply to this
folder only
Apply to this
folder, files
within this
folder, and all
sub-folders and
their files
Overwrite any
existing
permissions for
this user list
Description
Check each box for the permissions that will be applied to
the role or roles. For a full description of each permission,
please see Manage Permissions.
Selecting this button applies the permissions only to the
folder and its items. Users will not have access to subfolders
unless permissions are set for the users on that subfolder.
Selecting this button applies the same permissions to this
folder and all the items and subfolders nested within the
folder.
Check this box to have these permissions replace any
existing permissions for the user or users that already exist.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 367
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Modify Permissions
Overview
Find this page
Modifying folder permissions changes the permissions for a user or group of users. For
detailed information on permissions please see Manage Permissions for a Folder.
Follow these steps to open the Modify Permissions page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Fields
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Modify Folder page will
appear.
Select Permissions. The Manage Permissions page will appear.
Select Modify next to the User or User list to be modified.
The following fields appear on the Modify Permissions page.
Field
Description
Modify Permissions
Displays the user or group that will be modified.
Set Permissions
Permissions
Check each box for the permissions that will be applied to
the user or users. For a full description of what each
permission means, please see Manage Permissions for a
Folder.
Folder Options
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 368
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Apply to this
folder only
Apply to this
folder, files
within this
folder, and all
sub-folders and
their files
Overwrite any
existing
permissions for
this user list
Administrator Manual
Selecting this button applies the permissions only to the
folder and its items. Users will not have access to subfolders
unless permissions are set for the users on that subfolder.
Selecting this button applies the same permissions to this
folder and all the items and subfolders nested within the
folder.
Check this box to have these permissions replace any
existing permissions for the user or users that already exist.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 369
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Comments
Overview
Find this page
Comments allow users to store opinions or instructions regarding the contents of the
folder.
Follow these steps to open the Comments page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Functions
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Modify Folder page will
appear.
Select Comments. The Comments page will appear.
The Comments page includes the following functions.
To . . .
set whether
comments are
private or shared
add and manage
comments
click . . .
Set Private/Shared Comments. The Set Private/Shared
Comments page will appear.
Manage Comments. The Comments page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 370
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Set Private/Shared Comments
Overview
Find this page
Users set whether or not comments may be added to an item on the Set
Private/Shared Comments page.
Follow these steps to open the Set Private/Shared Comments page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Field
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Modify Folder page will
appear.
Select Comments. The Comments page will appear.
Select Set Private/Shared Comments.
Select Shared to allow users who have access to the item to view and add comments.
Select Private and other users may not view or add comments.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 371
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Comments
Overview
Find this page
Functions
The Comments page stores text from users with the appropriate permissions.
Comments are useful for storing opinions or instructions regarding the folder. The
setting for controlling whether or not users can add comments to a folder appears on
the Set Private / Shared Comments page.
Follow these steps to open the Comments page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Content under Content System.
Step 3
Select Modify next to a folder to be modified. The Manage Folder page
will appear.
Step 4
Select Comments.
The following functions are available on the Comments page.
To . . .
add a comment
remove a
comment
sort comments
click . . .
Add Comment from the action bar. A text box will appear.
Enter a comment and click Submit.
the check box next to the comment to be deleted, then
select Remove.
the carat above a column to sort comments by that column.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 372
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Configure WebDAV
Overview
The WebDAV Internet standard is used for sharing files via the Internet regardless of
platform (Windows, Macintosh, Linux, Sun Solaris, and so forth). In the Blackboard
Content System, WebDAV allows users to access content from the Content System as
if it were it any other network drive or folder.
Administrators can configure settings and locking options for files on the Configure
WebDAV page. Locks enable users to ‘lock’ an item; when an item is locked it can be
viewed by others, but cannot be modified. Administrators can enable locks on the Tool
Settings page. The Configure WebDAV page allows Administrators to set the length of
time for locks.
Note on authentication and WebDAV: WebDAV requires compatibility with basic or
digest authentication schemes. Microsoft®.NET Passport, Kerberos, and other
distributed authentication mechanisms may be incompatible with direct access to
WebDAV. Institutions using one of these authentication types may be able to take
advantage of WebDAV by first authenticating with the Blackboard Learning System,
and then launching the Web Folder from within the user interface.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the WebDAV Configuration page.
Step 1
Step 2
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select WebDAV Configuration under Content System
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 373
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The following fields are available on the WebDAV Configuration page.
Field
Description
General WebDAV Settings
Enable WebDAV Select Yes or No to determine if WebDAV will be available
to users.
Maximum
Enter the maximum number of responses that will be
responses to a
returned for a WebDAV search request. This number must
search
be set to at least 10.
WebDAV Lock Options
Maximum
Enter in seconds the maximum length of time granted for a
lifetime of a lock lock.
Minimum
Enter in seconds the minimum amount of time granted for a
lifetime of a lock lock.
Lock timeout
Enter in seconds the length of time for the grace period
delay
between the time a lock expires when it times out. During
this grace period clients may refresh the lock.
Unique string for Enter a unique string to be used for the WebDAV RFC token.
tokens
WebDAV Compression Options
Allow
Some WebDAV clients may prefer to receive compressed
compression:
files. Select Yes or No to allow the compression of WebDAV
files.
Minimum size to Enter the minimum size of a file to compress. All files
attempt
smaller than this value will not be compressed, even if
compression of
compression is requested.
file:
Maximum size of Enter the maximum size of a file that may be compressed.
file to compress: All files larger than this value will not be compressed, even
if compression is requested.
Mime types
Enter the extensions for files that will automatically be
available for
compressed if requested by the client. Files with extensions
compression:
appearing in this field will only be compressed if they are of
type "application/octet-stream".
Allow Chunk
Chunk transfer encoding allows data to be sent in a series of
transferchunks to reduce the strain on the server strain when
encoding:
sending a large amount of data. Select Yes or No to allow
chunk transfer-encoding. If Yes is selected, the Content
System will make partial responses when the client supports
transfer-encoding.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 374
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 2 – Manage Portfolios
Overview
This chapter explains the features for managing portfolios in the Content System.
In this chapter
Chapter 2—Manage Portfolios includes the following topics.
Topic
Manage Portfolios
User Portfolios
Modify Portfolio
Share Portfolio
Send to User
Send to Course or Organization
Send to External Users
Portfolio Comments
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Content System page.
Administrators create, modify, and set
permissions from this page.
This topic covers the Copy Directory or Folder
page. Administrators may copy a directory or
folder from this page.
This topic covers the Modify Portfolio page.
Administrators may modify portfolio
information from this page.
This topic covers the Share Portfolio page.
Administrators may share the portfolio with
other users or groups of users from this page.
This topic covers the Send to User page.
Administrators may share the portfolio with
another user from this page.
This topic covers the Send to Course or
Organization page. Administrators may share
the portfolio with users enrolled in a course or
organization from this page.
This topic covers the Send to External User
page. Administrators may share the portfolio
with users outside the system from this page.
This topic covers the Comments page.
Administrators may add and remove comments
for the portfolio from this page.
Page 375
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Portfolios
Overview
Find this page
Field
Portfolios are collections of content organized into customized Web pages.
Administrators may access the portfolios for all users in the system from the Manage
Portfolios page.
Follow these steps to open the Manage Portfolios page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Portfolios under Content System.
Enter the user name for the user whose portfolios you need to access and select
Submit. Select Browse to search the system for a username. Portfolios may only be
shared with one user at a time.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 376
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
User Portfolios
Overview
Find this page
Functions
Portfolios are collections of content organized into customized Web pages.
Administrators may manage and remove the portfolios for all users in the system from
the Manage Portfolios page.
Follow these steps to open the User Portfolios page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Portfolios under Content System.
Step 3
Perform a search for a user’s portfolio.
Step 4
Select Manage next to the Portfolio.
The User Portfolios page includes the following functions.
To . . .
view a portfolio
remove a
portfolio(s)
manage the
propertied,
availability and
comments for a
portfolio
click . . .
the name of the portfolio in the Title column. The portfolio
will appear.
the check box next to the portfolio(s) and then click
Remove in the action bar. All of the selected portfolios will
be removed from the system.
Modify next to the portfolio. The Manage Portfolio page will
open with options for managing Properties, Sharing and
Comments.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 377
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Modify Portfolio
Overview
Administrators may modify the properties of a Portfolio, including the title, menu style
and availability on the Modify Portfolio page.
Note: Users are not notified when the Administrator makes changes to one of their
Portfolios. Changes made by the Administrator override a user’s changes.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Modify Portfolio page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Portfolios under Content System.
Step 3
Perform a search for a user’s portfolio. The user’s Portfolio page will
appear.
Step 4
Select Manage next to the portfolio. The Manage Portfolio page will
appear.
Step 5
Select Modify Properties.
The Manage Portfolio page has the following fields.
Field
Description
Portfolio Information
Title
Enter a title for the portfolio. This title will identify the
portfolio.
Description
Enter a description for the portfolio.
Learning
Enter the objective of the portfolio.
Objective
Portfolio Menu Colors
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 378
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Navigation Style
Select Buttons to make the areas of the Portfolio Menu
appear in a button format. If Button is selected, longer
titles may not fully appear when the Button when displayed.
Select Text to make areas of the Portfolio Menu appear in a
text format. See below for more information about
Navigation Styles.
Portfolio Availability
Available
Click Yes or No to determine if the portfolio will be available
to other users.
Comments Options
Comments
Click Shared or Private to determine whether or not
comments can be added to the portfolio. For more
information on managing comments for a portfolio please
see the Portfolio Comments topic.
Text Navigation Style
When the Text Navigation Style is chosen an additional set of functions must be
defined.
Field
Text Options
Background
Color
Description
Click Pick Color to open a palette. Move the mouse around
the color field to see the different color variations. Singleclick to select the color that appears.
Alternatively, the hexadecimal RGB value can be entered in
the text field. Entering the code allows a perfect match to a
color. For example, a portfolio color scheme can be created
to match a school’s colors.
Text Color
The color selected will be used as the background for the
portfolio.
Click Pick Color to open a palette. Move the mouse around
the color field to see the different color variations. Singleclick to select the color that appears.
Alternatively, the hexadecimal RGB value can be entered in
the text field. Entering the code allows a perfect match to a
color.
The color selected will be used as the text for the portfolio.
Please make sure to select a text color that contrasts with
the background color for easy viewing.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 379
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Button Navigation Style
When the Button Navigation Style is chosen an additional set of functions must be
defined.
Field
Description
Select Style Properties
Button Type:
Choose the Button Type from the drop-down list.
Button Shape:
Click an option to choose the Button Shape.
Button Style:
Use the drop-down list to select the color of the buttons.
Click Gallery of Buttons to view all of the button options.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 380
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Share Portfolio
Overview
Find this page
Functions
A Portfolio is private until the person who created it decides to share it with other
users. The Administrator may also share any user’s portfolios with other users. The
Portfolio can be shared with individual users or all the users in a course or an
organization. In fact, the portfolio can be shared with anyone who has an email
address and access to the Internet.
Follow these steps to open the Share Portfolio page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Portfolios under Content System.
Step 3
Perform a search for a user’s portfolio. The user’s Portfolio page will
appear.
Step 4
Select Manage next to the portfolio. The Manage Portfolio page will
appear.
Step 5
Select Share Portfolio.
The following functions are available from the Share Portfolio: Portfolio Name page.
To . . .
allow certain
system users to
view the portfolio
allow all the
system users
participating in a
course or an
organization to
view the portfolio
click . . .
Share with Users in the Action bar. The Send to User page
will appear.
Share with Course or Share with Organization in the
drop down list on action bar. The Send to Course or Send to
Organization page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 381
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Email anyone
outside the
system with
instructions for
accessing the
portfolio
Remove access to
the portfolio from
users
Administrator Manual
Share with External Users in the action bar. The Send to
External User page will appear.
the check box next to each user or set of users from a
course or organization. Click Remove in the action bar. The
selected users will no longer be able to view the portfolio.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 382
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Send to User
Overview
Find this page
Other users on the system can view a portfolio only if the portfolio creator or the
Administrator shares it with them. Other users are granted access to a portfolio
through the Send to User page.
Follow these steps to open the Send to User page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Portfolios under Content System.
Step 3
Perform a search for a user’s portfolio. The user’s Portfolio page will
appear.
Step 4
Select Manage next to the portfolio. The Manage Portfolio page will
appear.
Step 5
Select Share Portfolio. The Share Portfolio page will appear.
Step 6
Select Share with Users.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 383
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The Send to User page includes the following fields.
Field
Choose User(s)
Username(s)
Description
Enter the user name for each user that will be granted
access at this time. Separate each user name by a comma.
The portfolio can be shared with more users at any time by
returning to this page, privileges for all users that should be
allowed to view the portfolio do not need to be granted at
the same time.
The Browse function can be used to locate users if the user
name is not known.
Email Information
Send email
Select Yes to send an automatically generated email to
notification to
each user. The message will inform the users that they may
users
access the portfolio.
Subject
Edit the subject for the email.
Message
Edit the body of the message inviting others to view your
portfolio.
Send copy of
Select Yes or No to send a copy of the email to the email
message to self? account included as part of your Blackboard Learning
System profile.
Use blind carbon Select Yes or No to use the BCC: function. BCC: will hide
copy (Bcc:)
the identity of those receiving the email from others
receiving the same email. You, as the sender, will appear as
the primary recipient of the message.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 384
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Send to Course or Organization
Overview
Administrators may share a portfolio with a course or an organization through the
Send to Course page and the Send to Organization page.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Send to Course or Organization page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Portfolios under Content System.
Step 3
Perform a search for a user’s portfolio. The user’s Portfolio page will
appear.
Step 4
Select Manage next to the portfolio. The Manage Portfolio page will
appear.
Step 5
Select Share Portfolio. The Share Portfolio page will appear.
Step 6
Select Share with Course or Share with Organization from the dropdown menu and click Go.
Enter the Course ID or Organization ID that will be granted access at this time.
Separate each ID by a comma. The portfolio can be shared with more courses or
organizations at any time by returning to this page, privileges for all courses or
organizations that should be allowed to view the portfolio do not need to be granted at
the same time.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 385
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Send to External Users
Overview
Find this page
A portfolio can be shared with anyone with an email account and access to the
Internet. Administrators use the Send to External User page to share a portfolio with
users who do not have a system account.
Follow these steps to open the Send to External User page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Manage Portfolios under Content System.
Perform a search for a user’s portfolio. The user’s Portfolio page will
appear.
Select Manage next to the portfolio. The Manage Portfolio page will
appear.
Select Share Portfolio. The Share Portfolio page will appear.
Select Share with External Users.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 386
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The Send to External Users page includes the following fields.
Field
Choose Users
To
Description
Enter the email address of each person outside of the
system that will receive access to the portfolio. Separate
each email address with a comma.
Email Information
Subject
Edit the Subject line of the message. The default subject
line is, “user name has sent you a Portfolio Invitation.”
Message
Edit the body of the message inviting others to view your
portfolio.
The default message includes the line <PORTFOLIO_URL>.
Do not delete this line! It will be replaced with the URL
pointing to the portfolio. Without this URL, outside users
cannot view the portfolio.
Send copy of
Select Yes or No to send a copy of the email to the email
message to self? account included as part of your Blackboard Learning
System profile.
Use blind carbon Select Yes or No to use the BCC: function. BCC: will hide
copy (Bcc:)
the identity of those receiving the email from others
receiving the same email. You, as the sender, will appear as
the primary recipient of the message.
Portfolio Password
Use password?
Select Yes or No to protect the portfolio with a password. If
Yes is selected, enter the password in the text field.
Include
Select Yes or No to include the password in the email
password in
message to outside users. If the password is not included in
message?
the email it must be transmitted in some other way before
the portfolio can be viewed.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 387
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Portfolio Comments
Overview
The Comments page for a portfolio includes columns displaying the date posted, the
person who posted the comment, and the comment itself. Comments can be displayed
in order by clicking the carat at the top of each column. For example, to sort
comments by date, click the carat at the top of the Date Posted column.
Find this page
Functions
Follow these steps to open the Comments page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Portfolios under Content System.
Step 3
Perform a search for a user’s portfolio. The user’s Portfolio page will
appear.
Step 4
Select Manage next to the portfolio. The Manage Portfolio page will
appear.
Step 5
Select Manage Comments.
The following functions are available from the Comments page.
To . . .
add a comment
remove a
comment
click . . .
Add Comment in the action bar. The Add Comment page
will appear. Enter a comment in the text field on the Add
Comment page and click Submit to add a comment.
the check box next to each comment. Click Remove in the
action bar to delete all the selected comments.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 388
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 3 – Portfolio Templates
Overview
This chapter explains portfolio templates in the Content System.
In this chapter
Chapter 2—Portfolio Templates includes the following topics.
Topic
Portfolio Templates
Add Portfolio Template
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Portfolio Template page.
Administrators manage and modify templates
from this page.
This topic covers the Add Portfolio Template
page. Administrators create new templates
from this page.
Page 389
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Portfolio Templates
Overview
Templates are used in portfolios to create custom Web pages. The Administrator may
create a series of templates that users can then choose to use when creating a
portfolio. A number of templates are included in the Blackboard Content System;
these may also be modified by the Administrator to suit the needs of the institution.
Note: Existing Portfolio pages will not be changed when a template is modified,
removed, or made unavailable.
Find this page
Function
Follow these steps to open the Portfolio Templates page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Portfolio Templates under Content System.
The following functions are available on the Portfolio Templates page.
To . . .
add a template
click . . .
Add Template. The Add Portfolio Template page will
appear.
remove a template the check box next to each template that should be
removed then click Remove in the action bar. The template
will be removed from the system.
make changes to a Modify next to the template. The Modify Template page will
template
appear. Administrators modify the template and availability
from this page.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 390
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Portfolio Template
Overview
Administrators create templates and set template availability from the Add Portfolio
Template page.
Note: Administrators may place images and media files that are included in Portfolio
Templates, in a publicly available folder within the Content System. For example, they
may create a publicly available folder in /institution for Portfolio Template images.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Add Portfolio Template page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Portfolio Templates under Content System.
Step 3
Select Add Portfolio Template.
The following fields are available on the Add Portfolio Template page.
Field
Description
Item Information
Title:
Enter a name for the template.
Item:
Create the template in this area using WYSIWYG.
Item Options
Select Yes or No to make this template available to users. Administrators can
create templates and make them available at a later date using this feature.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 391
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 4 – Custom Metadata
Overview
This chapter explains the custom metadata features in the Content System.
In this chapter
Chapter 4—Custom Metadata includes the following topics.
Topic
Custom Metadata
Add Metadata Field
Custom Metadata Properties
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Custom Metadata page.
Administrators create and modify custom
metadata from this page.
This topic covers the Add Metadata Field.
Administrators may add metadata field from
this page.
This topic covers the Custom Metadata
Properties page. Administrators may modify
the custom metadata properties from this
page.
Page 392
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Custom Metadata
Overview
Find this page
Function
Metadata is descriptive information about an item in the Content System. Metadata
can be used in searches within the Blackboard Content System or to ensure that an
item is interoperable with other systems. Administrators may create, modify and
manage custom metadata fields for their institution on the Custom Metadata page.
Custom Metadata fields appear in the metadata options for each item that is added to
the Content System.
Follow these steps to open the Custom Metadata page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Custom Metadata under Content System.
The following functions are available on the Custom Metadata page.
To . . .
add a metadata
field
modify the
properties of the
custom metadata
remove a field
click . . .
Add Field. The Add Metadata Field will appear.
Manage Properties. The Custom Metadata Properties
page will appear.
the check box next to each field that should be removed
then click Remove in the action bar. The field will be
removed from the system.
make changes to a Modify next to the field. The Modify Metadata Field page
template
will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 393
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Add Metadata Field
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Administrators create custom metadata fields for their institution on the Add Metadata
Field page. These fields appear in the metadata options for each item that is added to
the Content System.
Follow these steps to open the Add Metadata Field page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Custom Metadata under Content System.
Step 3
Select Add Field.
The following fields are available on the Add Metadata Field page.
Field
Description
Define Metadata Field
Display Name:
Enter a name for the metadata field. The Display Name is
shown to end users.
Key Name:
Enter a unique identifier. This identifier is separate from the
display name of the field so that the Administrator can use a
more technical or non-intuitive name that will not change
and can be mapped to field names in other systems.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 394
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Custom Metadata Properties
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Administrators change the properties for the institution’s Custom Metadata on the
Custom Metadata Properties page.
Follow these steps to open the Custom Metadata Properties page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Custom Metadata under Content System.
Step 3
Select Manage Properties.
The following fields are available on the Custom Metadata Properties page.
Field
Description
Custom Metadata Display Name
Display Name:
Enter a name for Custom Metadata. This name will appear
to users in place of the “Custom Metadata” title.
Namespace:
Namespaces are used to prevent collisions among sets of
metadata. The namespace for the system should reflect the
name of the institution or Blackboard installation in order to
keep it from colliding or being confused with custom
metadata on other systems.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 395
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 5 – Display Options
Overview
This chapter explains the Display option features in the Content System.
In this chapter
Chapter 5—Display Options includes the following topics.
Topic
Content List Display Options
Menu Display Options
Manage Shortcut View
Shortcut Properties
Manage Folder View
Menu Display Properties
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Content List Display
Options page. Administrators customize the
actions and columns available to users from
this page.
This topic covers the Menu Display Options
page. Administrators customize the left-side
menu in the Content System view from this
page.
This topic covers the Manage Shortcut View
page. Administrators manage the names and
availability of options in the Shortcut View from
this page.
This topic covers the Shortcut Properties page.
Administrators manage the display of the
Shortcut View from this page.
This topic covers the Manage Folder View page.
Administrators manage the names and
availability of options in the Folder View from
this page.
This topic covers the Menu Display Properties
page. Administrators manage the display of the
Folder View from this page.
Page 396
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Content List Display Options
Overview
Administrators may set which actions can be performed on the Content List page by
users. For example, the option to copy items may be made available, or hidden from
the Content List page. Administrators may also set which columns appear on the page.
The following is an example of a Content List page:
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 397
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Content List Display Options page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Fields
Administrator Manual
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Display Options under Content System.
Select Content List Display Options.
The following fields are available on the Content List Display Options page.
Field
Description
Display Actions
Click Yes or No to select which items will appear in the Action Bar. Actions that
do not appear are hidden; they are not disabled.
Display Columns
Click Yes or No to select which columns will be displayed in the Content List.
Show/Hide Quota Information
Select Yes or No to determine if quota information for the files will appear.
Set Default Items per Page
Select the number of items that will be displayed on the page before the user
must page to the next window to view additional records.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 398
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Menu Display Options
Overview
Find this page
Fields
Administrators may customize the presentation of the left-hand navigation menu to
users. For example, they can allow users to view the menu in only the Shortcut View
or the Folder View. They may also select a default view if both options are available.
Follow these steps to open the Menu Display Options page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Display Options under Content System.
Step 3
Select Menu Display Options.
The following fields are available on the Menu Display Options page.
Field
Description
Menu Display Options
Content Menu
Select the menu view that will be available to users.
View:
Folder View Options
Display
Select Yes for the Expand/Collapse icons to display to
Expand/Collapse users. These icons are only displayed in the Folder View of
All icons:
the menu. Select No and the Expand/Collapse icons will be
hidden.
Display Refresh: Select Yes and the Refresh option will be available to users.
This option is only displayed in the Folder View. Selecting
this option enables users to update the left-side navigation
menu to display any changes that have been made to the
menu. Select No and the Refresh option will not be
available to users.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 399
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
User Preference
If the Administrator selects to enable both the Folder and Shortcut view, the user’s
preference will override the default set by the Administrator. For example, if the User
selects the Shortcut view, the Shortcut view will appear, even if the Administrator has
set the default to the Folder view.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 400
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Shortcut View
Overview
Find this page
The Manage Shortcut View page is used to control the appearance of the Shortcut
View in the left-hand navigation panel. The Shortcut View includes icons that open the
content areas in the main panel. Changes to the Shortcut view will NOT impact the
Folder view of the Content System.
Follow these steps to open the Manage Shortcut View page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Function
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Display Options under Content System.
Select Manage Shortcut View.
Click the Manage link for an area to edit the shortcut name or change the availability
for that area.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 401
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Shortcut Properties
Overview
Find this page
The icons that appear in the shortcut view can be renamed and toggled on and off.
Follow these steps to open the Shortcut Properties page.
Step
Step
Step
Step
Fields
1
2
3
4
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Display Options under Content System.
Select Manage Shortcut View.
Click Manage for a content area.
The following fields are available on the Shortcut Properties page.
Field
Shortcut Name
Name:
Description
Edit the name of the content area. The current name will
display in this field.
Shortcut Availability
Select Yes or No to display a shortcut to the content area. If No is selected this
area will not appear on the left-side navigation menu. This area is hidden, not
disabled, in the system.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 402
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Folder View
Overview
Find this page
The Manage Folder View page is used to control the appearance of the Folder view in
the left-side navigation panel. The Folder view displays a tree of the folders in each
area of the Content System. Users may expand and collapse folders and subfolders, as
well as access Tools and Portfolios. Changes to the Folder view will NOT impact the
Shortcut view of the Content System.
Follow these steps to open the Manage Shortcut View page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Function
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Display Options under Content System.
Select Manage Folder View.
Click the Manage link for an area to edit the name, style or change the availability.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 403
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Menu Display Properties
Overview
Find this page
The names of areas that appear in the Folder View may be changed on the Menu
Display Properties page. The Administrator may also change the color of the header
areas and the area availability.
Follow these steps to open the Shortcut Properties page.
Step
Step
Step
Step
Fields
1
2
3
4
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Display Options under Content System.
Select Manage Folder View.
Click Manage for a content area.
The following fields are available on the Menu Display Properties page.
Field
Shortcut Name
Name:
Header Color
Background
Color
Description
Edit the name of the content area. The current name will
display in this field.
Click Pick to open a palette. Move the mouse around the
color field to see the different color variations. Single-click
to select the color that appears.
Alternatively, the hexadecimal RGB value can be entered in
the text field. Entering the code allows a perfect match to a
color. For example, a portfolio color scheme can be created
to match a school’s colors.
The color selected will be used as the background for the
headers in the folder view..
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 404
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Text Color
Administrator Manual
Click Pick to open a palette. Move the mouse around the
color field to see the different color variations. Single-click
to select the color that appears.
Alternatively, the hexadecimal RGB value can be entered in
the text field. Entering the code allows a perfect match to a
color.
The color selected will be used as the text for header name
in the folder view. Please make sure to select a text color
that contrasts with the background color for easy viewing.
Content Area Options
Display the
Select Yes or No to display the folder in the Content Menu.
/folder name
If No is selected the area will not appear on the left-side
Content Area in
navigation menu. This area is hidden, not disabled, in the
the Content
system.
Menu
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 405
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 6 – Content System Settings
Overview
This chapter explains the Setting options in the Content System.
In this chapter
Chapter 6—Content System Settings includes the following topics.
Topic
Default Folder Creation
Manage System Creation of
Folders: /courses and
/organizations
Manage System Creation of
Folders: /users
Enable / Disable Features and
Tools
Privacy Settings
Manage eReserves
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Default Folder Creation
page. Administrators select which folders are
created by default in a user’s Content System.
This topic covers the Manage System Creation
of Folders: /courses and /organizations page.
Administrators manage the creation of default
folders in /courses and /organizations from this
page.
This topic covers the Manage System Creation
of Folders: /users page. Administrators
manage the creation of default folders in /users
from this page.
This topic covers the Enable/Disable Features
and Tools page. Administrators may turn
features and tools on and off in the system.
This topic covers the Privacy Settings page.
Administrators may set the User Directory
Privacy Setting from this page.
This topic covers the Manage eReserves page.
Administrators may enable or disable
eReserves for the Content System.
Page 406
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Default Folder Creation
Overview
Find this page
This page displays the top-level folders, or directories, in the Blackboard Content
System. From this page, Administrators may manage the quotas and permissions for
folders created by default within these top-level folders.
Follow these steps to open the Default Folder Creation page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Function
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Settings under Content System. The Settings page will appear.
Select Default Folder Creation.
The following functions are available on the Default Folders page.
To . . .
set permissions
and quotas for
folders in the
/courses directory
set permissions
and quotas for
folders in the
/courses directory
create folders and
set quotas for user
folders
click . . .
Manage next to the /courses directory. The Manage System
Creation of Folders: /courses will appear.
Manage next to the /organizations directory. The Manage
System Creation of Folders: /organizations will appear.
Manage next to the /users directory. The Manage System
Creation of Folders: /users will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 407
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage System Creation of Folders: /courses and /organizations
Overview
Find this page
This page allows Administrators to set up permissions and quotas for folders that are
created by default in the Blackboard Content System. For example, when a user
enters the Blackboard Content System for the first time, folders matching the Course
ID(s) for the courses the user is enrolled in will automatically be created.
Follow these steps to open the Manage System Creation of Folders: /courses or
/organizations page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Settings under Content System. The Settings page will appear.
Select Default Folder Creation. The Default Folder Creation page will
appear.
Select Manage next to the /courses folder.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 408
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The Manage System Creation of Folders: /courses or /organizations page includes the
following fields.
Field
Description
Default Role Settings
Roles with Full
Select the user roles that will have full permissions to
Permissions
access the folders created in this area of their Blackboard
Content Systems. Full permissions include
Read/Write/Remove/Manage privileges. See Manage
Permissions for information on sharing the folder with
specific users.
Default Quota
Default Quota
Set a default quota for the folders created within the toplevel folders for courses or organizations. Enter ‘-1’ if there
should be no quota. Note: The quota cannot be changed for
existing folders. If a quota is changed, only newly created
folders will have the new quota size. Administrators may
change the quota for an existing folder on an individual
basis.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 409
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage System Creation of Folders: /users
Overview
Find this page
When a user enters the Blackboard Content System for the first time, a folder with
their name is automatically created in the /users directory. The Manage System
Creation of Folders: /users page allows Administrators to select which user roles have
default folders created. They may also set quotas for these folders. Users are given full
permissions to these folders; this includes read, write, remove, and manage
permissions.
Follow these steps to open the Manage System Creation of Folders: /users page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Settings under Content System. The Settings page will appear.
Select Default Folder Creation. The Default Folder Creation page will
appear.
Select Manage next to the /users folder.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 410
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The Manage System Creation of Folders: /users page includes the following fields.
Field
Description
Default Role Settings
Enable Default
Select which users will have folders created matching their
Folder Creation
usernames. This folder is created by default when the user
enters the Content System for the first time.
Default Quota
Default Quota
Set a default quota for each type of role. For example,
Student folders may be set to 20 MB, but Instructor folders
may have a quota of 25MB. Note: The quota cannot be
changed for existing folders. If a quota is changed, only
folders created for new users in that role will have the new
quota size. For example, if the quota for Instructors is
changed, the folder size for existing Instructors will not
change. Folders for new Instructors will have the new
quota.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 411
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Enable/Disable Features and Tools
Overview
Find this page
Administrators can manage which features and tools within the Content System are
available to users on the Enable/Disable Features and Tools page. The options on this
page may also be used to set the availability of Portfolios.
Follow these steps to open the Enable/Disable Features and Tools page.
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Fields
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Settings under Content System. The Settings page will appear.
Select Enable/Disable Features and Tools.
The following fields are available on the Enable/Disable Features and Tools page.
Field
Description
Enable / Disable Content System
Enable Content
Select Yes to make the Content System available to Users.
System:
Select No and the Content System will not be available on
the system. If No is selected, neither the Content System
tab nor links to Content System Tools will appear in the
system.
Enable/Disable Content Features
Enable Course
Select Yes to allow Instructors to add items from the
Content Type:
Content System to their courses. If Yes is selected, the
option to add Content Items will appear in Content Areas of
courses. If No is selected, items from the Content System
may not be added to courses.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 412
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Enable Text Box
Editor Links:
Enable Content
Passes:
Enable Versions:
Enable Locks:
Enable Content
Comments:
Enable Content
Tracking:
Enable Content
Metadata:
Administrator Manual
Select Yes to allow users to add files to the Text Box Editor.
If Yes is selected, a third row of buttons appears in the Text
Box Editor action bar. Users may upload different files
types, such as image and audio files, using these buttons. If
No is selected, the third row of buttons will not appear in
the Text Box Editor.
Select Yes or No to enable users to use Content Passes.
Select Yes or No to enable users to use versioning for their
files.
Select Yes or No to enable users to add locks to their
content.
Select Yes or No to enable users to use Comments.
Select Yes or No to enable users to track their content.
Select Yes or No to enable users to use metadata. Elect the
check boxes below to determine which types of metadata
will be available.
Enable/Disable Tools
Enable
Select Yes or No to allow users to set up Workflow Activities.
Workflow
Activities:
Enable
Select Yes or No to make Bookmarks available to users.
Bookmarks:
Enable Search:
Select Yes or No to allow users to conduct searches in the
system.
Enable Go to
Select Yes or No to allow users to go directly to a specific
Location:
location in the system.
Enable Help:
Select Yes or No to enable Help in the Content System.
Enable / Disable Portfolios
Enable
Select Yes or No to allow users to create Portfolios. If Yes is
Portfolios
selected, select the User Roles that may create Portfolios.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 413
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Privacy Settings
Overview
Find this page
Users have the option of choosing Privacy Settings for their user information in the
User Directory of the Blackboard Learning System. The Privacy Settings page allows
Administrators to determine whether these privacy settings chosen by users will be
respected during user searches of the Content System.
Follow these steps to open the Privacy Settings page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Settings under Content System. The Settings page will appear.
Select Privacy Settings.
Choose privacy settings
Select Yes or No to determine if the privacy settings user’s set for the User Directory
will be respected.
If a User Name does not appear during a User Search in the Content System, check
the settings on this page and also the settings the user selected in Personal
Information. If the user did not choose to be listed in the User Directory, they will not
appear during User Searches in the Content System if Respect User Directory
privacy settings is set to Yes.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 414
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage eReserves
Overview
Find this page
eReserves allow librarians to make content available to users throughout the system.
Content may be made available in the Library Content folder, or placed into a course
folder within eReserves. Administrators may enable or disable the creation of eReserve
folders from the Manage eReserves page. All users, except Guests and Observers, may
view the content in the eReserves folders, but only the librarian may add or modify
content.
Follow these steps to open the Manage eReserves page.
Step 4
Step 5
Field
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select eReserves under Content System.
Select Yes to enable the creation of eReserve folders. Select No and eReserve folders
will not be automatically created. If No is selected and eReserves is enabled at a later
date, course folders within eReserves for courses added while eReserves was disabled,
will be automatically generated by the Instructor, Teaching Assistant, or Course
Builder.
Create eReserve Directory
The create-course-directory command line tool creates a directory for a course with a
given course ID and assigns appropriate permissions for that course and roles. This
command line tool will also initialize the eReserve directory for a course. eReserves
must be enabled in the system for this to be successful. See the Blackboard Content
System Setup Guide for additional information.
If the Administrator does not generate the eReserve directory, course folders within
eReserves are automatically generated when the Instructor, Teaching Assistant or
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 415
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Course Builder selects the eReserves folder in the file system. For example, if the
Instructor for a history class would like to create an eReserve folder, he or she would
click the eReserve folder. A folder with the Course ID of the history class will
automatically appear in the eReserves area.
Librarian Role
Administrators must create librarians to manage the content of eReserves. Librarians
are the only users who may add and modify content in this area; all other users, with
the exception of Guests and Observers, have read access to this area. Instructors may
also add items from eReserves to their courses.
Follow the steps below to create a librarian (multiple librarians may be created):
Step 1
Check that eReserves has been enabled through the System Control
Panel.
Step 2
Select Manage Content from the System Admin Panel.
Step 3
Select library in the file system.
Step 4
Select Modify next to eReserves. The Modify: eReserves page will
appear.
Step 5
Select Permissions. The Manage Permissions: eReserver page will allear.
Step 6
Select Add User. The Add User: eReserves page will appear.
Step 7
Complete the page. Enter the Username of the librarian in the Username
field. Select all options (Read, Write, Remove, and Manage) in the
Permissions field. Click Submit.
Note: Librarians may access eReserve folders using the Search feature. Course
folders within eReserves will only appear in the librarian’s file system if the librarian is
enrolled in the course.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 416
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Chapter 7 – Technical Settings
Overview
This chapter explains the Technical Setting options in the Content System.
In this chapter
Chapter 7—Technical Settings includes the following topics.
Log Settings
Topic
Manage Performance Settings
Manage Document Stores
Manage Document Store:
document store name
Database Settings
JDBC Settings
Storage Location
Temporary Storage Location
Deletion Audit Trail Report
Audit Trail Settings
Global Schema Settings
Bandwidth Properties
Bandwidth Restrictions
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Description
This topic covers the Log Settings page.
Administrators select general log settings and
enable tracing for specific logs from this page.
This topic covers the Manage Performance
Settings page. Administrators set up caching
for the Content System from this page.
This topic covers the Manage Document Stores
page. Administrators view the Document Store
information from this page.
This topic covers the Manage Document
Stores: document store name page. Links to
areas for managing the settings for Document
Stores appear on this page.
This topic covers the Database Settings page.
Administrators enter a password for the
document store database from this page.
This topic covers the JDBC Settings page.
Administrators set values for JBDBC
connections from this page.
This topic covers the Storage Location page.
Administrators enter the storage location for
Content System files from this page.
This topic covers the Temporary Storage
Location page. Administrators enter the
temporary storage location for Content System
files from this page.
This topic covers the Deletion Audit Trail Report
page. Administrators enter the path and dates
for the audit trail report from this page.
This topic covers the Audit Trail Settings page.
Administrators enter the amount of time to
save the audit trail from this page.
This topic covers the Global Schema Settings
page. Administrators enter connection
information for the Global Schema from this
page.
This topic covers the Bandwidth Properties
page. Links to areas for managing bandwidth
appear on this page.
This topic covers the Bandwidth Restrictions
page. Information about bandwidth for the
different directories appears on this page.
Page 417
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Bandwidth Restrictions:
/directory name
Bandwidth Settings
Authentication Properties
Full Text Settings
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Administrator Manual
This topic covers the Bandwidth Restrictions:
/directory name page. Administrators set the
amount of bandwidth for a directory from this
page.
This topic covers the Bandwidth Settings page.
Administrators manage bandwidth for the
Content System from this page.
This topic covers the Authentication Options
page. Administrators may allow persistent
cookies for the Content System from this page.
This topic covers the Full Text Settings page.
Administrators set up the time and duration for
the system rebuild of full text searches from
this page.
Page 418
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Log Settings
Overview
Error and information messages related to the system are generated in the default
Tomcat logs. The Log Settings page is used to generate additional information if there
is a problem with the system and debugging is necessary; this information is used by
Blackboard Product Support to remedy the situation.
Note: Administrators DO NOT need to restart Tomcat after enabling log events.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Log Setting page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Click Log Settings.
Blackboard Content System logs
All Blackboard Content System logs are stored in the logs directory under the top-level
blackboard directory. Within the logs directory there are folders that store logs as well
as an archive folder for logs that have been compressed and stored as a means of
managing the size of the log files.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 419
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The following fields are available on the Log Settings page.
Field
Description
General Log Settings
Log Events to
Select Yes to log events in the Content System to the Log
file:
file. Select No and events will not be logged.
Path/name of
Displays the path to the log file. This field cannot be
Log File:
modified.
Maximum Log
Set the maximum size for a log file.
File Size (0 for
unlimited):
Number of
Set the maximum number of logs that are saved.
Saved Log Files
(0 for
unlimited):
Log
Select Yes or No to log information messages for
Informational
debugging or statistical information purposes. Fatal
Message:
messages are logged regardless of this setting.
Log Tracing Settings
The log file will automatically include general details for all areas of the Content
System. Fields that are set to Yes for tracing on this page will include additional
details in the log. These options should remain on No, unless the system
requires debugging. Turning these options on may result in a significant
decrease in system performance.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 420
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Performance Settings
Overview
Find this page
The Manage Performance Settings page allows Administrators to set the number and
size of cached files. These settings may improve performance for users in the
Blackboard Content System.
Follow these steps to open the Manage Performance Setting page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Fields
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Click Performance Settings.
The following fields are available on the Manage Performance Settings page.
Field
Description
Performance Settings
File cache size:
Enter the size of the cache in MBs. Caching files in memory
will improve performance.
Root Directories Enter the number of root directories saved in the cache.
cached:
Caching root directories will improve performance; the
system will not have to contact the Global Schema for each
request to determine the location of the root directory.
Query statement Select Yes to enable the system to cache query statements.
cache enabled:
This will improve performance if the same query statements
are used multiple times. Select No and query statements
will not be cached.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 421
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Document Stores
Overview
The Manage Document Stores page displays the locations and details of Document
Stores in the system. Each top level directory in the Content System, such as /users
and /courses, is associated with a Document store. Administrators can manage the
configuration settings of each document store, including the following:



Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Manage Performance Setting page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Function
JDBC Settings
Storage and Temporary Storage location and settings
Deletion Audit Trail Settings and Reports
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Click Document Stores.
Select Manage next to a Document Store to access the Manage Document Store
page. This page includes links to areas that allow the Administrator to modify settings
and locations related to Document Stores.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 422
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Manage Document Store
Overview
Find this page
Administrators’ may customize the settings for the Document Store and modify the file
storage locations from the Manage Document Store page. The Document Store is the
top-level directories that contain the files in the Content System.
Follow these steps to open the Manage Document Store page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Click Document Stores. The Manage Document Stores page will appear.
Select Manage next to one of the Document Stores.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 423
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Available functions
The following functions are accessible through the Manage Document Store page:
To . . .
set the JDBC
properties
change the
location of the
Document Store
set up the
temporary storage
location for the
Document Store
generate a report
of items that have
been deleted from
the Document
Store
set the number of
days deleted items
will be tracked
click . . .
JDBC Settings. The JDBC Settings page will appear.
Storage Location. The Storage Location page will appear.
Temporary Storage Location. The Temporary Storage
Location page will appear.
Deletion Audit Trail Report. The Deletion Audit Trial
Report page will appear.
Deletion Audit Trail Settings. The Audit Trail Settings
page will appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 424
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
JDBC Settings
Overview
The Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) settings for a Document Store are modified on
the JDBC Settings page. Blackboard uses "pooled" connections to access the database.
Each Web request served by the application server requires at least one database
connection. If there are more requests than available connections, the requests are
blocked until a database connection is available for it to continue processing. Additional
memory resources are required by the database for each connection; however, allocating
more connections to the pool than required may degrade performance.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the JDBC Settings page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Step 3
Click Document Stores. The Manage Document Store page will open.
Step 4
Select Manage next to one of the Document Stores.
Step 5
Select JDBC Settings.
The following fields are
Field
JDBC Settings
Connection
Expiration:
Max
Connections:
Min
Connections:
available on the JDBC Settings page.
Description
Enter the number of minutes a database connection will
remain open before the system automatically closes it.
Enter the maximum number of connections that can exist in
the connection pool. If this number is too high, performance
may decrease.
Enter a minimum for the size of the database connection
pool.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 425
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Storage Location
Overview
Administrators enter the location of the Content System files for the Document Store on
the Storage Location page.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Storage Location page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Field
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Click Document Stores. The Manage Document Store page will open.
Select Manage next to one of the Document Stores.
Select Storage Location.
Enter the storage location path for the applicable operating system.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 426
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Temporary Storage Location
Overview
Administrators have the option of setting up a temporary storage location for the
Document Store. This duplicate set of data may be used for disaster recovery. In this
scenario, a combination of the database backup and this temporary file location, will
enable the Administrator to keep the system almost completely up to date in the event of
a disaster. This backup location can be set up in either the database or in an external
storage location; it cannot be the same as the main storage location.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Temporary Storage Location page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Step 3
Click Document Stores. The Manage Document Store page will open.
Step 4
Select Manage next to one of the Document Stores.
Step 5
Select Temporary Storage Location.
The following fields are available on the Temporary Storage Location page.
Field
Description
Temporary Storage Location
Temporary
Enter the path to the temporary storage location.
Storage Location
Temporary Storage Settings
Temporary
Select Never and files will remain in the temporary location
Storage Period:
indefinitely. Select the Delete in x days option to keep files
in the temporary storage location for a specific period of
time.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 427
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Deletion Audit Trail Report
Overview
This page allows the Administrator to generate a report of data that has been deleted by
users from a specific sub-directory in the Content System. This data is used in selective
file recover; it enables the Administrator to retrieve a single file that was deleted from the
Content System from a backup. This data is only available for as long as it is stored in the
Audit Trail Settings.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Deletion Audit Trail Report page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Step 3
Click Document Stores. The Manage Document Store page will open.
Step 4
Select Manage next to one of the directories.
Step 5
Select Deletion Audit Trail Report.
The following fields are available on the Deletion Audit Trail Report page.
Field
Audit Trial Report
Top-Level
Directory name:
Sub-Directory
Path:
From Date:
To Date:
Description
The top-level directory name appears here.
Enter the path to the sub-directory from which to generate
a report.
Enter the date on which the report should begin. Use the
MM/DD/YY format.
Enter the date on which the report should end. Use the
MM/DD/YY format.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 428
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Audit Trail Settings
Overview
When using the external storage location, files that have been deleted by users can still
be retrieved from backups by the Administrator. The delete audit trail provides the
Administrator with the file system location and file name of the deleted file. The Audit
Trail Settings page is used to set the number of days the audit trail will be available. Once
this amount of time has passed, the audit trail for the deleted file will no longer be
available. This small log is stored in the database; the lifetime may be set fairly high
without affecting system performance.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Audit Trial Settings page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Field
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Click Document Stores. The Manage Document Store page will open.
Select Manage next to one of the directories.
Select Deletion Audit Trail Settings.
Enter the number of days the audit trail will exist after a file is deleted. If zero is
entered the audit trail will never be stored.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 429
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Global Schema Settings
Overview
The Global Schema is the structure of the Content System database. It defines tables,
fields, and the relationships between tables and fields. The Global Schema Settings page
allows the Administrator to modify the settings for database connection times and the
size of the connection pool.
Find this page
Fields
Follow these steps to open the Global Schema Settings page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Step 3
Click Global Schema Settings.
The following fields are available on the Global Schema Settings page.
Field
Description
Global Schema Settings
Dead connection Enter the number of seconds before a ‘dead’ connection will
Timeout:
time out and be removed from the pool. A dead connection
is one that is not sending any activity,
Live connection
Enter the number of minutes before a live connection will
expiration:
expire. A live connection is an active connection that is not
sending any new data.
Maximum size of Enter the maximum number of connection that may exist in
connection pool: the connection pool. If this number is set too high,
performance may be affected.
Minimum size of Enter the minimum size of the connection pool.
connection pool:
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 430
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Bandwidth Properties
Overview
Find this page
Administrators’ set restrictions on bandwidth and configure the bandwidth settings
from the Bandwidth Properties page.
Follow these steps to open the Bandwidth Properties page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Click Bandwidth Properties.
Available functions
The following functions are accessible through the Bandwidth Properties page:
To . . .
set bandwidth
restrictions for the
top-level folders
configure
bandwidth settings
click . . .
Bandwidth Restrictions. The Bandwidth Restrictions page
will appear.
Bandwidth Settings. The Bandwidth Settings page will
appear.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 431
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Bandwidth Restrictions
Overview
Find this page
Administrators view the bandwidth limits for each directory, and the amounts of
bandwidth used on the Bandwidth Restrictions page. Bandwidth is the amount of data
that can be transmitted in a specific amount of time, for example bytes per second.
Setting a bandwidth for each directory helps manage performance on the system.
Follow these steps to open the Bandwidth Settings page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Click Bandwidth Properties. The Bandwidth Properties page will open.
Select Bandwidth Restrictions.
Available Function
Select Manage next to one of the Directory Names. The Bandwidth Restriction page
will appear, allowing the Administrator to change the amount of bandwidth for that
directory.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 432
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Bandwidth Restrictions: /directory name
Overview
Find this page
Field
Administrators designate the amount of bandwidth available to a directory from the
Bandwidth Restrictions: /directory name page.
Follow these steps to open the Bandwidth Restrictions page.
Step 1
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Step 2
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Step 3
Click Bandwidth Properties. The Bandwidth Properties page will open.
Step 4
Select Bandwidth Restrictions.
Step 5
Select Manage next to one of the Directory Names.
Set the amount of bandwidth in MBs that is available to this directory.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 433
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Bandwidth Settings
Overview
Find this page
Administrators set up bandwidth settings and checks on the Bandwidth Settings page.
Follow these steps to open the Bandwidth Settings page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Fields
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Click Bandwidth Properties. The Bandwidth Properties page will open.
Select Bandwidth Settings.
The following fields are available on the Bandwidth Settings page.
Field
Description
Bandwidth Settings
Check
Use the drop-down list to limit the amount of bandwidth
bandwidth limits allowed for each user or session.
Default
Enter a bandwidth quota granted to each user account. This
bandwidth quota is only applied if the bandwidth has been limited in the
Check Bandwidth limits field.
Time over which Define the period of time over which a bandwidth quota is
to apply
measured. For example, if this is set to 1 hour and the
bandwidth quota Default bandwidth quota is 100MB, a 100MB file could only
be downloaded or uploaded once over the course of 1 hour.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 434
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Authentication Options
Overview
Using persistent cookies increases the usability of WebDAV; users will not be asked to
authenticate multiple times when persistent cookies are used. If persistent cookies are
not allowed users may have to authenticate multiple times when accessing content in
Web folders.
Note: If persistent cookies are used, users must select the Logout button to end their
session. Simply closing the browser window will not end the session.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Authentication Options page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Fields
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Click Authentication Properties.
Select Yes to allow persistent cookies. Select No and persistent cookies will not be
allowed in the system.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 435
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Full Text Settings
Overview
The full text search index creates an index of all terms in the documents and file
names within the Content System. When a search is performed, the system queries
this index to find results. This method enhances system performance in that the
search query uses a stored set of data, rather than querying all active data on the
system for each search request.
Administrators set the time and the duration for the system to rebuild the Full Text
Search index on the Full Text Search page. If a rebuild is not complete within the
duration set, the index will begin rebuilding next time from the point it left off. For
best results, Administrators should always try to allow the system to completely
rebuild the search indexes.
Note: If the system has automated backup, check that the settings on the Full Text
Settings page do not interfere with the backup.
Note: Full Text Search does not index text from encrypted .pdf documents.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Full Text Settings page.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select Technical Settings under Content System. The Technical Settings
page will appear.
Click Full Text Search Settings.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 436
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Fields
Administrator Manual
The following fields are available on the Full Text Settings page.
Field
Description
Full Text Settings
Hour of Day:
Select the time for the system to begin rebuilding the Full
Text Search indexes.
Duration to Run:
Status of Last
Run:
Last Started:
Last Finished:
Immediate
Update:
Select Until Completion and the system will completely
rebuild the search indexes. Select a specific amount of time
and the system will rebuild the search indexes for the
allotted time. It is recommended that this value is set to a
minimum of one hour. The search indexes may not be fully
rebuilt when the system stops.
Displays the status of the last attempt of the system to
rebuild the search indexes.
Displays the time the last rebuild of the search indexes
began.
Displays the time the last rebuild of the search indexes
finished.
If Yes is selected, the full text index will be updated as files
are added or modified. Select No, and the index will be
updated when the Full Text Search index is rebuilt during
the next periodic index. Turning this option on may impact
performance.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 437
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
System Information
Overview
Find this page
The System Information page displays information about the Blackboard Content
System, such as the build version and installation date.
Follow these steps to open the System Information page.
Step 1
Step 2
Field
Open the Blackboard Learning System Administrator Control Panel.
Select System Information under Content System.
The information on this page is display only; none of the data may be modified.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 438
Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.1)
Administrator Manual
Appendix – Updates Since Publication
This document was published on March 3, 2004
There have been no updates since publication.
© 2004 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 439
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement